Digital PDFs

AA-Z300A-TE

September 1984

352 pages

Original

36MB

Document:	VMS 4.0 VAX EDT Reference Manual
Order Number:	AA-Z300A-TE
Revision:
Pages:	352
Original Filename:	https://archive.org/download/stx_AA-Z300A-TE_VMS_4.0_VAX_EDT_Reference_Manual_Sep84/AA-Z300A-TE_VMS_4.0_VAX_EDT_Reference_Manual_Sep84.pdf

OCR Text

VAX EDT
Reference Manual
Order Number: AA-Z300A-TE

September 1984
This manual serves as a reference source for the EDT interactive text
editor. The manual is intended for all users of EDT.

Revision/Update Information:

This manual supersedes the EDT
Editor Manual, Order No.
AA-J726A-TC.

Software Version:

VAX/VMS Version 4.0

digital equipment corporation
maynard, massachusetts

September 1984
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should
not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital
Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear
in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may be
used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on equipment
that is not supplied by Digital Equipment Corporation or its affiliated companies.
Copyright ©1984 by Digital Equipment Corporation
All Rights Reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.
The postpaid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this document
requests the user's critical evaluation to assist in preparing future documentation.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:
DEC
DEC/CMS
DEC/MMS
DECnet
DECsystem-10
DECSYSTEM-20
DECUS
DECwriter

DIBOL
EduSystem
IAS
MASSBUS
PDP
PDT
RSTS
RSX

UNIBUS
VAX
VAXcluster
VMS
VT

BQSDEED
ZK-2303

This document was prepared using an in-house documentation production system. All
page composition and make-up was performed by T^X, the typesetting system developed
by Donald E. Knuth at Stanford University. T^X is a registered trademark of the American
Mathematical Society.

Contents
PREFACE

SUMMARY OF TECHNICAL CHANGES

xiii

PARTI
INTRODUCTION TO EDT

EDT-1

1.1

SUMMARY OF EDT
1.1.1
Keypad Mode
1.1.2
Line Mode
1.1.3
Nokeypad Mode

EDT-1
EDT-2
EDT-2
EDT-3

1.2

KEYPAD MODE

EDT-3

1.3

LINE MODE

EDT-5

1.4

NOKEYPAD MODE

EDT-6

1.5

THE JOURNAL FACILITY

EDT-7

1.6

STARTUP COMMAND FILES

EDT-7

1.7

DEFINING KEYS

EDT-8

1.8

EDT MACROS

EDT-11

SECTION 1

Contents

PART II

EDT COMMANDS
ADVANCE FUNCTION
APPEND FUNCTION

EDT-15
EDT-17

BACKSPACE FUNCTION CTRL/H

EDT-19

BACKUP FUNCTION

EDT-20

BOTTOM FUNCTION

EDT-21
EDT-22

CHAR (CHARACTER) FUNCTION
CHNGCASE (CHANGE CASE) FUNCTION

EDT-23

COMMAND FUNCTION

EDT-25

CTRL/A (CONTROL A) FUNCTION

EDT-27

CTRL/C (CONTROL C) FUNCTION

EDT-29

CTRL/D (CONTROL D) FUNCTION
CTRL/E (CONTROL E) FUNCTION

EDT-31
EDT-33

CTRL/K (CONTROL K) FUNCTION

EDT-35

CTRL/L (CONTROL L) FUNCTION

EDT-38

CTRL/M (CONTROL M) FUNCTION
CTRL/R (CONTROL R) FUNCTION

EDT-40
EDT-42

CTRL/T (CONTROL T) FUNCTION

EDT-43

CTRL/U (CONTROL U) FUNCTION

EDT-45

CTRL/W (CONTROL W) FUNCTION

EDT-46
EDT-47

CTRL/Z (CONTROL Z) FUNCTION
CUT FUNCTION
DEL C (DELETE CHARACTER) FUNCTION

EDT-48
EDT-50

DEL EOL (DELETE TO END OF LINE)
FUNCTION

EDT-52

DELETE FUNCTION

EDT-54

DEL L (DELETE LINE) FUNCTION

EDT-56

DEL W (DELETE WORD) FUNCTION

EDT-58

DO FUNCTION

EDT-60

DOWN ARROW

EDT-62

ENTER FUNCTION
EOL (END OF LINE) FUNCTION
FILL FUNCTION (VT100)

GOLD FUNCTION

EDT-63
EDT-65
EDT-66
EDT-68
EDT-70
EDT-72

HELP FUNCTION

EDT-75

LEFT ARROW
LINE FUNCTION

EDT-76
EDT-77

FIND FUNCTION
FNDNXT (FIND NEXT) FUNCTION

Contents

LINEFEED FUNCTION

EDT-78

OPEN LINE FUNCTION
PAGE FUNCTION

EDT-80
EDT-82

PASTE FUNCTION

EDT-84

REPLACE FUNCTION

EDT-87

RESET FUNCTION

EDT-89

RETURN FUNCTION

EDT-91

RIGHT ARROW

EDT-93

SECT (SECTION) FUNCTION

EDT-94

SELECT FUNCTION

EDT-96

SPECINS (SPECIAL INSERT) FUNCTION

EDT-98

STRING SPECIFIER

EDT-100

SUBS (SUBSTITUTE) FUNCTION

EDT-101

TAB FUNCTION CTRL/I

EDT-104

TOP FUNCTION

EDT-106

UND C (UNDELETE CHARACTER) FUNCTION

EDT-107

UND L (UNDELETE LINE) FUNCTION

EDT-108

UND W (UNDELETE WORD) FUNCTION

EDT-110
EDT-112

UP ARROW
WORD FUNCTION
/BRIEF QUALIFIER
BUFFER SPECIFIER

EDT-113
EDT-114

CHANGE COMMAND

EDT-115
EDT-117

CLEAR COMMAND

EDT-119

COPY COMMAND

EDT-120

CTRL/C (CONTROL C) FUNCTION

EDT-122

CTRL/R (CONTROL R) FUNCTION
CTRL/Z (CONTROL Z) FUNCTION

EDT-123
EDT-124

DEFINE KEY COMMAND

EDT-125

DEFINE MACRO COMMAND

EDT-128

DELETE COMMAND

EDT-130

/DUPLICATE QUALIFIER
EXIT COMMAND
FILL COMMAND
FIND COMMAND

EDT-132
EDT-133
EDT-136
EDT-138

HELP COMMAND
INCLUDE COMMAND
INSERT COMMAND
MOVE COMMAND
NEXT COMMAND
/NOTYPE QUALIFIER
<NULL> COMMAND
PRINT COMMAND

EDT-140
EDT-141
EDT-142
EDT-144
EDT-146
EDT-147
EDT-148
EDT-151
V

Contents

/QUERY QUALIFIER

EDT-152

QUIT COMMAND

EDT-154

RANGE SPECIFIER
REPLACE COMMAND

EDT-155
EDT-157

RESEQUENCE COMMAND

EDT-159

/SAVE QUALIFIER

EDT-160

/SEQUENCE QUALIFIER

EDT-161

SET [NO]AUTOREPEAT COMMAND

EDT-162

SET CASE COMMAND

EDT-163

SET COMMAND COMMAND

EDT-164

SET CURSOR COMMAND

EDT-166

SET ENTITY COMMAND

EDT-167

SET [NO]FNF COMMAND

EDT-169

SET HELP COMMAND
SET KEYPAD COMMAND

EDT-170
EDT-171

SET LINES COMMAND

EDT-172

SET MODE COMMAND

EDT-174

SET [NO]NUMBERS COMMAND

EDT-175

SET PARAGRAPH [NO]WPS COMMAND

EDT-176

SET PROMPT COMMAND
SET [NOJQUIET COMMAND

EDT-178

SET [NO]REPEAT COMMAND
SET SCREEN COMMAND
SET SEARCH COMMAND
SET [NO]SUMMARY COMMAND

EDT-180
EDT-181
EDT-182
EDT-184
EDT-187

SET TAB COMMAND

EDT-188

SET TERMINAL COMMAND

EDT-190

SET TEXT COMMAND

EDT-192

SET [NO]TRUNCATE COMMAND

EDT-193

SET [NO]VERIFY COMMAND

EDT-194

SET WORD [NO]DELIMITER COMMAND

EDT-195

SET [NO]WRAP COMMAND

EDT-197

SHOW AUTOREPEAT COMMAND

EDT-199

SHOW BUFFER COMMAND
SHOW CASE COMMAND
SHOW COMMAND COMMAND
SHOW CURSOR COMMAND

EDT-200
EDT-201
EDT-202

SHOW ENTITY COMMAND

EDT-203
EDT-204

SHOW FILES COMMAND
SHOW FNF COMMAND
SHOW HELP COMMAND
SHOW KEY COMMAND
SHOW KEYPAD COMMAND

EDT-205
EDT-206
EDT-207
EDT-208
EDT-210

Contents

SHOW LINES COMMAND

EDT-211

SHOW MODE COMMAND

EDT-212

SHOW NUMBERS COMMAND
SHOW PARAGRAPH COMMAND

EDT-213
EDT-214

SHOW PROMPT COMMAND

EDT-215

SHOW QUIET COMMAND
SHOW REPEAT COMMAND

EDT-216
EDT-217

SHOW SCREEN COMMAND

EDT-218

SHOW SEARCH COMMAND

EDT-219

SHOW SUMMARY COMMAND

EDT-221

SHOW TAB COMMAND

EDT-222

SHOW TERMINAL COMMAND

EDT-224

SHOW TEXT COMMAND

EDT-225

SHOW TRUNCATE COMMAND
SHOW VERIFY COMMAND

EDT-226
EDT-227

SHOW VERSION COMMAND

EDT-228

SHOW WORD COMMAND

EDT-230

SHOW WRAP COMMAND
/STAY QUALIFIER

EDT-231
EDT-232

STRING SPECIFIER

EDT-233

SUBSTITUTE COMMAND

EDT-234

SUBSTITUTE NEXT COMMAND

EDT-237

TAB ADJUST COMMAND

EDT-239
EDT-241

TYPE COMMAND
WRITE COMMAND
ADV (ADVANCE) COMMAND

EDT-243
EDT-244

APPEND COMMAND

EDT-245

ASC (ASCII) COMMAND

EDT-246

BACK (BACKUP) COMMAND

EDT-247

BELL COMMAND

EDT-248

BUFFER SPECIFIER

EDT-249

CHGC (CHANGE CASE) COMMAND
CHGL (CHANGE CASE LOWER) COMMAND
CHGU (CHANGE CASE UPPER) COMMAND
* (CIRCUMFLEX) COMMAND
CLSS (CLEAR SEARCH STRING) COMMAND

EDT-250
EDT-251
EDT-252
EDT-253
EDT-254

CTRL/C (CONTROL C) FUNCTION
CTRL/Z (CONTROL Z) FUNCTION

EDT-256
EDT-257

COUNT SPECIFIER
CUT COMMAND

EDT-258
EDT-259
EDT-260
EDT-262
EDT-263

D (DELETE) COMMAND
DATE COMMAND
DEFK (DEFINE KEY) COMMAND

vii

Contents

DESEL (DEACTIVATE SELECT) COMMAND

EDT-264

DLWC (DEFAULT LOWERCASE) COMMAND

EDT-265

DMOV (DEFAULT MOVE) COMMAND

EDT-266

DOWN ARROW

EDT-267

DUPC (DEFAULT UPPERCASE) COMMAND

EDT-268

ENTITY SPECIFIER

EDT-269

EX (EXIT TO LINE MODE) COMMAND
EXT (EXTEND) COMMAND

EDT-270
EDT-271

FILL COMMAND

EDT-272

HELP COMMAND

EDT-274

I (INSERT) COMMAND

EDT-275
EDT-277

KS (KED SUBSTITUTE) COMMAND
LEFT ARROW
"MOVE" COMMAND

EDT-278
EDT-279

PASTE COMMAND

EDT-281

QUIT COMMAND

EDT-284

R (REPLACE) COMMAND
REF (REFRESH) COMMAND
RIGHT ARROW

EDT-285
EDT-286
EDT-287

S (SUBSTITUTE) COMMAND

EDT-288

SEL (SELECT) COMMAND

EDT-290

SHL (SHIFT LEFT) COMMAND

EDT-292

SHR (SHIFT RIGHT) COMMAND

EDT-293

SN (SUBSTITUTE NEXT) COMMAND

EDT-294

SSEL (SEARCH AND SELECT) COMMAND

EDT-295

STRING SPECIFIER

EDT-296
EDT-298

TAB COMMAND
TADJ (TAB ADJUST) COMMAND

viii

TC (TAB COMPUTE) COMMAND

EDT-300
EDT-301

TD (TAB DECREMENT) COMMAND

EDT-303

TGSEL (TOGGLE SELECT) COMMAND

EDT-305

Tl (TAB INCREMENT) COMMAND

EDT-306

TOP COMMAND

EDT-308

UNDC (UNDELETE CHARACTER)
COMMAND
UNDL (UNDELETE LINE) COMMAND
UNDW (UNDELETE WORD) COMMAND
UP ARROW
XLATE COMMAND

EDT-309
EDT-310
EDT-312
EDT-314
EDT-315

Contents

APPENDIX A

DEC MULTINATIONAL CHARACTER SET

A-1

INDEX

FIGURES
1-1
1—2
1-3
1-4

Keypad Editing Keys—VT100-Type Terminals _
Keypad Editing Keys—VT52 Terminals _
Additional Keypad Editing Keys—LK201 Keyboards _
Keypad Key Numbers _

EDT-4
EDT-5
EDT-6
EDT-10

Preface
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for all levels of users.

Structure of This Document
This manual is organized into two parts. Part I includes a brief summary
of EDT features. It discusses the three modes (keypad, line, nokeypad), the
journal facility, startup command files, key definitions, and macros. Part II
lists and describes all the available EDT commands by mode.

Associated Documents
To learn how to use the EDT editor, see the Guide to Text Processing on
VAX/VMS.

Conventions Used in This Document
Convention

Meaning

fRETj

A symbol with a one- to three-character
abbreviation indicates that you press a key
on the terminal, for example, I ret | .

ICTRL/xl

The phrase CTRL/x indicates that you
must press the key labeled CTRL while
you simultaneously press another key, for
example, CTRL/C, CTRL/Y, CTRL/O.

$ SHOW TIME
05-JUN-1985 11:55:22

Command examples show all output lines or
prompting characters that the system prints
or displays in black letters. All user-entered
commands are shown in red letters. VT100
keys are shown in red, LK201 keys are
shown in blue, and VT52 keys are shown
in black.

Convention

Meaning

$ TYPE MYFILE.DAT

Vertical series of periods, or ellipsis, mean
either that not all the data that the system
would display in response to the particular
command is shown or that not all the data
a user would enter is shown.

file-spec,...

Horizontal ellipsis indicates that additional
parameters, values, or information can be
entered.

[logical-name]

Square brackets indicate that the enclosed
item is optional. (Square brackets are
not, however, optional in the syntax of a
directory name in a file specification or in
the syntax of a substring specification in an
assignment statement.)

quotation marks
apostrophes

The term quotation marks is used to refer
to double quotation marks ("). The term
apostrophe (') is used to refer to a single
quotation mark.

Summary of Technical Changes
Technical Changes
•

EDT's original line number facility has been replaced by new line
numbering features.

•

In keypad mode, the VT100 editing keys IgoldI +
and IgoldI + —♦ are no
longer predefined to SHL. (shift left) and SHR. (shift right) respectively.
However, you can add these definitions to your editing session if you need
them.

•

You must supply an input file specification with the INCLUDE command.

•

You must supply an output file specification with the PRINT and WRITE
commands. If you include a file specification with your EXIT command
but do not specify a file type, EDT uses the file type of the input file.

•

When your output file is a disk file and there is a system interruption
before EDT has had a chance to complete the processing of one of these
commands—EXIT, PRINT, WRITE—the incomplete copy appears in a file
with the file type .TMP (temporary). If a writing operation is completed
without interruption, the output file is renamed to have the file type you
specified.

•

When you use the RESEQUENCE command in line mode, EDT displays
a message indicating the exact number of lines that were actually
renumbered. The message no longer simply indicates the number of
lines that you specified in your RESEQUENCE command.

•

The CLEAR command deletes both the contents of a buffer and its
location. After you use CLEAR, the buffer you deleted no longer appears
in the SHOW BUFFER list, except in the case of MAIN or PASTE. With
the MAIN and PASTE buffers, CLEAR only deletes the contents of the
buffer; the names remain in the SHOW BUFFER list. When you use the
CLEAR command to delete the current buffer, EDT transfers you to the
MAIN buffer. If you include the CLEAR command in a key definition that
locates a buffer and then uses the INCLUDE command to add an external
file to that buffer, be sure to put the CLEAR command before the FIND
command (for example, DEFINE KEY GOLD F AS "EXT CLEAR BUFFI;
FIND =BUFF1; INCLUDE FILE.X" ). If the CLEAR command follows the
FIND command, EDT will automatically transfer you to the MAIN buffer
and include the external file in MAIN. If you have defined a buffer to
be a macro, the CLEAR command not only deletes that buffer, but also
removes the macro name from the list of valid line mode commands.

•

When you edit a file in a directory other than your current directory, EDT
now puts the journal file in the current directory, not the input or output
directory. You must use the /JOURNAL qualifier to have the journal file
created in a different directory.

•

EDT now records a CTRL/C in a journal file. You can use the journal
/recovery facility to restore an editing session in which you used CTRL/C
to abort an EDT command.

•

EDT has an upper limit of 32767 for repeat counts, entity counts, and the
/DUPLICATE line mode qualifier.

xiii

Summary of Technical Changes

•

When EDT starts up in change mode on a VT 100-type terminal, EDT sets
your screen width to the width recorded in the operating system. When
you exit from EDT, EDT returns the screen to this width.

•

EDT now contains much more error checking. Consequently, illegal
commands now produce error messages instead of undocumented effects.
The most visible result of this change is in the DEFINE KEY command.
You can no longer define keys by using keypad key numbers greater than
21; you must use the syntax described in this manual.

•

EDT is not supported on IAS systems.

New Features
•

The line numbering restrictions for EDT have been changed. In most
cases, the maximum number of lines is now subject to disk space
restrictions, rather than EDT limits. For EDT, the new maximum line
number is 2,814,749,767.

•

There are 12 new nokeypad commands in EDT. Many of these commands
have been added so that EDT can emulate the DECmail and WPS (word
processing) environments. The new commands follow:
BELL (sound the terminal bell)
CHGL (change case lower)
CHGU (change case upper)
CLSS (clear search string)
DATE (insert date)
DESEL (deactivate select range)
DLWC (default lowercase)
DMOV (default move)
DUPC (default uppercase)
SSEL (search and select)
TGSEL (toggle select)
XLATE (pass parameter to a running program)
The following new SET and SHOW commands have been added:
SET [NO]AUTOREPEAT
SET COMMAND
SET [NO]FNF
SET HELP
SET PARAGRAPH [NO]WPS
SET PROMPT
SET [NO]REPEAT
SET SEARCH WPS, CASE INSENSITIVE, DIACRITICAL
INSENSITIVE
SET [NO]SUMMARY
SET TERMINAL [NO]SCROLL, [NO]EIGHTBIT, [NO]EDIT
SET TEXT END/PAGE
SET WORD [N0]DELIMITER
SHOW AUTOREPEAT
SHOW COMMAND
SHOW FILES
SHOW FNF
SHOW HELP
SHOW KEYPAD
SHOW LINES
SHOW MODE
SHOW NUMBERS

xiv

Summary of Technical Changes

SHOW PARAGRAPH
SHOW PROMPT
SHOW QUIET
SHOW REPEAT
SHOW SUMMARY
SHOW TAB
SHOW TEXT END/PAGE
SHOW TRUNCATE
SHOW VERIFY
SHOW WORD
SHOW WRAP
•

You can redefine both the GOLD keypad key and the GOLD/GOLD key
sequence with the line mode DEFINE KEY command. Use the number 20
to designate the GOLD key.

•

EDT can now be called on VAX/VMS systems by programs. The calling
program can be written in any VAX-11 language that generates calls
based on the VAX-11 calling standard. See the VAX/VMS Utility Routines
Reference Manual manual for information about callable EDT.

•

EDT now supports the DEC Multinational Character Set.

•

EDT can be used with terminals that have LK201 keyboards.

PARTI

Introduction to EDT

Summary of EDT
EDT is an interactive text editor that has three distinct editing modes: keypad,
line, and nokeypad. Both the keypad and nokeypad modes are screen editors
for use on VTlOO-type terminals, VT52 terminals, and VT200 Series terminals.
Line mode can be used on any type of terminal—hardcopy or screen.
Note: Please note that 132 column mode is not supported on VT100 terminals
without A VO.
With the EDT editor you can create and edit almost all types of text files.
When you are editing a file, you can add or delete text, move or copy text
from one place to another, save or discard your editing work.
To invoke the EDT editor, you must use the system command EDIT. (If EDT
is not the standard editor on your operating system, you must include the
/EDT qualifier with the EDIT command.)
Include the name of the file you want to edit on the EDIT command line.
$ EDIT LETTER.DAT

If a file named LETTER.DAT exists in the current directory, EDT puts a copy
of that file into the MAIN buffer in your EDT session. Then EDT displays
the first line from the file on your screen or paper, followed by the line mode
asterisk prompt (*). You are now ready to begin your EDT session.
$ EDIT LETTER.DAT
1
June 4.

1985

If you are using EDT to create a new file called LETTER.DAT, your session
starts off like this:
$ EDIT LETTER.DAT
Input file does not exist
[EOB]
*

The message Input file does not exist tells you that no text was copied to the
MAIN buffer. The end of buffer mark ([EOB]) is printed in place of the first
line, since there is no text to display. The next step is to insert some text in
the buffer, using one of the three editing modes.
When you start your editing session, EDT's default mode is line mode. To
shift to keypad mode, use the line mode CHANGE command. To shift back
to line mode from keypad mode, use CTRL/Z.
To go from line mode to nokeypad mode, you must first give the SET
NOKEYPAD command and then the CHANGE command. The nokeypad EX
command shifts EDT from nokeypad editing back to line mode.

EDT—1

Introduction to EDT

You can use EDT's online HELP facility any time during your editing session.
The line mode HELP command supplies general information on EDT as
well as details on line mode and nokeypad mode commands. The HELP
command by itself provides information on using the HELP facility and a list
of topics that you can get help on. For help on a specific topic, type the HELP
command followed by the topic name, for example, HELP EXIT.
When you are in keypad mode, press the HELP key (PF2 on VTlOO-type
terminals, red on VT52s). EDT displays a diagram of the keypad, a list of
other keypad editing keys, and tells you to press the key you want help on.
You must use the line mode HELP command to get information on nokeypad
editing. The relevant topics are HELP CHANGE, HELP CHANGE SCREEN,
HELP CHANGE ENTITIES, and HELP CHANGE SUBCOMMANDS.
Nokeypad command descriptions are found under the SUBCOMMANDS
topic. Thus, if you want information on the BELL command, you must type
HELP CHANGE SUBCOMMANDS BELL.

1.1.1

Keypad Mode
This example uses keypad mode to insert the sample text.
$ EDIT LETTER.DAT
♦CHANGE

[EOB]

June 18. 1985
Mr. Charles R. Thurman
Director of Marketing
Energy Systems Inc.

ICTRL/Zl
♦EXIT
DISKSUSER:[SMITH]LETTER.DAT 50 lines

1.1.2

Line Mode
This example uses line mode to insert the sample text.
$ EDIT/EDT LETTER.DAT
♦INSERT
June 18. 1985
Mr. Charles R. Thurman
Director of Marketing
Energy Systems Inc.

~Z
(Press CTRL/Z)
♦EXIT
DISKSUSER:[SMITHlLETTER.DAT 50 lines

EDT—2

Introduction to EDT

1.1.3

Nokeypad Mode
This example uses nokeypad mode to insert the sample text.
$ EDIT/EDT LETTER.DAT
♦SET NOKEYPAD
♦CHANGE

I
I

[EOB]

Em
I
I
I
I
I

June 18. 1985
Mr. Charles R. Thurman
Director of Marketing
Energy Systems Inc.

ICTRL/Zl
EX
♦EXIT
DISK$USER:[SMITH]LETTER.DAT 50 lines

1.2

Keypad Mode
Keypad mode uses the numeric keypad located to the right of the main
keyboard on VTlOO-type and VT52 terminals. On terminals with LK201
keyboards, there are two keypads to the right of the main keyboard. The
numeric keypad at the right edge of the keyboard corresponds to the VT100
keypad.
The arrow keys on VT100-type terminals are considered to be part of the
keypad. On terminals with LK201 keyboards, the arrow keys are located at
the bottom of the second keypad.
Four keyboard keys have special keypad editing functions: BACKSPACE,
DELETE, LINEFEED, and TAB. On the LK201 keyboard, the DELETE key is
labelled <Z] . The BACKSPACE and LINEFEED keys are located in the row
of function keys across the top of the keyboard. (BACKSPACE is key FI 2;
LINEFEED is key F13.)
In addition, EDT has preset functions for several control key sequences. (The
letters marked with asterisks have preset functions with GOLD as well as
with CTRL.)
A*

F (VT52 only)

H
Most keypad keys have two editing functions associated with them. To
use the upper (primary) function (for example, FNDNXT) simply press the
indicated key. To use the lower (alternate) function (for example, FIND), first
press the GOLD key (PF1 on VT100; blue on VT52) and then the keypad

EDT—3

Introduction to EDT

key. Figure 1-1 shows the keypad editing keys for VTlOO-type terminals.
Figure 1-2 shows the keypad editing keys for VT52 terminals.
Figure 1-1

Keypad Editing Keys—VT100-Type Terminals

*—

DOWN

LEFT

-J

HELP

GOLD
20

SECT

FIND

UND L
17

11
—

DEL W

ADVANCE

BACKUP

BOTTOM

TOP

CUT

DEL C
UND C

PASTE

ENTER

)

UND W

DEL L

REPLACE

FILL

COMMAND

PF4

9
APPEND

_IV

FNDNXT

PAGE

PF3

PF2

^PFI

RIGHT

WORD

EOL

CHAR

CHNGCASE

DEL EOL

SPECINS

ENTER
i

•

0
LINE

SELECT

OPEN LINE

RESET

SUBS
V

_£1/

VT100
ZK-1767-84

For terminals that have the LK201 keyboard, EDT has preset keypad mode
definitions for the remaining keys on the second keypad as well as for some
function keys on the top row of the keyboard. Figure 1-3 shows the editing
keypad keys and lists the other preset function keys. The arrow keys are
located at the bottom of the editing keypad.
[M2l = BACKSPACE
[Fi3l = LINEFEED
<X1 = DELETE
I TABU TAB

EDT—4

Introduction to EDT

Figure 1-2

Keypad Editing Keys—VT52 Terminals

PF3
FNDNXT

PF2

^PFI

HELP

GOLD

t
1

SECT

PAGE

4
ADVANCE

5
BACKUP

BOTTOM

TOP

CUT

CHAR

EOL

SPECINS

DEL EOL

•
LINE

SELECT

ENTER
ENTER

RESET

SUBS

OPEN LINE

APPEND

<LEFT

CHNGCASE

SPECINS
6

WORD

->
RIGHT

PASTE

SECT

l DOWN

REPLACE

FILL

COMMAND

9
APPEND

REPLACE

FIND
10

_2iy

VT52
ZK-1768-84

1.3

Line Mode
Line editing can be used on any interactive terminal. This mode focuses on
the line as the unit of text. Whenever you see the line mode asterisk prompt
(*), you can type a line mode command. The underlined letters in the line
mode syntax statements that follow indicate the minimum abbreviation for
both command words and qualifiers.
Line mode commands use qualifiers and specifiers in addition to command
words. Qualifiers, which modify the way EDT processes the command, are
always optional. You must precede a qualifier with a slash (for example,
/QUERY). The line mode qualifiers are /BRIEF, /DUPLICATE, /NOTYPE,
/QUERY, /SAVE, /SEQUENCE, and /STAY.
Specifiers tell EDT which part of the text to act on. Optional specifiers are
enclosed in square brackets (for example, [=buffer]). The main specifier is
range, which references the line or lines affected by the command. See the
range specifier description for more information.
The SET and SHOW commands are line mode commands. SET commands
modify the way EDT behaves during your editing session. They have no
effect on the text you are editing. You can use SET commands to customize
your editing session. SHOW commands tell which SET commands are in

EDT—5

Introduction to EDT

Figure 1-3

Additional Keypad Editing Keys—LK201 Keyboards

r
Find

Insert
Here

Remove

Select

Prev
Screen

Next
Screen

*
(

VT200 Series

effect. Four SHOW commands (SHOW BUFFER, SHOW FILES, SHOW KEY,
and SHOW VERSION) have no corresponding SET commands.

1.4

Nokeypad Mode
Nokeypad mode is a screen editor for use with VT100-type and VT52
terminals. Text appears on the upper lines of the screen. As you type
commands, they are displayed at the bottom of the screen. When you press
RETURN, EDT processes the commands.
Nokeypad commands are the basis for keypad mode key definitions.
Nokeypad commands consist of English words and abbreviations. A number
of commands take the entity specifier to determine which part of the text will
be affected by the command. For more information see the entity specifier
description.
Nokeypad commands cannot have spaces. For example, to delete
two paragraphs and put the text in a buffer named EXTRA, type
CUT2PAR=EXTRA. You can put several nokeypad commands on the same
line. Spaces between commands are allowed, but not required. You can
repeat a series of commands by preceding the commands with the repeat
count and enclosing them in parentheses 3(V D+EL).

EDT—6

Introduction to EDT

1.5

The Journal Facility
EDTs journal facility keeps track of each keystroke you make during your
EDT session in a special file called the journal file. When you finish your
editing session by typing either EXIT or QUIT, EDT normally discards
the journal file. If your editing session ends abruptly because of a system
interruption, the journal file is saved, even though your editing work has
been lost. Using the journal file, EDT can restore almost all of your editing
work. Sometimes the last few commands you typed or the last few keypad
editing keys you pressed are not recorded in the journal file at the time the
interruption occurs.
The journal file is normally stored in the current directory and has .JOU for
the file type. The file name is the same as the name of the file you were
editing when the interruption took place. For example, if you are editing
the file LETTER.DAT, the journal file name is LETTER.JOU. (It is possible
to instruct EDT to use a different name or file type for the journal file. You
do this when you type the EDIT/EDT command line to start your session.
Information on including a journal file name in the EDIT/EDT command line
appears in the VAX/VMS DCL Dictionary.
Include the /RECOVER qualifier in your EDIT/EDT command line in order
to have EDT use the journal file to restore your editing work. Even when you
have used EDT to create a new file, you can use the /RECOVER qualifier to
have EDT restore your editing work after a system interruption.
$ EDIT/EDT/RECOVER LETTER.DAT

As soon as EDT has processed all the command information and keystrokes
stored in the journal file, it continues to use that journal file to store the new
information that results from any further editing work you do during the
recovery session. If you are able to end your editing session with EXIT or
QUIT, EDT discards the journal file from the directory. However, if you find
journal files in your directory that you do not plan to use, simply delete them.
You can use the /SAVE qualifier with the line mode EXIT or QUIT command
to save the journal file even when there is no system interruption.

1.6

Startup Command Files
Startup command files establish various settis and key definitions at the
start of your EDT session. These files can contain only line mode commands.
SET and DEFINE KEY commands are the ones most frequently found in
startup command files.
Generally, EDT reads a system-wide startup command file at the beginning of
your editing session. If no system-wide startup command file exists on your
system, EDT looks for a file named EDTINI.EDT in your default directory and
processes the commands in that file.
If you want EDT to use a startup command file with another name, you must
include that command file specification in the EDIT/EDT command line. See
the VAX/VMS DCL Dictionary for more information.
You can use EDT to create a startup command file. There are very few
restrictions to organizing such a file. If you need to use the carriage return
character (CTRL/M) in a SET or DEFINE KEY command, you must enter it
from change mode.

EDT—7

Introduction to EDT

Here are some typical commands that you might put in a startup command
file:
SET QUIET
SET WRAP 60
SET SEARCH BOUNDED
SET TAB 5
SET MODE CHANGE
DEFINE KEY GOLD P AS

"PAR.''

You can include all the necessary commands to set up an EDT macro in your
startup command file. The sample macro, called EXACT, resets the search
parameter to exact when you type the macro name as a line mode command.
The following commands can be put in the startup command file to create the
EXACT macro:
DEFINE MACRO EXACT
FIND =EXACT
INSERT;

SET SEARCH EXACT

FIND =MAIN

1.7

Defining Keys
You can redefine or relocate any preset keypad editing key. You can also
create definitions for editing keys that have none. These key definitions
enable you to perform a variety of editing tasks in keypad mode.
The following table shows the five types of keys or key sequences that can be
defined as well as any specific keys you cannot define:
Key/Key Sequence

Cannot Define

Keypad keys
Control keys
GOLD control key

C, 0, P, Q, S, X, Y, and [

GOLD keyboard key

0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, (When you use 1, %, \ or "
in the DEFINE KEY command, you
must enclose them in quotation
marks—for example: "!".)

DELETE
GOLD DELETE
FUNCTION key
GOLD FUNCTION key

LK201 keyboard only. FI, F2, F3,
F4, and F5 with or without GOLD.

In EDT the following special keyboard keys and control keys are linked.
When you redefine one, you have redefined the other.
LK201 1

VT100/VT52
BACKSPACE

CTRL/H

<—>

TAB

CTRL/I

< ->

Tab

LINEFEED

CTRL/J

<--->

F13

RETURN

CTRL/M

< ->

Return

F12

1 The LK201 FI 2 and F13 keys are linked to CTRL/H and CTRL/J when the terminal is in VT100 compatibility mode. When the terminal is
operating in VT200 mode, FI2 and FI3 are not linked to CTRL/H and CTRL/J. They have the same preset definitions, but can be defined
independently, just as CTRL/A and GOLD/A can be defined independently.

EDT—8

Introduction to EDT

Keypad key definitions use nokeypad command syntax. Nokeypad mode
enables you to put several commands on a single line. Thus, you can create
key definitions to do several commands in succession. If you want EDT to
process the command as soon as you press the key or key sequence, place a
period at the end of the definition. This corresponds to pressing the ENTER
key in keypad mode.
You can use the SHOW KEY command to find the existing definitions for all
EDT editing keys. However, you must use special terms to tell EDT which
key or key sequence you want information about. Figure 1-4 gives the
special keypad key numbers to use with the SHOW KEY command for VT100
and VT52 terminals. For control keys, type SHOW KEY CONTROL character
(for example, SHOW KEY CONTROL A). To find the definition of a GOLD
key sequence, type SHOW KEY GOLD keyboard key or SHOW KEY GOLD
CONTROL keyboard key (for example, SHOW KEY GOLD * or SHOW KEY
GOLD CONTROL ]). To see the definition for the DELETE key, spell out
the word (for example, SHOW KEY GOLD DELETE). To see the definition
for a key on the second keypad or in the function key row of the LK201
keyboard, spell out the word FUNCTION and use the EDT FUNCTION
number designation, not the F number that appears on the keyboard (for
example, SHOW KEY FUNCTION 24 for the FI2 key).
By enclosing all parts of the definition except the ending period in
parentheses, you can use the keypad GOLD repeat feature to process the
command(s) several times in succession.
There are two ways to define/redefine keypad editing keys. From keypad
mode you can use the CTRL/K function. The line mode DEFINE key
command can be accessed from any mode.
Using CTRL/K, you can press the key(s) you are defining. Whenever you
want to include a preset keypad editing key in your definition, you can press
that key as part of the definition process. EDT prompts you for both the key
you are defining and the definition. For example, suppose you want to define
CTRL/P to move a paragraph at a time:
I CTRL | +0
Press the key you wish to define
[CTRL] +0
Now enter the definition terminated by ENTER
PAR.
ENTER
SUBS

The DEFINE KEY command in line mode uses the typed out version of the
key name and requires that the definition be enclosed in quotation marks.
The same definition using line mode is:
DEFINE KEY CONTROL P AS "PAR."

To redefine keypad keys with the DEFINE KEY command, you must know
their special EDT numbers. Figure 1-4 shows these numbers for both VT 100type and VT52 terminals, as well as the FUNCTION numbers for the LK201
keyboard.

EDT—9

9
6

17
18
19

3
0

21
0

L
F6
17

FI 0

F11

FI 2 FI 3

FI 4

Help

To redefine the PAGE function to be

FI 7

, type the followin

DEFINE KEY 7 AS "(-W)."

To redefine GOLD Left Arrow to be "SHL." , type the following
DEFINE KEY GOLD 15 AS "SHL."

Here are some sample DEFINE KEY commands:
DEFINE KEY
DEFINE KEY
DEFINE KEY
DEFINE KEY
DEFINE KEY
DEFINE KEY

EDT—10

GOLD CONTROL B AS "CHGUW."
GOLD DELETE AS "-DW."
CONTROL V AS "(+V D-CI |~Z)."
CONTROL N AS "?'Nokeypad Command:
GOLD 21 AS "S~Q?'Find:
Substitute:
FUNCTION 17 AS "IWashington, DC~Z."

'“®."

Introduction to EDT

1.8

EDT Macros
EDT macros allow you to extend the line mode command language. A macro
is a group of one or more line mode commands that is processed when you
type the macro name as a line mode command word. For instance, you can
create a macro called XT to be the command SET SEARCH EXACT, and
another macro called GEN to be the command SET SEARCH GENERAL.
To create a macro, use a line mode command to move to a new buffer. That
buffer must have the same name as the macro. Using EDT, enter the line
mode command or commands that you want to be processed when you type
the macro name. Then issue the command:
DEFINE MACRO macro-name

EDT now adds the macro name to its list of valid line mode commands. You
are ready to use that command any time during your editing session. If you
plan to use the macro in repeated EDT sessions, you can put it in a startup
command file or simply store it in an external file to be included in later EDT
sessions.
If you put a DEFINE MACRO command in a startup command file, you must
include commands to enter the macro text into a buffer with the same name
as the macro. If you store a macro in an external file, use the INCLUDE
command to put the macro in a buffer with the same name and issue the
DEFINE MACRO command to establish the name as a line mode command.
This example creates a macro called SINCY, which inserts the closing of a
letter above the current line when you type the newly created line mode
command SINCY.
*FIND =SINCY
♦INSERT
INSERT
INSERT
INSERT
INSERT
INSERT
INSERT
INSERT
INSERT

Sincerely yours,

James T. Cortland
President

ICTRL/Zl
♦DEFINE MACRO SINCY
♦FIND =MAIN

To close a letter from Mr. Cortland, type SINCY as a line mode command.
♦SINCY
♦TYPE "sincerely" THRU END
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
[EOB]

Sincerely yours,

James T. Cortland
President

EDT—11

PART II EDT Commands
This section contains descriptions of the EDT commands, qualifiers, and
specifiers. Entries for each command, qualifier, and specifier described in the
rest of the section are arranged by editing mode.
At the top outer corner of the page is the entry name and below that the
mode from which the entry is used. For line and nokeypad commands,
the next item is the syntax statement. Keypad functions show the keypad
designations and the keypad keys used for both VT100 and VT52 terminals.
The VT100 keys are shown first, in red; the VT52 keys are shown in blue.
The additional preset keypad mode function keys that are available on the
LK201 keyboard are shown where appropriate.
There is a description of the purpose and use of each item. Information on
special restrictions, if any, is also included. Related commands, qualifiers,
and specifiers are printed in bold to indicate that these items are themselves
entries in this section.
Where appropriate, one or more examples are provided. Occasionally, in
keypad mode, you press different keys to access the function on VT100 and
VT52 terminals. In these instances VT100 user input appears in red; VT52
user input appears in blue.
The last element for many entries is Related Commands, which lists
commands or keypad functions that are similar to that entry. Related
commands are limited to those that perform almost the identical function
in a different mode. If no related command is listed, it means that none
exists. For example, there are no related commands for any of the SET or
SHOW commands.

EDT Commands
ADVANCE Function

ADVANCE Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

VT100:

ADVANCE
BOTTOM

VT52:

ADVANCE
BOTTOM

DESCRIPTION Pressing ADVANCE sets the direction for subsequent editing work to forward
(to the right of the cursor and down toward the end of the buffer). ADV. is
the nokeypad definition for ADVANCE.
ADVANCE is the default direction and remains in effect until you press

BACKUP.
You can also use the ADVANCE key to set the direction of and process the
FIND function. Press the GOLD and FIND keys, enter the string you want to
locate, then press ADVANCE to move the cursor forward to find the string.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Sets EDT's direction to forward and moves the cursor three words to the
right.
In regard to your memo of January 15th,
ADVANCE
BOTTOM

-F

WORD
CHNGCASE

In regard to your memo of January 15th,

example 2:

Uses ADVANCE to be sure that EDT looks for the string town to the right of
the cursor.
Acton, MA
Bedford, MA
Charlestown, MA
IgoldI + FNDNXT
FIND

Search for:

town

ADVANCE
BOTTOM

Acton, MA
Bedford, MA
Charlestown, MA

EDT—15

EDT Commands
ADVANCE Function

related
commands

EDT—16

— Nokeypad—ADV (advance)

EDT Commands
APPEND Function

APPEND Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100.

APPEND
REPLACE

VT52:

GOLD

BLUE +
COLOR

LEFT
APPEND

Pressing APPEND deletes the select range from the current buffer and adds it
to the end of the PASTE buffer. The previous contents of the PASTE buffer
are not deleted. APPENDSR. is the nokeypad definition for APPEND.

EXAMPLE
Alphabetizes the list of names using SELECT, CUT, APPEND, and PASTE.
Joe Spitzer
Trudi Schutz
Becky Santerre
Kathy Waldbauer

VT100:

SELECT
RESET

LINE
OPENLINE

CUT
PASTE

(Move the cursor to the T in Trudi.)

VT100:

SELECT
RESET

LINE
OPENLINE

APPEND
REPLACE

(Move the cursor to the J in Joe.)

VT100:

| GOLD| +

CUT
PASTE

VT52:

SELECT
RESET

LINE
OPENLINE

CUT
PASTE

(Move the cursor to the T in Trudi.)

VT52:

SELECT
RESET

LINE
OPENLINE

+ IGOLDI +

LEFT
APPEND

(Move the cursor to the J in Joe.)

VT52:

1 GOLD | +

CUT
PASTE

Becky Santerre
Trudi Schutz
Joe Spitzer
Kathy Waldbauer

EDT-17

EDT Commands
APPEND Function

related
commands

EDT—18

— Nokeypad—APPEND

EDT Commands
BACKSPACE Function CTRL/H

BACKSPACE Function CTRL/H—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

BACKSPACE

BACK
SPACE

VT52:

BACKSPACE

BACK
SPACE

LK201:

BACKSPACE

F12

All:

CTRL/H

CTRL

Pressing BACKSPACE causes the cursor to move to the beginning of the
current line. If the cursor is already at the beginning of a line, pressing
BACKSPACE moves it to the beginning of the previous line. BL. is the
nokeypad definition for BACKSPACE.
The BACKSPACE key and CTRL/H always have the same preset function in
EDT. When you redefine the BACKSPACE key, you redefine CTRL/H (except
for terminals with LK201 keyboards when they are operating in VT200
mode). To redefine the BACKSPACE key using the line mode DEFINE KEY
command, type DEFINE KEY CONTROL H. To find the definition of the
BACKSPACE key, type SHOW KEY CONTROL H. For terminals with LK201
keyboards, use DEFINE KEY FUNCTION 24 and SHOW KEY FUNCTION 24
for the FI2 key.

EXAMPLE
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the third line and then to the beginning
of the second line.
All employees wishing to leave early on
December 24th must obtain permission from
their department supervisors.
BACK
SPACE

BACK
SPACE

All employees wishing to leave early on
December 24th must obtain permission from
their department supervisors.

related
commands

— Nokeypad—BL (beginning of line)

EDT—19

EDT Commands
BACKUP Function

BACKUP Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

BACKUP
TOP

VT52:

BACKUP
TOP

Pressing BACKUP sets the direction for subsequent editing work to backward
(to the left of the cursor toward the beginning of the buffer). BACK, is the
nokeypad definition for BACKUP.
You can use the BACKUP key to set the direction of and process the FIND
function. Press the GOLD and FIND keys, enter the string you want to locate,
and then press BACKUP to move the cursor backward to find the string.
To change EDT's direction to forward, use ADVANCE. The RESET function
also sets EDT's direction to forward.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Sets the direction to backward and moves the cursor three words to the left.
In regard to your memo of January 15th,
BACKUP
TOP

WORD
CHNGCASE

-1-

WORD
CHNGCASE

In regard to your memo of January 15th,

example 2:

Ensures that EDT searches for the string Ana toward the top of the buffer.
Anaheim, CA
Bakersfield, CA
Claremont, CA
1 GOLD) + FNDNXT
FIND

Search for:

Ana

BACKUP
TOP

Anaheim, CA
Bakersfield, CA
Claremont, CA

related
commands
EDT—20

— Nokeypad—BACK (backup)

EDT Commands
BOTTOM Function

BOTTOM Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

VT100:

GOLD

+ ADVANCE
BOTTOM

VT52:

GOLD

+ ADVANCE
BOTTOM

BLUE +
COLOR

PF1

DESCRIPTION Pressing BOTTOM moves the cursor to the end of the buffer, after the last
character position in the buffer. The cursor is now positioned at the end of
buffer ([EOB]) mark. ER. is the nokeypad definition for BOTTOM.

EXAMPLE
Moves the cursor to the bottom of the buffer.
Dear Sir:

Sincerely yours,
.BLANK 5
David Foster
Manager
[EOB]
1 GOLD] + ADVANCE
BOTTOM

Dear Sir:

Sincerely yours,
.BLANK 5
David Foster
Manager
[EOB]

related
commands

— Line—TYPE END
— Nokeypad—ER (end of range)

EDT—21

EDT Commands
CHAR (Character) Function

CHAR (Character) Function — Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE
DESCRIPTION

CHAR
SPECINS

VT100:

Pressing CHAR (character) moves the cursor one character in the current
direction (forward or backward, depending on whether ADVANCE or
BACKUP is in effect). C. is the nokeypad definition for CHAR.
This key is not on the VT52 keypad. However, the left and right arrow keys
can be used to move the cursor one character position.

EXAMPLE
Sets the direction to backward and moves the cursor three characters to the
left.
This product performs perfectly.
BACKUP
TOP

CHAR
SPECINS

This product performs perfectly.

related
commands

EDT—22

— Nokeypad—C (character)

CHAR
SPECINS

Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

GOLD

WORD
CHNGCASE

VT52:

GOLD

WORD
CHNGCASE

PF1

BLUE +
COLOR

Pressing CHNGCASE (change case) changes the case o
Uppercase letters become lowercase; lowercase letters b
number of letters affected by this function depends on
select range, cursor location, SET SEARCH parameter
The following chart shows what happens when you us
various conditions:
Conditions

Results

SELECT RANGE ACTIVE

Changes the case of every
the select range.
All low
letters become uppercase;
case letters become lowerc

NO SELECT RANGE ACTIVE
la. SET SEARCH BEGIN in effect.
Cursor on first character
of current search string.
Repeat count = 0 or 1.

Changes the case of every
the search string.
All lo
letters become uppercase;
letters become lowercase.
Move)the cursor to the ch
to the right of the search

lb. SET SEARCH END in effect.
Cursor to the right of
current search string.
Repeat count = 0 or 1.

Changes the case of every
the search string.
All lo
letters become uppercase;
case letters become lowerc
Moves the cursor to the fi
character of the search st

2a. Current direction is
forward.
♦Cursor not at active end
of current search string.
Repeat count = 0 or 1.

Changes the case of the le
the cursor is on.
Moves t
one column to the right.

2b. Current direction is
backward.
♦Cursor not at active end
of current search string.
Repeat count = 0 or 1.

Changes the case of the le
left of the cursor.
The c
remains on the altered let

3a. Repeat count greater
than 1.
Current direction is
forward.

Changes the case of the nu
letters given in the repea
Moves the cursor to the ri
the last altered character

3b. Repeat count greater
than 1.
Current direction is
backward.

Changes the case of the nu
letters given in the repea
Moves the cursor to the le
altered letter.

EDT Commands
CHNGCASE (Change Case) Function

* Active end of select range:
SET SEARCH BEGIN

Cursor on first character of current
search string.

SET SEARCH END

Cursor one character to the right of
current search string.

CHGCSR. is the nokeypad definition of CHNGCASE.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

First changes the case of the M in Maynard to lowercase. Then changes the
case of the entire word to uppercase.
Maynard, MA
WORD
CHNGCASE

1 GOLD | +

maynard, MA

(Move the cursor back to the m in maynard.)
SELECT
RESET

-F

WORD
CHNGCASE

+ IgoldI +

WORD
CHNGCASE

MAYNARD, MA

example 2:

Using FIND and FNDNXT, locates and changes the case of the string back in
lines 2 and 3.
BACK
backspace
backup
[GOLD | + FNDNXT
FIND

Search for:

back

ENTER
SUBS

1 GOLD | +

WORD
CHNGCASE

FNDNXT
FIND

+ IgoldI +

BACK
BACKspace
BACKup

related
command s

Nokeypad—CHGC (change case)
CHGL (change case lower)
CHGU (change case upper)

EDT—24

WORD
CHNGCASE

EDT Commands
COMMAND Function

COMMAND Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

VT100:

GOLD

PAGE
COMMAND

VT52:

GOLD

PAGE
COMMAND

BLUE +
COLOR

PF1

DESCRIPTION Pressing COMMAND enables you to enter a line mode command while
EDT is still in keypad mode. When you press GOLD and COMMAND, EDT
prompts you with Command: at the bottom of the screen. Type the line
mode command you want to use, for example EXIT, then press the ENTER
key on the keypad to send the command to EDT.
Use CTRL/Z to shift from keypad to line editing if you want to issue several
line mode commands in a row.
You can issue two or more line mode commands on the same line by
separating the commands with semicolons (;). If you want to put nokeypad
commands after the line mode command, use the CHANGE ;nokeypadcommand(s) form. You can use EDT macros with the COMMAND function
just as you would any other line mode command.

EXT ?'Command:

is the nokeypad definition for COMMAND.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Uses the line mode SHOW BUFFER command while still in keypad mode.
iGOLDl +

Command:

PAGE
COMMAND

SHOW BUFFER

ENTER
SUBS

BUF1
2
=BUF2
5
MAIN
237
PASTE 1
Press return to

example 2:

lines
lines
lines
lines
continue

Uses the line mode WRITE command to put a copy of the remaining lines
in the current buffer into an external file called SAVE.DAT. EDT remains in
keypad mode.
IGOLDl +

PAGE
COMMAND

EDT—25

EDT Commands
COMMAND Function

Command:

WRITE SAVE.DAT REST

ENTER
SUBS

Command:
WRITE SAVE.DAT REST
DISKSUSER:[SMITH1SAVE.DAT 36 lines

related
commands

EDT—26

— Nokeypad—EXT (extend)

EDT Commands
CTRL/A (Control A) Function

CTRL/A (Control A) Function—Keypad
GOLD/A
KEY
SEQUENCE

VT100:

CTrtL/A

CTRL

VT52:

CTRL/A

CTRL

VT100:

GOLD/A

GOLD

VT52:

GOLD/A

GOLD

DESCRIPTION Pressing CTRL/A establishes the tab position at the present cursor position
and resets the indentation level count to be the quotient of the cursor position
divided by the SET TAB value. To use CTRL/A, the current cursor position
must be a multiple of the SET TAB value. For example, if the SET TAB value
is 5, you can use CTRL/A for cursor locations at positions 5, 10, 15, 20, and
so on. If the cursor is at some other column, for example 13, and you press
CTRL/A, EDT prints an error message.
CTRL/A does not move text. You must use the TAB function to indent
a line. CTRL/A works only if SET TAB is in effect. EDT's default is SET
NOTAB. TC. is the nokeypad definition for both CTRL/A and GOLD/A.

EXAMPLE
Using a SET TAB value of 5, sets the indentation level count to 3 to move the
first line of text 15 columns to the right. Uses SHOW TAB to verify the tab
size and level count.
This is the first line.
This is the second line.
[gold! +

PAGE
COMMAND

Command:

SET TAB 5

ENTER
SUBS

(Move the cursor 15 spaces to the right.)
This is the first line.
|CTRL/A|

EDT—27

EDT Commands
CTRL/A (Control A) Function

(Now move the cursor back to the beginning of the line you want to indent.)
iTABl
This is the first line.
This is the second line.

IgoldI +

PAGE
COMMAND

Command:

SHOW TAB

ENTER
SUBS

Command: SHOW TAE
tab size 5; tab level 3

related
commands

EDT—28

— Nokeypad—TC (tab compute)

EDT Commands
CTRL/C (Control C) Function

CTRL/C (Control C) Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

VT100:

CTRL/C

CTRL

VT52:

CTRL/C

CTRL

DESCRIPTION Pressing CTRL/C interrupts certain operations before EDT finishes processing
them. You can use CTRL/C to stop a runaway search through a long file
or to stop a long repeat count. CTRL/C halts certain EDT operations. For
example, you can use CTRL/C to stop EDT from displaying a whole buffer
when you have used the line mode TYPE command to move to another
buffer.
When EDT aborts the operation, it prints the message Aborted by CTRL/C.
If EDT cannot stop a particular process, it prints the message CTRL/C

ignored.
Note: You cannot redefine the CTRL/C function.

EXAMPLE
Stops EDT from printing the entire contents of the buffer DARCY_LET.
PAGE
COMMAND

IgoldI

Command:

SHOW BUFFER

ENTER
SUBS

Command: SHOW BUFFER
DARCY_LET
40
lines
=MAIN
12
lines
PASTE No
lines
Press return to continue
I RETURN|
♦TYPE =DARCY_LET
1
2
3
4
5
6

August 20,

1983

Mr. Charles R. Darcy
Production Manager
Midland Manufacturing Corporation
East St. Louis, IL 62202

lCTRL/C |
Aborted by CTRL/C

EDT—29

EDT Commands
CTRL/C (Control C) Function

related
commands

EDT—30

— Line—CTRL/C
- Nokeypad—CTRL/C

EDT Commands
CTRL/D (Control D) Function

CTRL/D (Control D) Function—Keypad
GOLD/D
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

CTRL/D

CTRL

VT52:

CTRL/D

CTRL

VT100:

GOLD/D

GOLD

VT52:

GOLD/D

GOLD

Pressing CTRL/D decreases the TAB level count one tab setting. The tab
level count is the multiple of the SET TAB value that determines the tab
indentation level. Suppose the SET TAB value is 5, the tab level count is 3,
and the current indentation level is 15. If you press CTRL/D and then the
TAB key, the subsequent text will be moved over 10 columns. The SET TAB
value is still 5, but the tab level count is now 2 and the current indentation
level is 10.
CTRL/D does not move text. You must use the TAB function to indent
a line. CTRL/D only works if SET TAB is in effect. EDT's default is SET
NOTAB. TD. is the nokeypad definition for both CTRL/D and GOLD/D.

EXAMPLE
First uses SHOW TAB to find out the current tab size and level count. Then
decreases the level count by 1 and uses TAB to move the second line four
columns to the right.
I.
A.
1.
2.

Main Topic
Major Subtopic
Minor Subtopic
Minor Subtopic

|GOLD 1 +

PAGE
COMMAND

Command:

SHOW TAB

ENTER
SUBS

Command: SHOW TAB
tab size 4; tab level 2
|CTRL/D | + [TAB |

EDT—31

EDT-32

EDT Commands
CTRL/E (Control E) Function

CTRL/E (Control E) Function—Keypad
GOLD/E
KEY
SEQUENCE

VT100:

CTRL
E

CTRL

VT52:

CTRL
E

CTRL

VT100:

GOLD
E

GOLD

VT52:

GOLD
E

GOLD

DESCRIPTION Pressing CTRL/E increments the tab level count by 1. The tab level count is
the multiple of the SET TAB value that determines the tab indentation level.
Suppose the SET TAB value is 5, the tab level count is 2, and the current
indentation level is 10. If you press CTRL/E and then the TAB key, the
subsequent text will be moved over 15 columns. The SET TAB value is still
5, but the tab level count is now 3 and the current indentation level is 15.
CTRL/E does not move text. You must use the TAB function to indent a line.
CTRL/E only works if SET TAB is in effect. EDT's default is SET NOTAB.
TI. is the nokeypad definition for both CTRL/E and GOLD/E.

EXAMPLE
First uses SHOW TAB to find out the current tab size and level count. Then
increments the level count by 1 and uses TAB to move the third line eight
columns to the right.
I.
1.
2.

Main Topic
A.
Major Subtopic
Minor Subtopic
Minor Subtopic

[GOLD 1 +

PAGE
COMMAND

Command:

SHOW TAB

ENTER
SUBS

Command: SHOW TAB
tab size 4; tab level 1
ICTRL/EI + iTABl

EDT—33

EDT Commands
CTRL/E (Control E) Function

related
commands

EDT—34

Main Topic
A.
Major Subtopic
1..
Minor Subtopic
Minor Subtopic

— Nokeypad—TI (tab increment)

EDT Commands
CTRL/K (Control K) Function

CTRL/K (Control K) Function-—Keypad
KEY
_
SEQUENCE

VT100:

CTRL/K

CTRL

VT52:

CTRL/K

CTRL

DESCRIPTION Pressing CTRL/K starts the key definition process in keypad mode. You
can create key definitions using both nokeypad commands and predefined
function keys. You can define a key using only nokeypad commands, by
pressing predefined function keys, or by combining nokeypad commands
with pressing predefined function keys. DEFK. is the nokeypad definition for
CTRL/K.
Five types of keys can be defined or redefined:
•

A keypad key with or without GOLD
All keypad keys can be redefined.
If the current definition of a key is GOLD, you must use the line mode
DEFINE KEY command to redefine that key. GOLD is the default
definition for the top left-hand keypad key (PF1 on VT100; blue on VT52).
If you are defining a key to have the RESET function, you must type the
word RESET in the definition line.

•

CONTROL with a keyboard character, with or without GOLD
EDT does not allow you to redefine CTRL/C. Some CONTROL character
combinations are system commands and cannot be redefined for that
reason. These include O, P, Q, S, X, Y, and [.
Note that you cannot press CTRL/U to enter its definition in the definition
line.

•

GOLD with a keyboard character
GOLD can be used with any keyboard character except the digits 0
through 9 and the minus sign.

•

The DELETE key with or without GOLD
The DELETE key can be redefined by itself or with GOLD.
You cannot press DELETE of <X1 to enter its definition in the definition
line.

•

FUNCTION keys on the LK201 keyboard
These include the six keys located above the arrow keys on the terminal's
"editing" keypad as well as keys F6 through F20 on the function key row
across the top of the keyboard.

EDT—35

EDT Commands
CTRL/K (Control K) Function

To define a key in keypad mode, first press CTRL/K. EDT displays the
message:
Press the key you wish to define

Press the key or key sequence you want to define. EDT then displays the
message:
Now enter the definition and press ENTER

Type your definition and/or press existing keypad function keys and then
press the ENTER key as instructed. (The DO key on LK201 keyboards does
not process a CTRL/K key definition.) The process is now complete. If you
want to review the definition of any key, use the line mode SHOW KEY
command.
Any nokeypad command can be used in a key definition. The same
entity specifiers that are available in nokeypad mode are available for key
definitions. Most preset EDT function keys have nokeypad definitions.
(GOLD and RESET are exceptions.) Use the SHOW KEY command to see
these definitions.
When you look at the definitions for most preset functions, you notice that
they end with a period (.). This period is the definition for the ENTER
function. When you complete your definition with a period, EDT processes
the command as soon as you press the key or key sequence. If the period is
omitted, EDT stores the command and does not show the results until you
press RETURN, or ENTER, or another function key with the period at the
end of its definition. For example, if you define GOLD/P to be 2DL., when
you press the GOLD key and then the P key, two lines will disappear from
your screen. If the definition is 2DL, no change appears on the screen after
pressing GOLD and then P. But as soon as you press another function key,
the two lines vanish. Be sure to use the period key on the main keyboard,
not the one on the keypad, to complete your definitions.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Defines the key sequence GOLD/D to insert Dr.[SP] to the left of the cursor.
James T. Roberts
June C. Rumpole
Andrew R. Schaefer
Cynthia Sears
ICTRL/K1
Press the key you wish to define
iGOLDl -f

\d}

Now enter the definition terminated by ENTER.

IDr.[SP] Ictrl/zI
ENTER
SUBS

EDT—36

Dr. Cynthia Sears

example 2:

Defines the key sequence CTRL/P to remove characters
line. Using the GOLD/repeat feature, you can process a
*************************

TW184739-47TW184741-38
TW184742-84
TW184746-64
TW184747-38

$5.76
$3.49
$7.98
$9.85
$2.66

1 CTRL/K 1
Press the key you wish to define.
I CTRL 1 +

\p\

Now enter the definition terminated by ENTER.
(+V D+EL).
ENTER
SUBS

(Position the cursor directly above the space after the 47.)
I GOLD I +[|] + I CTRL I +0

************************
TW184739-47
TW184741-38
TW184742-84
TW184746-64
TW184747-38

related
commands

— Line—DEFINE KEY
- [Nokeypad—DEFK]

EDT Commands
CTRL/L (Control L) Function

CTRL/L (Control L) Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

CTRL/L

CTRL

VT52:

CTRL/L

CTRL

Pressing CTRL/L inserts a form feed character (<FF>) into your text.
You can also use CTRL/L to enter a form feed in search strings and SET
commands.
"L. is the nokeypad definition of CTRL/L.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Shows how to enter the default boundary list for the SET ENTITY WORD
command. The first Command: line shows the text you type up to the point
where the boundary limits are entered. The second Command: line shows
what EDT displays on the screen after you have pressed the spacebar and the
five control key sequences. The SHOW ENTITY WORD command displays
the control characters differently.
[goldI +

Command:

PAGE
COMMAND

SET ENTITY WORD "

Command:

SET ENTITY WORD " ~I~J~K~L~M"

ENTER
SUBS

[GOLD |

Command:

PAGE
COMMAND

SHOW ENTITY WORD

ENTER
SUBS

Command:

EDT—38

SHOW ENTITY WORD
<LF><VT><FF><CR>

EDT Commands
CTRL/L (Control L) Function

example 2:

Shows how to enter the form feed character in your text.
Page 37

| CTRL/L|
<FF>Page 37

related
commands

None.

EDT—39

EDT Commands
CTRL/M (Control M) Function

CTRL/M (Control M) Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

CTRL/M

CTRL

VT52:

CTRL/M

CTRL

Pressing CTRL/M inserts a carriage return character (<CR>) into your text.
You can also use CTRL/M to enter a carriage return character (<CR> or
*M) in strings and SET commands. CTRL/M is not identical to an EDT line
terminator. However, in keypad mode, you can use CTRL/M to mean a line
terminator in search and substitute strings.

M. is the nokeypad definition for CTRL/M. When you redefine the CTRL/M
key sequence, you also automatically redefine the RETURN key. It is
recommended that you do not alter the preset definition of CTRL/M for
that reason.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Command:

PAGE
COMMAND

SET ENTITY WORD "

| SPACEBAR 1 + 1 CTRL/I 1 + [CTRL/jj + |CTRL/K[ + | CTRL/Ll + j CTRL/M [ +

Command:

SET ENTITY WORD "

ENTER
SUBS

[GOLD | +

Command:
ENTER
SUBS

EDT—40

PAGE
COMMAND

SHOW ENTITY WORD

I_~J_“K_~L_~M"

example 2:

Uses CTRL/M in the search string to locate the string a
Model Number

Price

Sale Price

Model 38567X
Model 37580Z

$38.99
$47.99

$33.99
$41.99

[GOLD | +

PAGE
COMMAND

Search for:
® + [E + I CTRL/M |
Search for:

99~M

ENTER
SUBS

related
commands

Model Number

Price

Sale Price

Model 38567X
Model 37580Z

$38.99
$47.99

$33.99
$41.99

None,

EDT Commands
CTRL/R (Control R) Function

CTRL/R (Control R) Function—Keypad
GOLD/R
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

CTRL/R

CTRL

VT52:

CTRL/R

CTRL

VT100:

GOLD/R

GOLD

VT52:

GOLD/R

GOLD

Pressing CTRL/R (in keypad mode) refreshes the screen display. This
function has no effect on the text you are editing. It simply clears and
redraws the screen, eliminating any extraneous characters or messages that
might have appeared on the screen but are not part of the current text you
are editing. Note that CTRL/R performs the same function as CTRL/W in
keypad mode. REF. is the nokeypad definition for both CTRL/R and GOLD
/R.

EXAMPLE
Refreshes the screen to eliminate the notification of new mail on the fourth
line.
There will be a meeting of the Utilities Team
at 9:30 a.m. on January 15, 1985 in the Glen
Room.
All members are expected to attend.
New mail from XXXXXX::BROWNe served.
[CTRL/Rl
There will be a meeting of the Utilities Team
at 9:30 a.m. on January 15, 1985 in the Glen
Room.
All members are expected to attend.
Coffee and doughnuts will be served.

related
commands

EDT—42

— Line—CTRL/R
— Nokeypad—REF (refresh)

EDT Commands
CTRL/T (Control T) Function

CTRL/T (Control T) Function—Keypad
GOLD/T
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

CTRL/T

CTRL

VT52:

CTRL/T

CTRL

VT100:

GOLD/T

GOLD

VT52:

GOLD/T

GOLD

Pressing CTRL/T indents the lines in a select range which must contain only
whole lines. After creating the select range, press CTRL/T to move the select
range lines over one tab stop to the right. Use a repeat count to indent the
lines more than one tab stop. To move the text one tab stop to the left, press
GOLD and then the minus sign (-) before CTRL/T. You can move the lines
several tab stops to the left by using both the minus sign and a repeat count.
CTRL/T works only if SET TAB is in effect. EDT's default is SET NOTAB.
To determine the current SET TAB value, use the SHOW TAB command.
Note that CTRL/T is not affected by the tab level count, nor does that count
have any effect on how far text is indented.

TADJSR. is the nokeypad definition for both CTRL/T and GOLD/T.
When the DCL command SET CONTROL=T is in effect, you cannot use
CTRL/T in EDT to perform tabbing. If DCL is set to NOCONTROL=T (the
default), CTRL/T will perform tabbing in EDT. GOLD/T always performs its
tabbing function in EDT, unless you have redefined the key sequence.

EXAMPLE
Sets the tab value to 5. Using a select range for lines 2 and 3, indents them
one tab level (5 columns). Using a select range for lines 4 and 5, and a repeat
count of 2, indents them two tab levels (10 columns).
I.
A.
B.
1.
2.

Main Topic
Major Subtopic
Major Subtopic
Minor Subtopic
Minor Subtopic

IgoldI +

PAGE
COMMAND

Command:

SET TAB 5

ENTER
SUBS

EDT—43

EDT Commands
CTRL/T (Control T) Function

SELECT
RESET

-1-

LINE
OPENLINE

+ |CTRL/T |

SELECT
RESET

LINE
OPENLINE

+ 1 GOLD) + @
2

related
commands

EDT—44

Main Topic
A.
Major Subtopic
B.
Major Subtopic
1.
Minor Subtopic
2.
Minor Subtopic
Second Main Topic

— Line—TAB ADJUST
— Nokeypad—TADJ (tab adjust)

4- | CTRL/T|

EDT Commands
CTRL/U (Control U) Function

CTRL/U (Control U) Function—Keypad
GOLD/U
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

CTRL/U

CTRL

VT52:

CTRL/U

CTRL

VT100:

GOLD/U

GOLD

VT52:

GOLD/U

GOLD

Pressing CTRL/U deletes everything from the character to the left of the
cursor to the beginning of the line. If the cursor is in the middle or at the
end of the line and CTRL/U is pressed, EDT deletes the characters between
the cursor and the beginning of that line. If the cursor is at the beginning of
a line when CTRL/U is pressed, the line above the cursor is deleted. Text
deleted by CTRL/U is stored in the delete line buffer. Use UND L to insert
or restore the deleted text.
CTRL/U can be used to cancel a COMMAND, FIND, or CTRL/K operation.
For example, if you have pressed GOLD/COMMAND and have started to
type a line mode command, you can press CTRL/U to return the cursor to
the text. If you have pressed GOLD/FIND and have started to type a search
string, you can also press CTRL/U to return the cursor to the text. The string
in the search buffer remains the same as it was before you pressed GOLD
/FIND. Similarly, if you are in the process of creating a key definition with
CTRL/K, you can press CTRL/U to cancel the definition process.

DBL. is the nokeypad definition for both CTRL/U and GOLD/U. CTRL/X
always performs the same function as CTRL/U, regardless of the definition
assigned to CTRL/X.

EXAMPLE
Deletes the first part of the second line.
Before signing up for the course, check with Fran Pelletier.
Or you can call the registrar yourself.
Be sure that you have
| CTRL/U]
Before signing up for the course,
Be sure that you have

check with Fran Pelletier.

— Nokeypad—DBL (delete to beginning of line)

commands
EDT—45

EDT Commands
CTRL/W (Control W) Function

CTRL/W (Control W) Function—Keypad
GOLD/W
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

CTRL/W

CTRL

VT52:

CTRL/W

CTRL

VT100:

GOLD/W

GOLD

VT52:

GOLD/W

GOLD

Pressing CTRL/W or GOLD/W refreshes the screen display. This function
has no effect on the text you are editing; it simply clears and redraws the
screen, eliminating any extraneous characters or messages that have appeared
on the screen but are not part of the current text you are editing. Note that
CTRL/W performs the same function as CTRL/R in keypad mode. REF. is
the nokeypad definition for both CTRL/W and GOLD/W.

EXAMPLE
Refreshes the screen to eliminate the notification of new mail on the fourth
line.
There will be a meeting of the Utilities Team
at 9:30 a.m. on January 15, 1985 in the Glen
Room_ All members are expected to attend.
New mail from ZZZZZZ::BLACKe served.
Tctrl/wI
There will be a meeting of the Utilities Team
at 9:30 a.m. on January 15, 1985 in the Glen
Room.
All members are expected to attend.
Coffee and doughnuts will be served.

related
commands

EDT—46

— Nokeypad—REF (refresh)

EDT Commands
CTRL/Z (Control Z) Function

CTRL/Z (Control Z) Function—-Keypad
GOLD/Z
KEY

SEQUENCE

VT100:

ctrl/z

CTRL

VT52:

ctrl/z

CTRL

VT100:

gold/z

GOLD

VT52:

gold/z

GOLD

DESCRIPTION Pressing CTRL/Z shifts EDT from keypad mode to line mode. After you have
pressed CTRL/Z, the line mode asterisk prompt (*) appears indicating that
EDT is ready to accept line mode commands. To resume keypad editing, use
the line mode CHANGE command.
EX. is the nokeypad definition for CTRL/Z and GOLD/Z.

EXAMPLE
Shifts from keypad mode to line mode.
Customer called Repair Service 5/25/85.
One of his telephones was not working.
He was told to disconnect his phone and
take it to his nearest phone store.

jCTRL/Z 1
♦TYPE .
2

related
commands

One of his telephones was not working.

— Line—CHANGE
— Nokeypad—EX (exit to line mode)

EDT—47

EDT Commands
CUT Function

CUT Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

VT100:

CUT
PASTE

VT52:

CUT
PASTE

LK201:

CUT
PASTE

Remove

DESCRIPTION Pressing CUT removes the active select range from the current buffer and
stores it in the PASTE buffer. You can use CUT to delete large or small
sections of text. When you use CUT in conjunction with the PASTE function,
you can move or copy text from one place in the current buffer to another
place in that buffer.
When you use CUT to delete only part of a line, EDT adds a line terminator
at the end of the text being stored in the PASTE buffer. The line terminator is
necessary because EDT cannot store partial lines in the PASTE buffer. When
you use the PASTE function, EDT removes the added line terminator. Thus,
when you insert the text, you do not have an extra line terminator.
The steps for moving and copying text are described under the keypad PASTE
function. CUTSR. is the nokeypad definition of CUT.

EXAMPLE
Using a select range, moves the first line to the PASTE buffer and then uses
PASTE to insert that line in the proper chronological sequence between
Adams and Madison.
Thomas Jefferson
George Washington
John Adams
James Madison
SELECT
RESET

LINE
OPENLINE

CUT
PASTE

(Move the cursor to the J in James Madison.)
IgqldI +

CUT
PASTE

George Washington
John Adams
Thomas Jefferson
James Madison
1 On LK201 keyboards, both the 6 keypad key and the Remove key have the same preset function.

EDT—48

EDT Commands
CUT Function

related
commands

— Nokeypad—CUT

EDT—49

EDT Commands
DEL C (Delete Character) Function

DEL C (Delete Character)
Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

VT100:

DEL C

VT52:

DEL C
UND C

UND C

DESCRIPTION Pressing DEL C (delete character) deletes the character on which the cursor
is positioned. The cursor stays in the same position, but the remaining
characters on the line shift one position to the left. D+C. is the nokeypad
definition for DEL C.
The deleted character is stored in the delete character buffer. Only one
character at a time can occupy that buffer. Each time you delete a character
with DEL C or the DELETE function, the contents of the delete character
buffer are overwritten. Remember that the delete character buffer is
inaccessible to you and that its name does not appear in the list displayed by
the SHOW BUFFER command.
%

Use UND C to restore or insert the contents of the delete character buffer into
your text.
DEL C deletes the character the cursor is on; the DELETE function always
deletes the character to the left of the cursor. (D-C. is the nokeypad definition
for DELETE.)

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Deletes the second period after Dr.
Dr.. William W. Williams
DEL C
UND C

D William W. Williams

example 2:

Reverses the order of the mistyped letters, using UND C to insert the deleted
letter in its proper place.
teh wrong turn
DEL C
UND C

EDT—50

EDT Commands
DEL C (Delete Character) Function

(Move the cursor one position to the left.)
del c
UND C

the wrong turn

related
commands

— Line—DELETE
— Nokeypad—DC

EDT-51

EDT Commands
DEL EOL (Delete to End of Line) Function

DEL EOL (Delete to End of Line)
Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

GOLD

EOL
DEL EOL

VT52:

GOLD

EOL
DEL EOL

PF1

BLUE +
COLOR

Pressing DEL EOL (delete to end of line) deletes everything on a line from the
character the cursor is on up to, but not including, the line terminator. The
cursor remains in the same position as it was before DEL EOL was pressed.
If the cursor is on a line terminator, DEL EOL deletes that line terminator and
all the text up to the next line terminator.
The characters deleted from the line are placed in the delete line buffer. Each
time DEL EOL, DEL L, or CTRL/U is used, the contents of that buffer are
overwritten. Use UND L to restore or insert the contents of the buffer in your
text.
When you use DEL EOL, EDT deletes the characters up to the line terminator
to the right of the cursor. DEL L deletes those same characters, but also
deletes the line terminator and positions the cursor on the first character of
the next line. D+EL. is the nokeypad definition for DEL EOL. D+NL. is the
nokeypad definition for DEL L. CTRL/U (DBL. is its nokeypad definition)
deletes the text from the character to the left of the cursor to the beginning of
the line.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Deletes the location information after the name.
Bob Jamison
1 GOLD | +

MK01-2/E37

EOL
DEL EOL

Bob Jamison

example 2:

Deletes the phone extension number on the second line, but does not delete
the line terminator.
A1 Kerr
x3946
iGQLDl +

EDT-52

EOL
DEL EOL

EDT Commands
DEL EOL (Delete to End of Line) Function

A1 Kerr

related
commands

— Line—DELETE
— Nokeypad—DEL (delete to end of line)

EDT—53

EDT Commands
DELETE Function

DELETE Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

DELETE

VT52:

DELETE

LK201:

delete

Pressing the DELETE key deletes the character to the left of the cursor. If the
cursor is at the beginning of a line, pressing DELETE deletes the preceding
line terminator.
When a character is deleted using the DELETE key, that character is placed
in the delete character buffer. The contents of the buffer are overwritten each
time a character is deleted either by the DELETE function or by DEL C. Use
UND C to restore or insert the contents of the delete character buffer into the
text you are editing.
Use the DELETE key to edit the text you type in response to EDT prompts
such as Search for: or Command:. These deleted characters are not stored in
the delete character buffer.
The difference between DELETE and DEL C is that DEL C deletes the
character that the cursor is on; DELETE deletes the character to the left of the
cursor. D-C. is the nokeypad definition for DELETE. D+C. is the nokeypad
definition of DEL C.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Deletes the c from the misspelled name.
John Smitch
[delete]
John Smith

example 2:

Deletes the line terminator that is separating the first and second lines.
This is the first line.
This is the second line
This is the third line.
IDELETE|
This is the first line.This is the second line.
This is the third line.

EDT—54

EDT Commands
DELETE Function

related
commands

- Line—DELETE
— Nokeypad—D-C (delete character to the left)

EDT—55

EDT Commands
DEL L (Delete Line) Function

DEL L (Delete Line) Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

DEL L
UND L

PF4

VT52:

DEL L
UND L

GRAY
COLOR

Pressing DEL L (delete line) deletes everything on a line starting with the
character that the cursor is on up to and including the line terminator. The
cursor position remains unchanged on the screen.
If the cursor is on the first character of the line, the entire line is deleted. The
cursor is now positioned on the first character of the following line.
The characters deleted by DEL L, DEL EOL, or CTRL/U are stored in the
delete line buffer. Each time a line or piece of line is deleted, the contents
of the delete line buffer are overwritten. Use UND L to restore or insert the
contents of the delete line buffer into the text you are editing.
DEL L always deletes the line terminator to the right of the cursor; DEL EOL
deletes only the characters up to that line terminator. D+NL. is the nokeypad
definition for DEL L. D+EL. is the nokeypad definition for DEL EOL. CTRL/U
(DBL. is its nokeypad definition) deletes the text from the character to the left
of the cursor to the beginning of the line.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Deletes the characters from the current cursor position to the end of the line,
including the line terminator.
The committee will be composed of George, Mary, Larry,
Bill, and Peter.
DEL L
UND L

The committee will be composed of George, Mary, Bill, and Peter.

example 2:

Alphabetizes the list by deleting the third line and using UND L to insert it in
its proper location.
Anderson, Richard
Andrews, Harold
Andorsky, Thomas
Anthony, James
DEL L
UND L

EDT—56

EDT Commands
DEL L (Delete Line) Function

(Move cursor to the A in Andrews.)
| GOLD | + DEL L
UND L

Anderson, Richard
Andorsky, Thomas
Andrews, Harold
Anthony, James

related
commands

— Line—DELETE
— Nokeypad—D+NL (delete to next line)

EDT—57

EDT Commands
DEL W (Delete Word) Function

DEL W (Delete Word) Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

DEL W
UND W

VT52:

DEL W
UND W

Pressing DEL W (delete word) deletes words or parts of words. When
the cursor is at the beginning of the word, the entire word and the space
following it are deleted. If the cursor is in the middle of the word, only the
character that the cursor is on and those characters to the right of the cursor,
up to and including the following space(s), are deleted. The characters to the
left of the cursor in that word remain in the text. If the word being deleted is
at the end of a line, all characters up to, but not including, the line terminator
are deleted.
The characters deleted by DEL W and LINEFEED (F13 on LK201 keyboards)
are stored in the delete word buffer. Each time DEL W or LINEFEED is used,
the contents of the delete word buffer are overwritten. Use UND W to restore
or insert the contents of the delete word buffer into the text you are editing.
DEL W always deletes the cursor character and the remaining characters in
the word to the right of the cursor. LINEFEED deletes the word or part of the
word to the left of the cursor. DEW. is the nokeypad definition for DEL W.
DBW. is the nokeypad definition for LINEFEED.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Deletes the word Major from the General's title.
Major General George H. Mitchell
DEL W
UND W

General George H. Mitchell

EDT—58

EDT Commands
DEL W (Delete Word) Function

example 2:

Changes the order of the names by deleting the last name and then using
UND W to insert it after the first name.
Smith, Brian
DEL W
UND W

(Move the cursor to the end of the line and add a space after Brian.)
1 goldI +

DEL W
UND W

Brian Smith,

related
commands

— Line—DELETE
— Nokeypad—DEW (delete to end of word)

EDT—59

EDT Commands
DO Function

DO Function—Keypad (LK201 only)
KEY
SEQUENCE

LK201:

DESCRIPTION Pressing DO processes searches and line editing commands in keypad mode.
The period (.) is the nokeypad definition for DO. Although DO has the same
definition as ENTER, you cannot use the DO key to enter a key definition
with CTRL/K.
When you receive a prompt from EDT in keypad mode, you can use DO
to send EDT the information you type in response to the prompt. The two
preset EDT functions that have prompts are COMMAND and FIND.
To use COMMAND, press the GOLD and COMMAND keys. When EDT
displays the Command: prompt, type the line mode command. Then press
DO to send the command to EDT for processing.
To use FIND, press either the LK201 Find key or the GOLD and FIND keys
on the numeric keypad. When EDT displays the Search for: prompt, type
the search string. Then press DO to send the string to EDT so it can perform
the search.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Processes the FIND function using the LK201 Find key.
I Find I
Search for:

Chicago

1551
meeting to be held in Chicago on April 9,

example 2:

Processes the COMMAND function.
meeting to be held in Chicago on April 9.
IgoldI +

PAGE
COMMAND

Command:

SUBSTITUTE/Chicago/Boston/

meeting to be held in Boston on April 9,

EDT—60

1985

EDT Commands
DO Function

related
commands

— Line—I return I
— Nokeypad— I return I

EDT—61

EDT Commands
Down Arrow

Down Arrow—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

VT100:
VT52:

DESCRIPTION

DOWN
SECT

Pressing the Down Arrow key moves the cursor down one line toward the
bottom of the buffer regardless of EDT's direction. +V. is the nokeypad
definition for Down Arrow.
When you use the Down Arrow, EDT attempts to maintain the same vertical
column as it moves the cursor from one line to the next. If there are not
enough characters to fill out a line of text, the cursor moves to the end of
that line. If you continue to use the Down Arrow, the cursor will return to
the same vertical column for all lines that have enough characters. However,
once you press some other key, EDT cancels the column position for Down
Arrow and resets it the next time you use the function.

EXAMPLE
Moves the cursor from the end of the first line to the end of the last line.
Asuncion, Paraguay^
Bogota, Colombia
Brasilia, Brazil
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Caracas, Venezuela
Georgetown, Guyana

m
Asuncion, Paraguay
Bogota, Colombia_

C3 + 0
Bogota, Colombia
Brasilia, Brazil
Buenos Aires, Argentina

0 + 0
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Caracas, Venezuela
Georgetown, Guyana

related
commands

EDT—62

— Nokeypad—Down Arrow

EDT Commands
ENTER Function

ENTER Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

VT100:

ENTER
SUBS

ENTER

VT52:

ENTER
SUBS

ENTER

DESCRIPTION Pressing ENTER processes searches, line editing commands, and key
definitions in keypad mode. EDT generally uses the ENTER function to
process keypad editing functions. The period (.) is the nokeypad definition
for ENTER.
When you receive a prompt from EDT in keypad mode, use ENTER to send
EDT the information you type in response to the prompt. The two preset
EDT functions that have prompts are tOMMAND and FIND.
To use COMMAND, press the GOLD and COMMAND keys. When EDT
displays the Command: prompt, type the line mode command. Then press
ENTER to send the command to EDT for processing.
To use FIND, press the GOLD and FIND keys. When EDT displays the
Search for: prompt, type the search string. Then press ENTER to send the
string to EDT so it can perform the search.
You are asked to press the ENTER key when you complete a keypad
definition using CTRL/K in keypad mode. When the message Now enter
the definition terminated by ENTER appears, type the definition and then
press the ENTER key.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Processes the FIND function.
1 goldI + FNDNXT
FIND

Search for:

Chicago

ENTER
SUBS

meeting to be held in Chicago on April 9. 1985

example 2:

Processes the COMMAND function.
meeting to be held in Chicago on April 9,
I GOLDl +

1985

PAGE
COMMAND

EDT—63

EDT Commands
ENTER Function

Command:

SUBSTITUTE/Chicago/Boston/

ENTER
SUBS

meeting to be held in Boston on April 9,

example 3:

1985

Completes the processing of the CTRL/K key definition operation. The key
definition shown in this example creates a keypad substitute function that
prompts for both the search and the substitute strings.
ICTRL/Kj
Press the key you wish to define
I GOLD | + [§]
Now enter the definition terminated by ENTER
S/?'Find:

*/?' Substitute:

'/•

ENTER
SUBS

example 4:

Using the new substitute function created in Example 3, sends the strings to
EDT after you type them.
the line entity.

related
commands

EDT—64

— Line—I return I
— Nokeypad—I return I

EDT Commands
EOL (End of Line) Function

EOL (End of Line) Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

VT100:

EOL
DEL EOL

VT52:

EOL
DEL EOL

DESCRIPTION Pressing EOL (end of line) moves the cursor to the end of the current line
if the direction is forward. If the current direction is backward, the cursor
moves to the end of the previous line. If the cursor is already at the end of a
line, EOL moves it to the end of the next or previous line, depending on the
current direction. Use BACKSPACE (FI 2 on LK201 keyboards) to move the
cursor to the beginning of a line. EL. is the nokeypad definition of EOL.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Moves the cursor to the right to the nearest line terminator.
The meeting is scheduled for Friday afternoon.
EOL
DEL EOL

The meeting is scheduled for Friday afternoon.

example 2:

Moves the cursor to the left to the nearest line terminator, after pressing
BACKUP.
3 typewriters
2 typing stands
BACKUP
TOP

EOL
DEL EOL

3 typewriters_
2 typing stands

related
commands

— Nokeypad—EL (end of line)

EDT—65

EDT Commands
FILL Function (VT100)

FILL Function (VT100)—Keypad
CTRL/F Function (VT52)
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

GOLD

VT52:

CTRL/F

SECT
FILL

PF1

CTRL

Pressing FILL takes a select range of lines and reorganizes the text so that the
maximum number of whole words can fit within the current line width. The
default line width for EDT is the terminal width that the operating system
passes to EDT. Use the line mode SHOW SCREEN command to find the
current screen/line width. The valid screen width values for screen mode
editing are 80 and 132. (132 is only valid for VTlOO-type terminals with
AVO—advanced video option.) If your screen width is set to 80, EDT will fill
lines to column 79; if your screen width is 132, EDT will fill lines to column
131.
If you want to use a line length other than 80 or 132 for filling text, you
must use the line mode SET WRAP command. The SET WRAP command
also affects the line length that EDT uses for inserting text in keypad mode.
EDT uses the SET SCREEN value to determine the line length for filling text
only if SET NO WRAP (the default) is in effect. If SET WRAP is in effect,
EDT always uses the wrap value, regardless of the SET SCREEN width. You
can use the SHOW WRAP command to find out the current wrap value or
setting.
The filling process considers a blank line to be a break between paragraphs.
Even if there are spaces on the blank line, EDT fills the text up to the blank
line and then resumes filling with the next line that contains text.
FILLSR. is the nokeypad definition for FILL on VT 100-type terminals and for
CTRL/F on VT52 terminals.
The FILL function is available on all VTlOO-type terminals. You must use
CTRL/F on VT52 terminals to perform the FILL function.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Creates a select range of four lines and then reformats it using the current
SET SCREEN width—80 characters.
When the last line of the file is reached,
the computer reads the end of block
indicator
and displays the system prompt character.

VTIOO:

EDT—66

SELECT
RESET

LINE
OPENLINE

EDT Commands
FILL Function (VT100)

VT100:

IgoldI + SECT
FILL

VT52:

SELECT
RESET

VT52:

IctrlTfI

LINE
OPENLINE

-I-

LINE
OPENLINE

When the last line of the file is reached, the computer reads the end of block
indicator and displays the system prompt character.

example 2:

First uses the line mode SET WRAP command to limit the line length to 30
characters. Then creates a select range of four lines and reformats the text.
When the last line of the file is reached,
the computer reads the end of block
indicator
and displays the system prompt character.

VT100:

IgoldI +

PAGE
COMMAND

Command:

SET WRAP 30

VT100:

ENTER
SUBS

VT100:

SELECT
RESET

VT100:

IgoldI + SECT

VT52:

IgoldI +

Command:

SET WRAP 30

VT52:

ENTER
SUBS

VT52:

SELECT
RESET

VT52:

I ctrl I +[F]

LINE
OPENLINE

FILL

PAGE
COMMAND

LINE
OPENLINE

When the last line of the file
is reached, the computer reads
the end of block indicator and
displays the system prompt
character.

related
commands

- Line—FILL
— Nokeypad—FILL

EDT—67

EDT Commands
FIND Function

FIND Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

GOLD

+ FNDNXT
FIND

VT52:

GOLD

+ FNDNXT
FIND

BLUE +
COLOR

LK201:

GOLD

+ FNDNXT
FIND

Find

PF1

PF3

Pressing FIND sets up a search procedure. When you press GOLD and then
FIND, EDT displays the prompt Search for: at the bottom of the screen.
Type the string you want to locate. Then push ENTER to process the search
in the current direction.
After you have typed in your search string, you can press ADVANCE instead
of ENTER to search toward the end of the buffer or you can press BACKUP
to search backward toward the top. The direction you use to process FIND
becomes EDT's current direction.
EDT can perform searches in several ways. The default ways are GENERAL,
BEGIN, and UNBOUNDED. GENERAL means that EDT ignores the case and
diacritical marks of letters in performing searches. BEGIN means that EDT
places the cursor on the first character of the search string. UNBOUNDED
means that EDT performs the search in the portion of the buffer between
the cursor position and the beginning or end of the buffer, depending on the
direction of the search. Use the SET SEARCH command to change the way
EDT performs searches. The SHOW SEARCH command tells you which
search parameters are currently in effect.

~@?'Search for:

is the nokeypad definition for FIND.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Searches for the next occurrence of Walker in the current direction.
Wes Chandler
Hershel Walker
Wesley Walker
1 GQLDl + FNDNXT
FIND

Search for:

Walker

ENTER
SUBS

1 On LK201 keyboards, both the PF1/PF3 key sequence and the Find key have the same preset function.

EDT—68

Wes in the backward direction.
GOLD | + FNDNXT
FIND

Search for:

Wes

BACKUP
TOP

Wes Chandler
Hershel Walker
Wesley Walker

example 3:

Using the same list of names with the cursor in its
Wes in the forward direction.
FNDNXT
FIND

GOLD

Search for:

Wes

ADVANCE
BOTTOM

Wes Chandler
Hershel Walker
Wesley Walker

example 4:

Using the same list of names with the cursor in its
the next occurrence of Walker in the current direct
I GOLD 1

+ FNDNXT
FIND

Search for:

Walker

ENTER
SUBS

Wes Chandler
Hershel Walker
Wesley Walker

related
commands

- Line—FIND
— Nokeypad—"string"

EDT Commands
FNDNXT (Find Next) Function

FNDNXT (Find Next) Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

VT100:

FNDNXT

PF3

VT52:

FNDNXT
FIND

DESCRIPTION After a search string has been established by FIND, you can use FNDNXT
(find next) to locate the next occurrence of that string. The direction for
FNDNXT is always the current EDT direction. You can change directions
without affecting the search string.
The search string established by FIND remains in effect until you use FIND
again or use some other EDT function that overwrites the contents of the
search buffer.
EDT can perform searches in several ways. The default ways are GENERAL,
BEGIN, and UNBOUNDED. GENERAL means that EDT ignores the case and
diacritical marks of letters in performing searches. BEGIN means that EDT
places the cursor on the first character of the search string. UNBOUNDED
means that EDT performs the search on the portion of the buffer between
the cursor position and the beginning or end of the buffer, depending on the
direction of the search. Use the SET SEARCH command to change the way
EDT performs searches. The SHOW SEARCH command tells you which
search parameters are currently in effect.
is the nokeypad definition for FNDNXT.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

First uses FIND to load the search buffer. Then es FNDNXT to locate the
fourth occurrence of the string wi in the list.
Dwight Evans
Willie Randolph
Willie Wilson
Dave Winfield
1 GOLD I + FNDNXT
FIND

Search for:

ENTER
SUBS

Dwight Evans
Willie Randolph
Willie Wilson
Dave Winfield

EDT—70

EDT Commands
FNDNXT (Find Next) Function

FNDNXT
FIND

Dwight Evans
Willie Randolph
Willie Wilson
Dave Winfield

example 2:

With the current search string still wi, but the direction changed to backward,
locates the string at the beginning of the third line.
BACKUP
TOP
FNDNXT
FIND

Dwight Evans
Willie Randolph
Willie Wilson
Dave Winfield

related
commands

- Line—FIND ""
— Nokeypad ""

EDT—71

EDT Commands
GOLD Function

GOLD Function-—Keypad
KIEV
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

GOLD

PF1

VT52:

GOLD

BLUE
COLOR

Pressing GOLD together with other keypad and keyboard keys performs
various editing functions. GOLD is like the SHIFT key in that it does nothing
by itself.
When used with a keypad key, GOLD causes EDT to perform that key's
alternate function. For example, to use the COMMAND function, you must
first press GOLD and then the 7 key on the keypad. If you do not press
GOLD, EDT performs the PAGE function. Using EDT's key definition facility,
you can redefine any GOLD/keypad sequence to perform a different function
during your EDT session.
The define key feature allows you to designate a GOLD/keyboard key
sequence to perform a keypad editing function for the duration of your editing
session. You can also use GOLD in combination with a CTRL/character
sequence and with the DELETE key to define new keypad mode functions.
GOLD/FUNCTION key sequences can be defined on terminals that have
LK201 keyboards.
GOLD can be used with keyboard number keys to designate the number of
times for EDT to repeat a keypad editing function. First press GOLD, next
the keyboard number key(s), and then the keypad function key(s) that you
want EDT to repeat. When EDT's direction is set to forward, you can use
GOLD followed by a minus sign (-) to change EDT's direction to backward
temporarily. This feature allows you to process an EDT function in the
opposite direction, without having to reset EDT's direction. For example,
you can use GOLD/-2 with WORD to have the cursor back up two words
without changing EDT's direction. The maximum number of times you can
repeat a function with the GOLD/repeat feature is 32767.
When you use the SPECINS function, you first press GOLD, then the
keyboard digits for the decimal equivalent value of the character you want to
insert. Then press GOLD again—this time to access the alternate function on
the keypad function key—and finally the SPECINS key.

GOLD is the nokeypad definition for GOLD. Note that there is no period at
the end of the definition because GOLD is not a nokeypad command. You
must use the line mode DEFINE KEY command to redefine a key that has
GOLD as its definition.

EDT—72

EDT Commands
GOLD Function

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Causes EDT to process FIND, not FNDNXT.
lGOLDl + FNDNXT
FIND

example 2:

Causes EDT to perform the PASTE function, not CUT.
IgoldI +

example 3:

CUT
PASTE

Using CTRL/K, defines the key sequence GOLD/E to locate a semicolon (;)
and delete to the end of line.
ICTRL/K |
Press the key you wish to define.
IgoldI + [e]
Now enter the definition terminated by ENTER.
";"D+EL.
ENTER
SUBS

example 4:

Causes EDT to repeat the period (.) 60 times, thus creating a line of 60 dots.
[sold! + H +

example 5:

\g] + □

Using the minus sign (-) as well as a repeat count of two, causes EDT to
change the case of the two letters preceding the cursor.
New vtlOO terminals are now available.
IgoldI + □ + [!] + IgoldI +

WORD
CHNGCASE

New VT100 terminals are now available.

example 6:

With SPECINS, inserts the form feed character into the text.
as of the last day in August.
The next item on the agenda will be to clarify the

VT100:

IgoldI +

[T] + [2] + IgoldI +

CHAR
SPECINS

VT52:

IgoldI + Q] + [2] + IgoldI +

RIGHT
SPECINS

EDT—73

EDT Commands
GOLD Function

as of the last day in August.
<FF>_
The next item on the agenda will be to clarify the

related
commands

EDT—74

None,

EDT Commands
HELP Function

HELP Function —Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

HELP

PF2

VT52:

HELP

RED
COLOR

LK201:

HELP

Help

Pressing HELP provides information on EDT's preset keypad and control
functions. Using HELP puts you in touch with EDT's HELP facility; it has
no effect on your editing session. When you exit from HELP, the screen is
redrawn exactly as it was before you pressed HELP and the cursor is in the
same position as before.
When you press HELP, EDT displays a diagram of the keypad functions and
a list of preset control key functions. For help on a particular keypad function
key, press the appropriate keypad key. For information on a GOLD/keypad
sequence, press only the keypad key. Information for both the primary and
alternate functions of that key will be displayed. For information on a control
key sequence, press both the CTRL and keyboard keys after you are in the
keypad HELP facility. For help on a GOLD/keyboard key sequence, press
only the keyboard key; do not press GOLD.
To exit from HELP, press the spacebar.
If you have access to more than one HELP file, use the SET HELP command
to change HELP files. The SHOW HELP command prints the name of the
HELP file that is currently available for your editing session.
To define another key to perform the HELP function, use the nokeypad HELP
command. HELP, is the nokeypad definition for HELP.

related
commands

Line—HELP
[Nokeypad—HELP]

1 On LK201 keyboards, both the PF2 key and the Help key have the same preset function.

EDT—75

EDT Commands
Left Arrow

Left Arrow—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

VT100:
VT52:

DESCRIPTION

LEFT
APPEND

Pressing the Left Arrow moves the cursor one character to the left, regardless
of EDT's direction. -C. is the nokeypad definition for Left Arrow.
If the cursor is at the first character position of a line, pressing Left Arrow
moves the cursor to the line terminator of the previous line.

EXAMPLE
Moves the cursor to the left, first to the beginning of the second line and then
to the end of the first line.
July 1, 1985
October 1. 1985

B + B + B
July 1, 1985
October 1, 1985

B
July 1, 1985_
October 1, 1985

related
commands

EDT—76

— Nokeypad—Left Arrow

EDT Commands
LINE Function

LINE Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

LINE
OPEN LINE

VT52:

LINE
OPEN LINE

Pressing LINE moves the cursor to the beginning of the next line if the
direction is forward or to the beginning of the current line if the direction
is backward. If the cursor is at the beginning of a line and the direction is
backward, the cursor moves to the beginning of the previous line. L. is the
nokeypad definition for LINE.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Moves the cursor from the middle of the second line to the beginning of the
third line.
Software Documentation
Software Development
Production Groups
LINE
OPEN LINE

Software Documentation
Software Development
Production Groups

example 2:

Using the same text and original cursor position, reverses the direction and
moves the cursor to the beginning of the first line.
BACKUP
TOP

LINE
OPEN LINE

Software Documentation
Software Development
Production Groups

related
commands

— Nokeypad—L (line)

EDT—77

EDT Commands
LINEFEED Function

LINEFEED Function—Keypad
CTRL/J
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100

LINEFEED

LINE
FEED

VT52:

LINEFEED

LINE
FEED

LK201:

LINEFEED

F13

All:

CTRL/J

CTRL

Pressing LINEFEED deletes the word or characters in a word to the left of
the cursor up to the beginning of the previous word. It is similar to DEL
W, which deletes the word or characters in a word to the right of the cursor
up to the beginning of the next word. DBW. is the nokeypad definition for
LINEFEED.
If the cursor is on a space when LINEFEED is pressed, the word preceding
the space is deleted, usually leaving two spaces in a row. If the cursor is at
the end or in the middle of a word, all characters in that word to the left of
the cursor are deleted. The letter that the cursor is on remains in the text.
When the cursor is at the beginning of a word, the preceding word and
space are deleted by LINEFEED. If the cursor is at the beginning of a line,
LINEFEED deletes the preceding line terminator.
All characters deleted by LINEFEED are stored in the delete word buffer.
Each time DEL W or LINEFEED is used, the contents of the delete word
buffer are overwritten. Use UND W to insert or restore the contents of the
delete word buffer in your text.
The LINEFEED key and CTRL/J always have the same preset function in
EDT. When you redefine the LINEFEED key, you redefine CTRL/J (except for
terminals with LK201 keyboards when they are operating in VT200 mode.)
To redefine the LINEFEED key using the line mode DEFINE KEY command,
type DEFINE KEY CONTROL J. To find out what the definition of the
LINEFEED key is, type SHOW KEY CONTROL J. For terminals with LK201
keyboards, use DEFINE KEY FUNCTION 25 and SHOW KEY FUNCTION 25
for the FI3 key.

EDT—78

EDT Commands
LINEFEED Function

EXAMPLE
Deletes the characters to the left of the cursor up to the next word boundary.
This guide describes the VT100 terminal.
1 linefeedI
This guide describes the VT100

related
commands

— Nokeypad—DBW (delete to beginning of word)

EDT—79

EDT Commands
OPEN LINE Function

OPEN LINE Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

GOLD

LINE
OPEN LINE

PF1

VT52:

GOLD

LINE
OPEN LINE

BLUE +
COLOR

Pressing OPEN LINE inserts a line terminator in the text you are editing at
the current cursor position and makes the line terminator the new cursor
character. If the cursor is initially at the beginning of a line, the text on that
line is moved down so that the cursor is on the blank line.
When the cursor is in the middle of a line, the text to the right of the cursor
and the cursor character itself move to a new line. The cursor is now on the
line terminator that OPEN LINE inserts. When the cursor is at the end of a
line, a line terminator is added, creating a blank line below the current line.

RETURN and CTRL/M also insert line terminators in your text. However,
neither of these functions moves the cursor to the inserted line terminator.
The cursor remains on the same character.

CM-C). is the nokeypad definition for OPEN LINE. *M is the definition of
RETURN.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Inserts a blank line between the first and second line.
Meeting Report_
On Wednesday. I attended a seminar on the advanced
capabilities of the EDT Editor.
The topics covered
included startup command files, defining and
redefining keys, defining and using macros.
The presentation was very good.
I GOLDl +

LINE
OPEN LINE

Meeting Report_
On Wednesday, I attended a seminar on the advanced
capabilities of the EDT Editor.
The topics covered
included startup command files, defining and
redefining keys, defining and using macros.
The presentation was very good.

example 2:

EDT—80

Using the same text, inserts a blank line above the last line.

EDT Commands
OPEN LINE Function

(Move the cursor to the beginning of the last line.)
| GOLD) +

LINE
OPEN LINE

Meeting Report
On Wednesday, I attended a seminar on the advanced
capabilities of the EDT Editor.
The topics covered
included startup command files, defining and
redefining keys, defining and using macros.
The presentation was very good.

example 3:

Using the same text, inserts a line terminator that moves the words The
topics covered to a new line.
(Move the cursor to the T in The in the middle of the second line.)
1 GOLD| +

LINE
OPEN LINE

related
commands

Line—INSERT I return I
Nokeypad—11 return I

EDT—81

EDT Commands
PAGE Function

PAGE Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

PAGE
COMMAND

VT52:

PAGE
COMMAND

Pressing PAGE moves the cursor to a position at the right of the next page
marker in your text. The cursor is always located after the page marker,
but the direction that EDT moves to find the page marker depends on the
current direction. In order to use PAGE, the text you are editing must have
PAGE boundary markers. The default page marker is the form feed character
(CTRL/L, decimal value 12, displayed by EDT as <FF> .)

PAGETOP. is the nokeypad definition for PAGE. This means that EDT
moves the page marker line to the top of the screen if there are more than 22
lines between the page marker and the end of the buffer.
If you have no page markers in your buffer, the PAGE entity is the same as
the whole buffer. When EDT's direction is forward, PAGE moves the cursor
to the end of buffer ([EOB]) mark. If the current direction is backward, PAGE
moves the cursor to the beginning of the buffer.
You can use the SET ENTITY PAGE command to define any string of
characters as the page marker for the duration of your editing session. The
marker can be either a single character that you insert in the text, such as
an exclamation point (!), or a series of characters, such as a RUNOFF header
level (.HL1).
If you are using the default page marker, you can use SET TEXT PAGE to
have EDT display some other text in place of the <FF> page marker for the
duration of your EDT session.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Moves the cursor to the next page marker in the text.
and will be forthcoming as soon as we receive your payment.
<FF>
If you are not completely satisfied with this product, please
notify us immediately so that we can arrange for you to return
PAGE
COMMAND

and will be forthcoming as soon as we receive your payment.
<FF>_
If you axe not completely satisfied with this product, please
notify us immediately so that we can arrange for you to return

EDT—82

.HL1 Starting to Work with your Word Processing System
gqldI +

PAGE
COMMAND

Command:

SET ENTITY PAGE ".HL1"

ENTER
SUBS
PAGE
COMMAND

Now that you understand the basic concepts of word
processing, we can move on to an actual session at the
.HL1 Starting to Work with your Word Processing System

related
commands

— Nokeypad—PAGE

EDT Commands
PASTE Function

PASTE Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

GOLD

CUT
PASTE

VT52:

GOLD

LK201:

GOLD

PF1

CUT
PASTE

BLUE +
COLOR

CUT
PASTE

Insert 1
Here

Pressing PASTE with CUT or APPEND is used to copy or move text within
a buffer. PASTE copies the text currently residing in the PASTE buffer into
the current buffer. The PASTE buffer contents are inserted to the left of the
cursor regardless of EDT's current direction. PASTE has no effect on the
contents of the PASTE buffer. PASTE, is the nokeypad definition for PASTE.
To move text from one place in your buffer to another, you need to use
SELECT, CUT, and PASTE in the following order:
1

Use SELECT to create a select range of the text you want to move.

2 Press CUT to delete the text from the current buffer and put it into the
PASTE buffer.

3 Move the cursor to the new location where you want to insert the deleted
text.

4 Press PASTE to have EDT copy the PASTE buffer text into your current
buffer to the left of the cursor.
You can use SELECT, CUT and PASTE to copy text that exists in one place
in your buffer to a second location. Follow the same procedure as for moving
text, but add an additional step between the second and third steps:
2a.

Press PASTE to have EDT restore the deleted text in its original location.

Each time you use CUT, EDT overwrites the contents of the PASTE buffer.
If you want to add more text to the buffer before you insert it in the new
location, you can use APPEND. APPEND deletes the select range text from
its current location and adds it to the end of the PASTE buffer. When you
press PASTE, both the text you deleted with CUT and the text you deleted
with APPEND are inserted to the left of the cursor.
It is possible to edit the PASTE buffer. Using the line mode FIND =buffer
command, you can enter the PASTE buffer, make your changes, and then
return to your original buffer. Now, when you use PASTE, the revised buffer
contents are inserted at the cursor location.
When you use CUT to put part of a line into a buffer, EDT adds a line
terminator at the end of the text since EDT buffers cannot hold partial lines.
PASTE removes the added line terminator so that when you insert the text,
you do not have an extra line terminator.
1 On the LK201 keyboard, both the PF1/6 key sequence and the Insert Here key have the same preset function.

EDT—84

EDT Commands
PASTE Function

You can use the line mode FIND command to move from one buffer to
another during your EDT session. Then you can use PASTE to put the
contents of the PASTE buffer in that buffer.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Uses a select range and CUT to move the second element of the list to the
PASTE buffer. After moving the cursor, inserts the PASTE buffer contents to
reorder the list.
Peripheral hardware, also known as input/output devices,
includes terminals, line printers, tapes, and disks.
SELECT
RESET

WORD
CHNGCASE

Peripheral hardware, also known as input/output devices,
includes terminals, line printers, tapes, and disks.
CUT
PASTE

Peripheral hardware, also known as input/output devices,
includes terminals, tapes, and disks.

(Move the cursor to the a of and disks.)
[gold] +

CUT
PASTE

Peripheral hardware, also known as input/output devices,
includes terminals, tapes, line printers, and disks.

example 2:

Uses a select range and CUT to move the separating line to the PASTE buffer.
Immediately restores the deleted line to its former position. Moves the cursor
to another location and copies the separating line there.
End of Section 1
***** ***** *****
SELECT
RESET

LINE
OPENLINE

CUT
PASTE

+ [GOLD] +

CUT
PASTE

End of Section 1
***** ***** *****

(Move the cursor to the next location where you want to put the line.)
End of Section 2

| GOLD |

CUT
PASTE

End of Section 2
***** ***** *****

EDT—85

EDT Commands
PASTE Function

example 3:

Using a select range and CUT, moves three lines to the PASTE buffer. Then
uses the line mode FIND command to enter the PASTE buffer and edit the
text. Again, uses the line mode FIND command to return to the MAIN buffer.
After finding the new location for the text, inserts the revised contents of the
PASTE buffer.
You combine the control key with a character key by
pressing both simultaneously, i.e., hold the CTRL
key down while you press the character key.
SELECT
RESET

iGOLDl +

PAGE
COMMAND

Command:

LINE
OPEN LINE

CUT
PASTE

FIND =PASTE

ENTER
SUBS

(Move cursor to the i of i.e. and delete the next four characters. Now type
that is to replace i.e..)
IgoldI +

PAGE
COMMAND

Command: FIND -MAIN
ENTER
SUBS

(Move the cursor to the new location where you want to insert the text.)
IgoldI +

CUT
PASTE

You combine the control key with a character key by
pressing both simultaneously, that is, hold the CTRL
key down while you press the character key.

related
commands

EDT—86

- Line—COPY, MOVE
— Nokeypad—PASTE

EDT Commands
REPLACE Function

REPLACE Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

GOLD

APPEND
REPLACE

VT52:

GOLD

UP
REPLACE

PF1

BLUE +
COLOR

Pressing REPLACE deletes the text in the select range and replaces it with
the contents of the PASTE buffer. REPLACE enables you to delete different
blocks of text and replace them all with the same text. EDT stores the deleted
text in a buffer called DELETE. If the buffer does not exist, EDT creates it. If
you have created a buffer called DELETE, EDT overwrites the text you had in
that buffer with the newly deleted text. Each time you use REPLACE, EDT
overwrites the text in the DELETE buffer. The DELETE buffer can be entered
and edited and its name appears on the SHOW BUFFER list.
You can use CUT to put the replacement text into the PASTE buffer, or you
can move to the PASTE buffer with the line mode FIND command and insert
the text directly there.

CUTSR=DELETE PASTE, is the nokeypad definition for REPLACE.

EXAMPLE
Creates a select range of four lines. Moves the selected text to the DELETE
buffer and inserts the contents of the PASTE buffer.
Martha Jackson
Purchasing Department
Kitchen Cabinets, Inc.
Post Mills, VT 05058

VT100:

SELECT
RESET

VT100:

[GOLD] +

APPEND
REPLACE

VT52:

SELECT
RESET

VT52:

iGOLDl +

UP
REPLACE

LINE
OPEN LINE

-I-

LINE
OPEN LINE

-I-

LINE
OPEN LINE

Judy Henning
Purchasing Department
Kitchens Incorporated
Cumberland, RI
02864

EDT—87

EDT Commands
REPLACE Function

related
commands

EDT—88

- Line—REPLACE
— Nokeypad—R (replace)

EDT Commands
RESET Function

RESET Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
RESET

VT100:

GOLD

VT52:

GOLD

+ SELECT
RESET

PF1

BLUE +
COLOR

Pressing RESET changes several conditions of your editing session:
•

Cancels an active select range

•

Sets EDT's current direction to ADVANCE

•

Sets EDT to the default DMOV state

RESET also has a special function within the CTRL/K key definition facility.
Namely, you can use RESET to delete the text on the definition line if you
want to start your definition over again.

RESET is the nokeypad definition for RESET. Note that there is no period at
the end of the definition. This is because RESET is not a nokeypad command.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Cancels the active select range.
The next meeting is scheduled for December 13th in my office.
SELECT
RESET

WORD
CHNGCASE

The next meeting is scheduled for December 13th in my office.
1 GOLD| + SELECT
RESET
The next meeting is scheduled for December 13th in my office.

example 2:

Uses RESET to delete to beginning of line so that you can retype the key
definition correctly. Shows how to create a key definition to access nokeypad
commands directly from keypad mode.
[CTRL/Kl

Press the key you wish to define
fCTRl + 03

EDT—89

Now enter the definition terminated by ENTER
? * Nokeypad command: '.

related
commands

EDT—90

— Nokeypad—DESEL

EDT Commands
RETURN Function

RETURN Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

RETURN

VT52:

RETURN

Pressing RETURN adds a line terminator to the text you are editing. The new
line terminator is inserted to the left of the current cursor position. The cursor
remains on the same character where it was before you pressed RETURN. If
the cursor is at the beginning of the line, a blank line is created above the
current cursor line.
When the cursor is in the middle of a line, RETURN moves the cursor
character and all the text to the right of the cursor to a new line. When the
cursor is at the end of a line, RETURN adds a line terminator, creating a blank
line below the current line. The cursor is now positioned at the beginning of
the new blank line. OPEN LINE also inserts a line terminator in your text,
but it positions the cursor on the new line terminator.
You can redefine the RETURN key, although this is not recommended. When
you redefine the RETURN key, you also redefine CTRL/M. To find out the
definition of the RETURN key, type SHOW KEY CONTROL M.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Inserts a blank line between the first and second lines.
Meeting Report_
On Wednesday, I attended a seminar on the advanced
capabilities of the EDT Editor.
The topics covered
included startup command files, defining and
redefining keys, defining and using macros.
The presentation was very good.
|RETURN |
Meeting Report
On Wednesday, I attended a seminar on the advanced
capabilities of the EDT Editor.
The topics covered
included startup command files, defining and
redefining keys, defining and using macros.
The presentation was very good.

example 2:

Using the same text, inserts a blank line above the last line.

EDT—91

EDT Commands
RETURN Function

(Move the cursor to the beginning of the last line.)
Ireturn 1
Meeting Report
On Wednesday, I attended a seminar on the advanced
capabilities of the EDT Editor.
The topics covered
included startup command files, defining and
redefining keys, defining and using macros.
The presentation was very good.

example 3:

Using the same text, inserts a line terminator that moves the words The
topics covered to a new line.
(Move the cursor to the T in The topics covered.)
Ireturn 1
Meeting Report
On Wednesday, I attended a seminar on the advanced
capabilities of the EDT Editor.
The topics covered
included startup command files, defining and
redefining keys, defining and using macros.
The presentation was very good.

related
commands

EDT—92

None.

EDT Commands
Right Arrow

Right Arrow—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

VT100:
VT52:

DESCRIPTION

RIGHT
SPECINS

Pressing the Right Arrow moves the cursor one character to the right,
regardless of EDT's direction. +C. is the nokeypad definition for Right Arrow.
If the cursor is on a line terminator. Right Arrow moves the cursor to the first
character on the next line.

EXAMPLE
Moves the cursor to the right to the end of first line. Then moves the cursor
to the beginning of the second line.
January 1, 1985
April 1. 1985

B + □ + □
January 1, 1985_
April 1, 1985

□
January 1, 1985
April 1, 1985

related
commands

— Nokeypad—Right Arrow

EDT—93

KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

SECT
FILL

VT52:

GOLD

LK201:

SECT
FILL

Next 1
Screen

LK201:

BACKUP
TOP

Prev 1
Screen

DOWN
SECT

BLUE
COLOR

Pressing SECT (section) moves the cursor one section—16 lines
end or beginning of the buffer, depending on EDT's current dir
cursor is always placed at the beginning of the new current line
its previous position. (16L). is the nokeypad definition for SECT

EXAMPLE
Moves the cursor from its position at the end of Test Line 1 to
of Test Line 17.
Test
Test
Test
Test
Test
Test
Test
Test
Test
Test
Test
Test
Test
Test
Test
Test
Test

Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

VT100:

SECT
FILL

VT52:

1 GOLD | + DOWN
SECT

1 On the LK201 keyboard, the Next Screen key moves the cursor 16 lines forward, regardless of EDT's current direction. T
moves the cursor 16 lines backward, regardless of EDT's current direction. On all screen mode terminals the SECT functi
16 lines in the current direction.
(

EDT—94

Test
Test
Test
Test
Test
Test
Test
Test
Test

related
commands

Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line

None.

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

EDT Commands
SELECT Function

SELECT Function—-Keypad
KEY

SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100

SELECT
RESET

VT52:

SELECT
RESET

LK201:

SELECT
RESET

Select 1

Pressing SELECT sets up a select range for use with keypad functions such as
APPEND, CHNGCASE, CUT, FILL, REPLACE, SUBS, and CTRL/T. Start
with the cursor at one end of the text you want selected. Next press SELECT
to mark that position as the beginning of the select range. Then, using the
arrow keys and/or function keys that move the cursor, mark the other end of
the text being selected. Now you are ready to press a function key that uses
a select range.
The RESET function cancels the select range. If you have included more text
than you wanted in the select range, you can move the cursor back toward
the position initially marked by SELECT, using arrow keys and cursor moving
functions, thus reducing the size of the range. Adjusting select ranges on
VT100 terminals is easy because EDT shows the text in reverse video. On
VT52 terminals, you might find it easier to use RESET to cancel the select
range and then start over.
You can use a select range with line mode commands by giving the line mode
range specifier SELECT. However, line mode requires that the select range
contain only whole lines.

SEL. is the nokeypad definition for SELECT.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Creates a select range of the last line and, using CUT, moves it to the PASTE
buffer. Uses PASTE to insert the line in its proper alphabetical order.
Introduction to BASIC
Roget'8 Thesaurus
American Heritage Dictionary
SELECT
RESET

LINE
OPEN LINE

CUT
PASTE

Introduction to BASIC
Roget's Thesaurus

□ + E + 1 GOLD | +

CUT
PASTE

1 On the LK201 keyboard, both the period (.) keypad key and the Select key have the same preset function.

EDT—96

EDT Commands
SELECT Function

American Heritage Dictionary
Introduction to BASIC
Roget's Thesaurus

example 2:

First uses the COMMAND function to process the line mode SET WRAP 60.
Then creates a select range of four lines. Reformats the select range text with
the FILL function.
In order to process data, there must be
communication between you and the computer.
This communication
is achieved by means of the
two fundamental computer components:
hardware and software.
PAGE
COMMAND

VTIOO:

IgoldI +

Command:

SET WRAP 60

VTIOO:

ENTER
SUBS

VTIOO:

SELECT
RESET

VTIOO:

I GOLD 1 + SECT
FILL

VT52:

IgoldI +

Command:

SET WRAP 60

VT52:

ENTER
SUBS

VT52:

SELECT
RESET

VT52:

I ctrl/fI

LINE
OPEN LINE

-I-

LINE
OPEN LINE

PAGE
COMMAND

LINE
OPEN LINE

In order to process data, there must be communication
between you and the computer.
This communication is
achieved by means of the two fundamental computer
components:
hardware and software.

related
commands

— Nokeypad—SEL (select)

EDT—97

EDT Commands
SPECINS (Special Insert) Function

SPECINS (Special Insert)
Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

GOLD

CHAR
SPECINS

VT52:

GOLD

RIGHT
SPECINS

PF1

BLUE +
COLOR

Pressing SPECINS (special insert) enables you to insert any character from the
DEC Multinational Character Set into your text, using the character's decimal
equivalent value. You can use SPECINS to enter ASCII control characters,
such as CTRL/L, or letters with diacritical marks such as the umlaut (**) or
acute accent ( ). ASC. is the nokeypad definition for SPECINS.
To use SPECINS, first press GOLD. Next, type the decimal equivalent number
for the character you want to insert. Use the main keyboard digits to type
this number; do not use the keypad number keys. EDT displays the number
you typed at the bottom of the screen. You can use the DELETE key to edit
the number. Now press GOLD again, this time followed by the SPECINS
key. The EDT symbol for the character you inserted appears on the screen to
the left of the cursor.
Each time you want to enter a special character, you must repeat the entire
procedure. You cannot enter two characters with one SPECINS function,
nor can you use the GOLD repeat feature to enter the same character several
times in one location.
SPECINS cannot be used if SET NOREPEAT is in effect for your editing
session.
The maximum decimal character value for SPECINS is 255.

EXAMPLE
Inserts first a <CR> , then an <LF> near the end of the line.
for the last time.

VT100:

EDT—98

Then when you need to get another shipment

|M2l + [j] + @

VT100:

[GOLD] +
CHAR
-1
SPECINS

VT100:

|GOLD | +

VT100:

[GOLD | +

CHAR
SPECINS

VT52:

| GOLD 1 +

0*0

EDT Commands
SPECINS (Special Insert) Function

VT52:

[gold]

+ I RIGHT I
[SPECINS |

VT52:

I GOLD |

VT52:

iGOLDl + I RIGHT I
1 SPECINS 1

for the last time.

related
commands

Then when you need to get another <CR><LF>shipment

— Nokeypad—ASC, * (circumflex)

EDT—99

EDT Commands
string specifier

string specifier—Keypad
SYNTAX

string

DESCRIPTION

The string specifier is generally used either to locate characters in a buffer or
to replace the located characters. When a string specifier is used to locate a
piece of text, it is referred to as the search string. All three editing modes use
search strings. Line mode and nokeypad mode use substitute strings.
Whenever you issue a search string, EDT overwrites the contents of the
search buffer. (Similarly, when you issue a substitute string, EDT overwrites
the contents of the substitute buffer.)
The search and substitute buffers cannot be edited or entered. Their names
never appear in the SHOW BUFFER list. You can use the nokeypad CLSS
(clear search string) command to delete the contents of the search buffer.
EDT has a number of ways to perform searches. See the discussion of the
SET SEARCH command for information about the EDT search parameters.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Moves the cursor to the string lollypop.
1IgoldI
-

+ fndnxt

Search for:

FIND

lollypop

ENTER
SUBS

example 2:

Moves the cursor to the next occurrence of the string lollypop.
FNDNXT
FIND

EDT—100

EDT Commands
SUBS (Substitute) Function

SUBS (Substitute) Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

GOLD

+ ENTER
SUBS

VT52:

GOLD

+ ENTER
SUBS

PF1

ENTER

BLUE + ENTER
COLOR

Pressing SUBS (substitute) replaces the current search string with the contents
of the PASTE buffer. In order to use SUBS, you must first put the string you
want to replace in the search buffer and the new text in the PASTE buffer.
All searches and substitutions are made in the current direction.

(CUTSR=DELETE PASTERS""), is the nokeypad definition for SUBS. This
means that the select range—in most cases the current search string—is
deleted from the current buffer and placed in a buffer named DELETE. The
contents of the PASTE buffer are inserted in the text and the cursor is placed
on the last character of the inserted text if EDT's direction is forward. (If
EDT's direction is backward, the cursor is positioned on the first character of
the inserted text.) Finally, EDT moves to the next occurrence of the current
search string.
Using SUBS involves four steps:
1

Put the search string in the search buffer.

2 Put the replacement text in the PASTE buffer.
3 Locate the search string.
4 Press GOLD + SUBS.
1

The easiest way to load the search buffer is with the FIND function. You
can also use any line mode or nokeypad command that involves a search
string. Remember, the search buffer cannot be entered or edited.

2 There are two ways to load the PASTE buffer.
•

You can type the replacement text in your current buffer, make it a
select range, and then use CUT to transfer it to the PASTE buffer.

•

Since you can enter the PASTE buffer and edit its contents, you can
use the line mode FIND command to move to the PASTE buffer and
then insert the replacement text there. Use the FIND command to
return to the buffer you are editing.

3 If you reverse the order of steps 1 and 2, the cursor will already be at the
search string. Otherwise, you must be sure that the cursor is positioned
on the first character of the search string before you press SUBS. This is
because SUBS performs the substitution first and then moves to the next
occurrence of the search string. The order allows you to decide whether
you want to perform the substitution on that instance of the search string
or go on to the next one. (Use FNDNXT to skip the substitution on the
current search string match and advance to the next occurrence.)

EDT—101

EDT Commands
SUBS (Substitute) Function

4 The final step calls for pressing GOLD and then SUBS. If the cursor is
not on the search string, EDT prints the message No select range active.
If there is no other search string match in the remaining portion of your
buffer, EDT prints the message String was not found.
SUBS is the only substitute function that can use a line terminator in the
replacement text.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

First locates the string languge in line 2. Then puts the substitute string in
the PASTE buffer. Replaces the mistake on line 2 and then the one on line 5.
BASIC, a Beginner's All-purpose Symbolic Instruction Code,
is a languge that requires only an understanding of English.
BASIC was developed at Dartmouth College for use by
students who were unfamiliar with computers and needed a
languge related to everyday speech.
|GOLD | + FNDNXT
FIND

Search for:

languge

ENTER
SUBS

(Now type the string language at the current cursor position.)
BASIC, a Beginner's All-purpose Symbolic Instruction Code,
is a languagelanguge that requires only an understanding of English.
BASIC was developed at Dartmouth College for use by
students who were unfamiliar with computers and needed a
languge related to everyday speech.
SELECT
RESET

CUT

+ (GOLD] +(8] + □ +

[GOLD | + ENTER
SUBS

PASTE

+ [gold] + ENTER
SUBS

BASIC, a Beginner's All-purpose Symbolic Instruction Code,
is a language that requires only an understanding of English.
BASIC was developed at Dartmouth College for use by
students who were unfamiliar with computers and needed a
language related to everyday speech.

String was not found

example 2:

Using the line terminator in both the search and replacement strings, inserts a
dollar sign ($) at the beginning of each line.
29.99
35.95
17.00

EDT—102

EDT Commands
SUBS (Substitute) Function

IgolpI + FNDNXT
FIND

Search for:

(Press RETURN in response to
Search for: prompt to put the
line terminator in the search buffer.)

ENTER
SUBS
IreturnI + P

(You press RETURN and then $ to put both the line terminator and the dollar
sign characters in the PASTE buffer.)
SELECT
RESET

+ □ + □ +

CUT
PASTE

(Move the cursor back to its original position above the first number.)
IgolpI + ENTER
SUBS

+ IgolpI + ENTER

SUBS

$29.99
$35.95
$17.00

related
commands

- Line—SUBSTITUTE NEXT
— Nokeypad—SN (substitute next)

EDT-103

EDT Commands
TAB Function CTRL/I

TAB Function CTRL/I-—Keypad
KEY

SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

TAB

VT52:

TAB

TAB |

LK201:

TAB

Tab

All:

CTRL/I

CTRL

Pressing TAB (CTRL/I) moves text to the right. The number of column
positions that the text moves depends on the cursor position, the SET TAB
value, if one is in effect, and the indentation level count, if one is in effect.
(SET NOTAB is the default.) TAB. is the nokeypad definition for TAB.
EDT has preset tab stops every eight characters, regardless of how your
terminal is set. If no SET TAB command has been given, pressing TAB moves
the cursor character, as well as all the characters on the current line to the
right of the cursor, to the nearest preset tab position. Text is always moved to
the right, regardless of EDT's current direction.
When a SET TAB value is in effect, TAB moves the entire line to the column
designated by the SET TAB value only if the cursor is located in column 1.
If the cursor is located anywhere else on the line, TAB moves the text to the
nearest preset EDT tab stop.
If a tab indentation level count is in effect and the cursor is located in column
one of the line, TAB moves the text to the indentation level position. The
indentation level count is determined by three functions: (1) CTRL/A, which
can be used to compute the indentation level count, (2) CTRL/D, which
decrements the count, and (3) CTRL/E, which increments the count. Use
the SHOW TAB command to find out the current SET TAB value and the
indentation level count.

CTRL/T indents whole lines of text by the SET TAB value.
The TAB key and CTRL/I always have identical functions in EDT. When
you redefine the TAB key, you redefine CTRL/I. To redefine the TAB key
using the line mode DEFINE KEY command, type DEFINE KEY CONTROL
I. When you want to find out the definition of the TAB key, type SHOW KEY
CONTROL I.

EDT—104

EDT Commands
TAB Function CTRL/I

EXAMPLE
Using the default EDT tab settings (SET NOTAB in effect), indents the lines
of text, each one eight columns farther than the one above.
This
This
This
This

is
is
is
is

the
the
the
the

first line of text.
second line of text.
third line of text.
fourth line of text.

(Start with the cursor at the beginning of the second line.)
Eab]
(Move the cursor to the beginning of the third line.)
|TAB| + |TAB|

(Move the cursor to the beginning of the fourth line.)
[tab] + |tab| + |tab|
This is the first line of text.
This is the second line of text.
This is the third line of text.
This is the fourth line of text.

related
commands

— Nokeypad—TAB

EDT—105

EDT Commands
TOP Function

TOP Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

GOLD

+ BACKUP
TOP

VT52:

GOLD

+ BACKUP
TOP

PF1

BLUE
+
COLOR

Pressing TOP moves the cursor to the first character position at the beginning
of the buffer. TOP has no effect on EDT's current direction. BR. is the
nokeypad definition for TOP.

EXAMPLE
Moves the cursor from the middle of line 3 to the first character position in
the buffer.
DATE:
TO:
FROM:

IgoldI

DATE:
TO:
FROM:

related
commands

EDT—106

June 16. 1985
Tom Langston
Judy Tortini

BACKUP
TOP

June 16. 1985
Tom Langston
Judy Tortini

— Nokeypad—BR

EDT Commands
UND C (Undelete Character) Function

UIMD C (Undelete Character)
Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

GOLD

+ DEL C
UND C

GOLD

VT52:

GOLD

+ DEL C
UND C

GOLD

PF1

BLUE +
COLOR

Pressing UND C (undelete character) inserts the current contents of the delete
character buffer into your text to the left of the cursor. The cursor character,
as well as the text to the right of the cursor, moves to the right. The cursor
is now located on the inserted character if you used DEL C to delete the
character. If you used DELETE to delete the character, the cursor is located
to the right of the inserted character. UNDC. is the nokeypad definition for
UND C.
The keypad functions DEL C and DELETE both place the character they
delete in the delete character buffer. Each time you use DEL C or DELETE,
the contents of the delete character buffer are overwritten. The buffer
contains only the most recently deleted character. When you use a repeat
count with DEL C or DELETE, only the last character deleted is in the delete
character buffer. If no character has been deleted thus far during the current
EDT session, UND C inserts nothing. Note that if you use the DELETE key
to delete characters in a command line or prompt line, these characters are not
stored in the delete character buffer and will not affect the character inserted
by UND C.
EDT represents a line terminator as the character <CR> (CTRL/M, decimal
13) in all three of its delete entity buffers. Suppose you have a <CR>
character in your text and you delete it. When you undelete this character,
EDT changes the <CR> character into a line terminator and inserts the line
terminator in your text.

EXAMPLE
Using DEL C and UND C, reverses the order of the misplaced letters in

poeple to people.
Many poeple have been aware of this problem for some time.
DEL C
UND C

+ El

IgoldI + DEL C
UND C

Many people have been aware of this problem for some time.

related
commands

— Nokeypad—UNDC (undelete character)

EDT—107

EDT Commands
UND L (Undelete Line) Function

UND L (Undelete Line) Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

GOLD

+ DEL L
UND L

VT52:

GOLD

+ DEL L
UND L

PF1

PF4

BLUE + GRAY
COLOR
COLOR

Pressing UND L (undelete line) inserts the current contents of the delete line
buffer to the left of the cursor. The cursor character, as well as the text to the
right of the cursor, moves to a new line below the current line, if the buffer
contents ends with a line terminator. Otherwise, text just moves to the right.
The cursor is now located on the first character of the inserted text if you used
DEL L or DEL EOL to delete the text. If you used CTRL/U to delete the text,
the cursor is located to the right of the inserted text. UNDL. is the nokeypad
definition for UND L.
The delete line buffer is loaded by using DEL L, DEL EOL, or CTRL/U. Each
time one of these three functions is used, the contents of the delete line buffer
are overwritten. The current contents of the buffer are the most recently
deleted line or line portion. When you use a repeat count with a delete line
function, only the last line or line portion that was deleted is in the delete
line buffer. If no line has been deleted thus far in your EDT session, UND L
inserts nothing.
EDT represents a line terminator as the character <CR> (CTRL/M, decimal
13) in all three of its delete entity buffers. Suppose you have a <CR>
character in the text you are deleting. When you undelete this text, EDT
changes the <CR> character into a line terminator and inserts the line
terminator in the current buffer.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Using DEL L and UND L, reorganizes the list so that the cities are in
alphabetical order by state.
Montgomery, Alabama
Juneau, Alaska
Little Rock, Arkansas
Phoenix, Arizona
DEL L
UND L

(Move the cursor to the L in Little Rock.)
| GOLDl + DEL L
UND L

EDT—108

EDT Commands
UND L (Undelete Line) Function

Montgomery, Alabama
Juneau, Alaska
Phoenix, Arizona
Little Rock, Arkansas

example 2:

Using DEL L and UND L, inserts the second line of text after you.
When you give it more thought, please contact me.
have had a chance to
DEL L
UND L

(Move the cursor to the g in give.)
I GOLDl + DEL L
UND L

When you have had a chance to
give it more thought, please contact me.

example 3:

Uses DEL EOL and UND L to insert several words in the middle of some
lines. Note that a leading space is included in the text stored in the delete
line buffer.
the company.

_(Digital Equipment Corporation)

After you have received the proper notification
from the company, you can
1 GOLDl +

EOL
DEL EOL

(Move the cursor back to the period [.] after the y in company.)
I goldI + DEL L
UND L

the company (Digital Equipment Corporation).

After you have received the proper notification
from the company, you can

(Now move the cursor to the comma between company and you.)
I goldI + DEL L
UND L

the company (Digital Equipment Corporation).

After you have received the proper notification
from the company_(Digital Equipment Corporation), you can

related
commands

— Nokeypad—UNDL (undelete line)

EDT-109

EDT Commands
UND W (Undelete Word) Function

UND W (Undelete Word)
Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

GOLD

+ DEL W
UND W

VT52:

GOLD

4- DEL W
UND W

PF1

BLUE +
COLOR

Pressing UND W (undelete word) inserts the current contents of the delete
word buffer to the left of the cursor. The cursor character, as well as the text
to the right of the cursor, moves to the right. The cursor is now located on
the first character of the inserted word or word portion if you used DEL W to
make the deletion. If you used LINEFEED, the cursor is located to the right
of the inserted word or word portion. UNDW. is the nokeypad definition for
UND W.
The delete word buffer is loaded by using DEL W or LINEFEED (CTRL/J,
F13—LK201). Each time you use DEL W or LINEFEED, the contents of the
delete word buffer are overwritten. The current contents of the buffer are the
most recently deleted word or word portion. When you use a repeat count
with a delete word function, only the last word or word portion deleted is
in the delete word buffer. If no word has been deleted thus far in your EDT
session, UND W inserts nothing.
EDT represents a line terminator as the character <CR> (CTRL/M, decimal
13) in all three of its delete entity buffers. Suppose you have a <CR>
character in the text you are deleting. When you undelete this text, EDT
changes the <CR> character into a line terminator and inserts the line
terminator in the current buffer.

EXAMPLE
Using DEL W and UND W, inserts the word PRINT at the beginning of lines
1, 2, and 3.
LETTER1.MEM
LETTER2.MEM
LETTER3.MEM
PRINT LETTER4.MEM
DEL W
UND W

(Move the cursor to the L in LETTER1.MEM.)
DEL W
UND W

+ m + IgoldI +

DEL W
UND W

I GOLD 1 + DEL W
UND W

+ ITI + IgoldI +

DEL W
UND W

IgoldI +

EDT—110

+ m

EDT Commands
UND W (Undelete Word) Function

PRINT LETTER1.MEM
PRINT LETTER2.MEM
PRINT LETTER3.MEM
PRINT LETTER4.MEM

related
commands

— Nokeypad—UNDW (undelete word)

EDT—111

EDT Commands
Up Arrow

Up Arrow—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

VT52:

UP
REPLACE

Pressing the Up Arrow key moves the cursor up one line toward the top of
the buffer regardless of EDT's direction. -V. is the nokeypad definition for Up
Arrow.
When you use the Up Arrow, EDT attempts to maintain the same vertical
column as it moves the cursor from one line to the next. If there are not
enough characters to fill out a line of text, the cursor moves to the end of
the short line. If you continue to use the Up Arrow, the cursor will return to
the same vertical column for all lines that have enough characters. However,
once you press some other key, EDT cancels the column position for the Up
Arrow and resets it the next time you use the function.

EXAMPLE
Moves the cursor from the end of the last line to the end of the first line.
La Paz, Bolivia
Lima, Peru
Montevideo, Uruguay
Parimaribo, Surinam
Quito, Ecuador
Santiago, Chile_

m
Quito, Ecuador
Santiago, Chile

□ + E
Montevideo, Uruguay
Parimaribo, Surinam
Quito, Ecuador

E + □
La Paz, Bolivia_
Lima, Peru
Montevideo, Uruguay

related
commands

EDT—112

— Nokeypad—Up Arrow

EDT Commands
WORD Function

WORD Function—Keypad
KEY
SEQUENCE

DESCRIPTION

VT100:

WORD
CHNGCASE

VT52:

WORD
CHNGCASE

Pressing WORD moves the cursor to the beginning of the next word in the
current direction (forward or backward, depending on whether ADVANCE
or BACKUP is in effect). W. is the nokeypad definition for WORD.
An EDT word is any group of characters bounded by a space, horizontal tab,
line feed <LF> , vertical tab <VT>, form feed <FF> , or carriage return
<CR> . You can establish different word boundaries with the line mode
SET ENTITY WORD command. Use the line mode SHOW ENTITY WORD
command to find the current boundary markers for the word entity.
The SET WORD [NOJDELIMITER command affects how EDT interprets
word boundaries. With SET WORD DELIMITER (the default) in effect, EDT
considers all word boundaries, except the space, as words themselves.

EXAMPLE
Moves the cursor four words to the right.
More and more businesses are using computers.
WORD
CHNGCASE

WORD
CHNGCASE

More and more businesses are using computers.

related
commands

— Nokeypad—W (word)

EDT—113

EDT Commands
/BRIEF Qualifier

/BRIEF Qualifier—Line
SYNTAX

/BRIEF[:n]

DESCRIPTION

The /BRIEF qualifier is used with the line mode SUBSTITUTE and TYPE
commands. All EDT qualifiers must be preceded with slashes.
/BRIEF instructs EDT to display only the first n characters of a line, instead
of the entire line. The default value for n is 10.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Instructs EDT to display only the first 15 characters of the line in which the
substitution took place.
3
4
5

Mr. Arlen J. Coolidge
3829 Gardner Avenue
Hollywood. FL 33021

♦SUBSTITUTE*J.*R.* /BRIEF:15
3
Mr. Arlen R. Co
1 substitution

example 2:

Instructs EDT to display only the first 10 characters of line 5.
3
4
5

Mr. Arlen R. Coolidge
3829 Gardner Avenue
Hollywood. FL 33021

♦TYPE 5 /BRIEF
5
Hollywood,

EDT—114

EDT Commands
buffer specifier

buffer specifier—Line
SYNTAX

buffer name
=buffer name
BUFFER buffer name

DESCRIPTION

The buffer specifier consists of two elements: (1) the signal to EDT that
the following characters are a buffer name and (2) the buffer name itself.
There are three syntax forms. The first syntax form does not have the signal
element and can be used only with the CLEAR command. You can use the
second and third forms— =buffer and BUFFER buffer—in all other line mode
commands that can take a buffer specifier.
The specifier buffer refers to the name of a location used by EDT to store
text during an editing session. When you begin your EDT session, a copy of
your file is put in the buffer called MAIN. EDT also creates a buffer called
PASTE for use with the CUT, PASTE, and APPEND commands. When you
exit from EDT using the EXIT command, a copy of the MAIN buffer text is
put in an external file. All other buffers created during your editing session
disappear. If you use QUIT to leave EDT, no copy of the MAIN buffer is
made.
You create additional buffers during an EDT session each time you specify
a new buffer name in a line or nokeypad command. For example, the
command FIND =LIST creates a buffer called LIST. There are no keypad
functions that create new buffers, but you can use line mode commands
while still in keypad mode to create new buffers or move from one buffer to
another.
The CLEAR command deletes buffers and their contents from your EDT
session. In the case of the MAIN and PASTE buffers, only the contents can
be deleted, not the buffers themselves. To delete only the contents of buffers
other than MAIN or PASTE, use the line mode DELETE command.
Buffer names can have more than 80 alphanumeric characters. Only letters,
digits, and the underscore character (_) can be used to create buffer names.
The first character in the name must always be a letter.
You can edit any buffer you create, as well as the MAIN and PASTE buffers.
Text can be copied or moved from one buffer to another. The SHOW
BUFFER command lists all the accessible buffers in your editing session and
indicates the current buffer by preceding the name with an equal sign (=).

EDT—115

EDT Commands
buffer specifier

EDT has several storage areas that you cannot access. These include the
delete character, delete line, delete word, search, and substitute buffers. The
first three are used only in keypad and nokeypad editing. These buffers
contain the most recent character, line, or word deleted by the respective
delete functions. The search buffer is used by the various find, substitute, and
change case functions. The substitute buffer is used only by substitute
commands. Storage areas also exist for entity and prompt definitions.
Although you have some control over what goes into these various buffers,
you cannot enter them or edit them, and their names never appear in the
SHOW BUFFER list.

EXAMPLES
Q

*FIND =ADDRESS1

Moves to the first line of buffer called ADDRESS 1. Displays nothing.
g

*COPY 10 THRU 100 TO =TEMP

Copies lines 10 through 100 in the current buffer to the buffer named TEMP
and moves to TEMP.
gj

*INCLUDE DISTLIST.DAT =DISTLIST
Copies the external file DISTLIST.DAT into the buffer called DISTLIST and
moves to that buffer.

*M0VE =H0LD 1 THRU 32 TO 88

Deletes lines 1 through 32 in the buffer HOLD and places them above line 88
in the current buffer.
E

*WRITE LETTER.RN0 BUFFER EXTRA

Copies the entire contents of the buffer EXTRA to the file LETTER.RNO. EDT
remains in the current buffer.
E

*CLEAR JUNK

Deletes the buffer called JUNK. If JUNK is the current buffer, EDT moves to
the MAIN buffer.

EDT—116

EDT Commands
CHANGE Command

CHANGE Command—Line
SYNTAX

CHANGE [=buffer][range][;nokeypad command(s)]

DESCRIPTION

The CHANGE command transfers your editing session from line mode to
keypad, nokeypad, or hardcopy change mode. The buffer and range specifiers
determine the cursor position when EDT finishes processing the CHANGE
command. The default cursor position is at the beginning of the current line
in the current buffer.
When the range specifier is a line number, the cursor appears at the beginning
of the line. If you use a string for the range specifier, EDT positions the cursor
on the character immediately following the string.
You can include nokeypad commands on the CHANGE command line
regardless of which change mode you are accessing. A semicolon (;) separates
the command word CHANGE and any location specifiers from the nokeypad
command(s).
The default mode with CHANGE is keypad for VT100 and VT52 terminals.
To go from line to keypad mode, simply issue the CHANGE command. To
use nokeypad mode, you must first give the SET NOKEYPAD command,
then the CHANGE command. Once SET NOKEYPAD is in effect, you must
use the SET KEYPAD command with the CHANGE command to enter
keypad mode. If your terminal's setting for EDT is hardcopy (HCPY), the
CHANGE command shifts EDT to hardcopy change mode.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Shifts to keypad mode after the EDT session starts off in line mode.
$ EDIT /EDT MEMO.RNO
1
.FILL.JUSTIFY
♦CHANGE
.FILL.JUSTIFY
.LEFT MARGINO
.RIGHT MARGIN70
.PAGE SIZE 58,70

example 2:

Shifts to nokeypad mode after the EDT session starts in line mode.
$ EDIT /EDT MEMO.RNO
1
.FILL.JUSTIFY
♦SET NOKEYPAD
♦CHANGE

EDT—117

EDT Commands
CHANGE Command

_FILL.JUSTIFY
.LEFT MARGINO
.RIGHT MARGIN70
PAGE SIZE 58,70

example 3:

Shifts to keypad mode and moves to the buffer TESTING.
♦CHANGE =TESTING

example 4:

Shifts to keypad mode and moves the cursor to the ninth line of the current
buffer.
♦CHANGE 9

example 5:

Shifts to keypad mode and moves the cursor to the beginning of the fourth
paragraph.
♦CHANGE ;3PAR

example 6:

Shifts to hardcopy change mode. Assumes that the terminal setting is
hardcopy (HCPY).
♦CHANGE
[.]FILL.JUSTIFY
C*

related
commands

EDT—118

- Keypad—CTRL/Z
— Nokeypad—EX (exit to line mode)

EDT Commands
CLEAR Command

CLEAR Command—Line
SYNTAX

CLEAR buffer

DESCRIPTION

The CLEAR command deletes the entire contents of the specified buffer. The
buffer name must be supplied, even if it is the current buffer. When CLEAR
deletes the buffer, it removes the buffer name from the list of active buffers
for your session. The MAIN and PASTE buffers are exceptions. You can
delete the contents of these buffers, but not their names and storage locations.
When you use CLEAR to delete the current buffer, EDT shifts to the most
recent current line in the MAIN buffer.
See the entry on the buffer specifier for more information on how EDT uses
buffers.

EXAMPLE
First deletes the contents and location of the current buffer named DISCARD.
Then deletes the contents of the PASTE buffer.
★SHOW BUFFER
=DISCARD
EXTRA
10
MAIN
256
PASTE
1

8
lines
lines
lines

lines

♦CLEAR DISCARD
♦SHOW BUFFER
EXTRA
=MAIN
PASTE

10
256
1

lines
lines
lines

♦CLEAR PASTE
♦SHOW BUFFER
EXTRA
=MAIN
PASTE

related
commands

10
256
No

lines
lines
lines

None,

EDT-119

EDT Commands
COPY Command

COPY Command—Line
SYNTAX

COPY [=buffer-1 ][range- 1]TO [=buffer-2][range-2]
//QUERY7/7DUPLICATE :n]

DESCRIPTION

The COPY command copies the text specified by location-1 (buffer-1 and/or
range-1) and places it directly above the line specified by location-2 (buffer-2
and/or range-2). No text is deleted. You can copy to and from different
buffers, creating new buffers as appropriate.
If location-1 is omitted, EDT copies the current line. When location-2 is
omitted, EDT inserts a copy of the text above the current line. Whenever
you omit the buffer specifier, EDT assumes the current buffer. If buffer-1 is
specified without a range-1 specifier, the entire contents of buffer-1 are copied
to location-2. If buffer-2 is specified without a range-2 specifier, a copy of the
text is inserted at the beginning of buffer-2.
Range-1 can refer to one or more lines in the buffer, but range-2 is limited
to a single line in the current or specified buffer. Remember to leave spaces
between the buffer name and any range specifier if one is used. Otherwise,
EDT might misinterpret the buffer name.
If you do not include a buffer-2 specifier, then EDT completes the COPY
command in the same buffer from which you issued the command. When
you do specify buffer-2, that buffer becomes the current buffer.
The /QUERY qualifier lets you verify each line to be copied to location2. EDT prompts you with a question mark (?) after displaying a line from
location-1 to determine whether you want to copy that line. There are four
responses to the question mark prompt: Y (YES), N (NO), A (ALL), and Q
(QUIT).

EXAMPLES
Q

*COPY 11 THRU 14 TO 45

Puts a copy of lines 11 through 14 above line 45.

*COPY =MAIN TO =OTHER

Puts a copy of the contents of the MAIN buffer into the buffer called OTHER.
If the OTHER buffer does not already exist, EDT creates it.
E

*C0PY 1 TO 8 /DUPLICATE:3

Puts three copies of line 1 above line 8.
E

COPY 4 THRU 7 TO END

Puts a copy of lines 4 through 7 in the current buffer after the last line of the
current buffer.

EDT—120

EDT Commands
COPY Command

*C0PY "Date" THRU "Dear Sir:"+1 TO =MAIN "Enclosed1

Puts a copy of the lines in the current buffer starting with the line containing
the word Date through the line following the line containing the words Dear
Sir: immediately above the line containing the word Enclosed, located in the
MAIN buffer.
g

*COPY 16 THRU 20 TO 58 /QUERY

Prints line 16 and then questions you to be sure you want to copy that line. If
the answer is Y (YES), line 16 is copied above line 58 and line 17 is displayed.
If the answer for line 16 is N (NO), line 16 is not copied; EDT moves to line
17 and displays it. If the answer for line 16 is A (ALL), lines 16 through
20 are copied to the location above line 58 without further prompts. If the
answer for line 16 is Q (QUIT), no lines are copied.
Q

*C0PY =ADDR 12 THRU 16 TO

Puts a copy of lines 12 through 16 from the buffer ADDR into the current
buffer immediately above the current line.
2

*C0PY =MAIN 9 THRU 47 TO =BR0WN 9

Puts a copy of lines 9 through 47 from the MAIN buffer into the buffer
named BROWN immediately above line 9 in that buffer. The new current
line is line 9 in the BROWN buffer.

related
commands

Keypad—CUT + PASTE [+ "move" ] + PASTE
Nokeypad—CUT + PASTE [+ "move" ] + PASTE

EDT—121

EDT Commands
CTRL/C (Control C) Function

CTRL/C (Control C) Function—Line
KEY
SEQUENCE
DESCRIPTION

CTRL/C

CTRL/C interrupts certain operations before EDT finishes processing them.
You can use CTRL/C to stop a runaway search through a long file or to stop
a long repeat count. CTRL/C halts certain EDT operations. For example, you
can use CTRL/C to stop EDT from printing a whole buffer when you have
used the line mode TYPE command to move to another buffer.
When EDT aborts the operation, it prints the message Aborted by CTRL/C.
If EDT cannot stop a particular process, it prints the message CTRL/C

ignored.

EXAMPLE
Stops EDT from printing the entire contents of the buffer DARCY_LET.
♦SHOW BUFFER
DARCY_LET
=MAIN
12
PASTE No

40
lines
lines

lines

♦TYPE =DARCY_LET
1
2
3
4
5
6

August 20,

1985

Mr. Charles R. Darcy
Production Manager
Midland Manufacturing Corporation
East St. Louis, IL 62202

ICTRL/C |

Aborted by CTRL/C

related
commands

EDT—122

- Keypad—CTRL/C
— Nokeypad—CTRL/C

EDT Commands
CTRL/R (Control R) Function

CTRL/R (Control R) Function—Line
GOLD/R
KEY
SEQUENCE
DESCRIPTION

CTRL/R

In line mode, CTRL/R refreshes the line you are currently typing. If you have
used the DELETE key several times to make corrections, you can use CTRL/R
to see the characters that are presently part of the line. After using CTRL/R,
EDT is still positioned on the line you were typing. You can continue typing
on that line or press RETURN to send the data to EDT.

EXAMPLE
Refreshes the command line to clear the deletions.
♦MOVE 1 THRU 10 TO =NAUB

♦MOVE 1 THRU 10 TO =NAUB\\\\

| CTRL/R |
♦MOVE 1 THRU 10 TO =NAUB\\\\
♦MOVE 1 THRU 10 TO =

related
commands

- Keypad—CTRL/R
— Nokeypad—REF (refresh)

EDT-123

EDT Commands
CTRL/Z (Control Z) Function

CTRL/Z (Control Z) Function—Line
KEY
SEQUENCE
DESCRIPTION

CTRL/Z

CTRL/Z performs the same function in line editing as it does in nokeypad
editing. (It has a different function in keypad editing.) You use CTRL/Z
to exit from the insert state. After you have given the appropriate insert
command and typed the text you want to add, use CTRL/Z to complete the
insert procedure. CTRL/Z is used with both the INSERT and REPLACE
commands in line mode and the I (insert) and R (replace) commands in
nokeypad mode.
Pressing CTRL/Z three times in succession has the same effect as the QUIT
/SAVE command.

EXAMPLE
In line mode, completes the insert operation and returns EDT to the command
state. Uses the TYPE command to display the first two lines in the buffer.
1

TO:

Kyle Carlson

♦INSERT
DATE:

March 31.

1986

1[CTRL/Z |

~Z
1

TO:

Kyle Carlson

♦TYPE 0 THRU 1
0.1
1

related
commands

EDT—124

DATE:
TO:

March 31. 1986
Kyle)Carlson

- Nokeypad—CTRL/Z

EDT Commands
DEFINE KEY Command

DEFINE KEY Command—Line
SYNTAX

DEFINE KEY [GOLD] keypad-key-number AS
"string].]"
DEFINE KEY GOLD character AS "string[.]"
DEFINE KEY [GOLD] CONTROL character AS
"string].]"
DEFINE KEY [GOLD] DELETE AS "stringf.]"
DEFINE KEY [GOLD] FUNCTION key-number AS
"string].]"

DESCRIPTION The DEFINE KEY command defines or redefines function keys used in keypad
editing. Key definitions are based on nokeypad commands.
Five types of keys can be defined or redefined:
•

A keypad key with or without GOLD

•

CONTROL with a keyboard character, with or without GOLD

All keypad keys can be defined.

EDT does not allow you to redefine CTRL/C. Some CONTROL character
combinations are system commands and therefore cannot be redefined.
These include O, P, Q, S, X, Y, and [.
•

GOLD with a keyboard character
GOLD can be used with any keyboard character except the digits 0
through 9 and the minus sign.

•

The DELETE key with or without GOLD
The DELETE key can be redefined by itself or with GOLD.

•

FUNCTION keys on the LK201 keyboard.
These include the six keys located above the arrow keys on the terminal's
"editing" keypad as well as keys F6 through F20 on the function key row
across the top of the keyboard.

EDT-125

EDT Commands
DEFINE KEY Command

When using the DEFINE KEY command you must type the words GOLD and
CONTROL in your commands. Pressing the GOLD or CTRL keys has no
effect in line mode. If you are redefining the DELETE key, you must type the
word DELETE. To redefine a function key on the LK201 keyboard, type the
word FUNCTION.
When you want to change the definition for the BACKSPACE, LINEFEED
or TAB key, you must redefine its CONTROL equivalent: CONTROL H for
BACKSPACE, CONTROL J for LINEFEED, and CONTROL I for TAB. For
terminals with LK201 keyboards, you can redefine the FI2 (BACKSPACE)
and FI 3 (LINEFEED) keys using their function numbers, FUNCTION 24 and
FUNCTION 25.

Keypad-key-number refers to EDT's numerical designations for the keypad
keys. For example, the period key on the keypad has number 16, the ENTER
key has number 21, and the down arrow key has number 13.
FUNCTION keys are the additional keys on the LK201 keyboard that you
can define. These include the six keys located above the arrow keys on
the "editing" keypad, as well as the keys on the function key row from F6
through F20. You cannot define keys FI through F5 on the function key
row. EDT uses its own numbers for these keys, ranging from FUNCTION 1
through FUNCTION 99, to encompass the special user defined keys (UDKs)
that are allowed on terminals with LK201 keyboards.

String is the key definition. Key definitions are composed of nokeypad
commands and specifiers. The definition for a single function key can contain
several nokeypad commands. An individual nokeypad command can be
separated from another nokeypad command with a space, for example 3W
4C 2DC. or +V BL
However, you cannot have spaces within a single
nokeypad command. (D3W is valid; D 3W is not.)
The optional period determines whether the defined function is automatically
processed by simply pressing the key or key sequence. If you omit the period,
EDT waits until it receives the ENTER signal before processing the function.
(The period [.] is the definition of ENTER.) Most preset key definitions end
with the period. The exceptions are GOLD and RESET, which are not
nokeypad commands. If you include the period in your definition, be sure to
use the keyboard period key, not the keypad one.
If your definition includes more than one nokeypad command, you might
want to enclose the definition in parentheses. The parentheses enable you
to use the keypad GOLD/repeat feature to process your function more than
once. If you try to use a repeat count on a multicommand definition with no
parentheses, EDT repeats only the first command. Be sure to put the period
outside the parentheses, though. For example, (BL V W DW). deletes the
second word in a line. You cannot use a repeat count with the nokeypad
EXT (extend) command.

EXAMPLES
Q

^DEFINE KEY 7 AS "+PAR."

Moves the cursor forward to the beginning of the next paragraph.
2

^DEFINE KEY CONTROL E AS "EXT EXIT."

Exits from EDT completely in one step, without having to press several keys
and type EXIT.

EDT—126

EDT Commands
DEFINE KEY Command

+DEFINE KEY GOLD P AS "CUTSR PASTE."

Deletes the select range and pastes it back in the same place, while retaining
a copy of the select range in the PASTE buffer for inserting elsewhere during
your editing session.
Q

^DEFINE KEY CONTROL A AS "CUTSR

PASTE I\&~Z."

Puts RUNOFF underline flags around a select range.
"IMrZ
EXT EXIT."
Inserts a mark (!!!) in your file and exits from EDT. The mark makes it easy
for you to find the place where you were last working.

^DEFINE KEY CONTROL V AS

^DEFINE KEY GOLD 3 AS "?'ENTER NOKEYPAD COMMAND:

'.»

Prompts the user with the message in single quotes. When you type the
nokeypad command(s) and press ENTER, EDT processes the command(s).
Q

+DEFINE KEY GOLD CONTROL B AS "(+V D-C irz.")

Instructs EDT to move down one line, delete the character preceding the
cursor, and then insert the vertical bar character. This can be used to draw
vertical lines in your text.
g

^DEFINE KEY 8 AS "+D"

Deletes the entity specified by the subsequent key pressed. For example, if
the word key is pressed after 8, the next word is deleted. The absence of the
period at the end of the definition means that nothing will happen when the
8 key is pressed by itself. The key pressed after the 8 will cause a change in
the text to occur.

related
commands

— Keypad—CTRL/K
— [Nokeypad—DEFK]

EDT—127

EDT Commands
DEFINE MACRO Command

DEFINE MACRO Command—Line
SYNTAX

DEFINE MACRO macro-name

DESCRIPTION

The DEFINE MACRO command is the part of EDT's macro facility that
enables you to create new line mode commands for the duration of your
editing session. When you issue the DEFINE MACRO command, EDT adds
the macro name to the list of valid line mode commands. The macro name
must be the same as the name of the buffer that contains the EDT macro.
When you issue the macro name as a line mode command, EDT performs all
the line mode commands that constitute the macro.
A macro is a group of one or more line mode commands that EDT performs
when you issue the macro name as a line mode command. Creating an EDT
macro takes several steps. Start by using the FIND commd to move to
the buffer with the macro name. Then insert the line mode command(s) that
constitute that macro. You can issue the DEFINE MACRO command either
before or after you put the macro text into its buffer. Once the macro text
has been entered into its buffer and you have issued the DEFINE MACRO
command, you are ready to use the macro name as a line mode command.
Macro names can be the same as existing EDT line mode commands, but
in those cases, EDT redefines the command to be that of the macro for the
remainder of the session or until the macro is deleted with the CLEAR
command. To delete a macro, simply use the macro name as the buffer
specifier with CLEAR.
A macro can be saved in an external file and copied into a buffer during
your editing session with the INCLUDE command. You can put a DEFINE
MACRO command in your startup command file, along with the text of the
macro and the necessary commands to create the macro.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Defines and creates a macro called FORM that activates three SET commands.
Then returns to the MAIN buffer.
♦DEFINE MACRO FORM
♦FIND =FORM
♦INSERT
SET TAB 5
SET ENTITY SENTENCE
SET WRAP 70
[CTRL/Z |
♦FIND =MAIN

EDT—128

EDT Commands
DEFINE MACRO Command

example 2:

Defines and creates a macro called MNH which inserts the text Merrimack,
NH 03054. Then returns to the MAIN buffer.
♦DEFINE MACRO MNH
♦FIND =MNH
♦INSERT
INSERT ;Merrimack. NH 03054
ICTRL/Z |
♦FIND =MAIN

example 3:

Shows the portion of a startup command file that contains line mode
commands to create a macro called MEMO. The MEMO macro inserts the
heading for a standard memo. The second FIND command at the end of the
example returns EDT to the MAIN buffer so you can begin to type the memo
text. Lines beginning with exclamation points are comments in the startup
command file. Note that the single-line form of the line mode INSERT
command must be used to create the macro text.
Creates the macro called MEMO, which contains
the heading for a standard memo.
1
FIND =MEM0
INSERT
INSERT
INSERT
INSERT
INSERT
INSERT DATE:
IERT; INSERT;
INSERT
INSERT TO:
INSERT
INSERT
INSERT
INSERT FROM:
INSERT
INSERT
INSERT
INSERT SUBJECT:
DEFINE MACRO MEMO
FIND =MAIN
|

!Moves to the macro buffer.
!Blank line
!Blank line
!Blank line
!Blank line
!Blank line
IMEMO is now a line mode command.
!Returns to the first line of MAIN

!End of macro

related
commands

None.

EDT—129

EDT Commands
DELETE Command

DELETE Command—Line
SYNTAX

DELETE [=buffer][range]//QUERY]

DESCRIPTION

The DELETE command deletes a line or group of lines, depending on the
range that you specify. If no buffer or range is specified, EDT deletes the
current line. When you use a buffer specifier but omit the range specifier,
EDT moves to that buffer and deletes its entire contents. Whenever you
include a buffer specifier, that buffer becomes the current buffer. When you
include a range specifier with the DELETE command, EDT deletes all the
lines included in that range.
The DELETE command always deletes entire lines, even if the range specifier
is a string. In that case, DELETE deletes the line(s) containing that string.
The /QUERY qualifier allows you to verify deletions line by line. When
/QUERY is in effect, EDT prints a line and then the question mark prompt (?)
to ask if you want that line deleted. The valid responses to the question mark
prompt are: Y (YES), N (NO), A (ALL), and Q (QUIT).

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Deletes the current line.
8

2:30

Meeting with Paul Jeffreys

★DELETE
1 line deleted
9
3:00 Party for Janice Kay.

example 2:

Uses the /QUERY qualifier to delete some, but not all, of the lines in the
range 1 through 5.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Calendar for Tuesday, Dec. 13
Staff Meeting 9:00 a.m., Glen Room
EDT Lecture, 11:00 a.m., Merrimack Auditorium
Luncheon Seminar, 12:00 noon, Hanover Room
Calendar for Wednesday, Dec.

★DELETE 1 THRU 5 /QUERY
Calendar for Tuesday, Dec. 13
1
? Y
Staff Meeting 9:00 a.m., Glen Room
2
? Y
EDT Lecture, 11:00 a.m., Merrimack Auditorium
3
? N
Luncheon Seminar, 12:00 noon, Hanover Room
4
? A
4 lines deleted
Calendar for Wednesday, Dec. 14
6

EDT—130

EDT Commands
DELETE Command

example 3:

Moves to the buffer ADDRS and deletes lines 1 through 4 in that buffer.
♦DELETE =ADDRS 1 THRU 4
4 lines deleted
5
Dr. Janet Townley

related
commands

- Keypad—DELL
— Nokeypad—DL (delete line)

EDT-131

EDT Commands
/DUPLICATE Qualifier

/DUPLICATE Qualifier—Line
SYNTAX

/DUPLICATE;/?

DESCRIPTION

/DUPLICATE is a qualifier used with the line mode COPY command. All
EDT qualifiers must be preceded by slashes. The /DUPLICATE qualifier
instructs EDT to copy the specified text n times above the location-2 specified
in the COPY command. You must supply a value for n between 1 and 32767.

EXAMPLE
Inserts five copies of line 3 above line 14.
♦COPY 3 TO 14 /DUPLICATE:5
1 line copied 5 times
♦TYPE 13 THRU 14
13
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
14

EDT—132

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

pkg.
pkg.
pkg.
pkg.
pkg.
pkg.
pkg.

#2
#3
#3
#3
#3
#3
#4

copper
copper
copper
copper
copper
copper
copper

tubing
tubing
tubing
tubing
tubing
tubing
tubing

EDT Commands
EXIT Command

EXIT Command—Line
SYNTAX

EXIT [file-specification]
[/SEQ.UENCE]: initial[: increment]]] [/SAVE]

DESCRIPTION

The EXIT command ends your editing session. EDT creates an external file
and copies the contents of the MAIN buffer into that file. When you type
EXIT with no file specification, EDT uses the file specification information
supplied in the EDIT/EDT command line. The file specification that you
supply with the EXIT command supersedes any output file specification given
in the EDIT/EDT command line. If the output file was only partially specified
in the EDIT/EDT command line or EXIT command, EDT uses the input file
name or file type in place of whichever item is missing.
If a directory name is included in the file specification, that directory must
already exist and you must have access to it. When you use the EXIT
command, EDT creates a file. However, EDT cannot create a directory.
The /SEQUENCE qualifier instructs EDT to retain the EDT line numbers
for use in subsequent editing sessions. Only whole numbers (that is, line
numbers with no decimals) can be used for the :initial and increment
specifiers. When /SEQUENCE is used with no specifiers, EDT attempts
to retain the existing line numbers insofar as it can. But all line numbers with
decimal fractions are adjusted to whole numbers.
The /SAVE qualifier tells EDT to save the copy of the journal file in the
current directory. The default journal file specification has the same file name
as the input file. .JOU is the default file type. Unless you use the /SAVE
qualifier in your EXIT command, EDT automatically deletes the journal
file when you issue the EXIT command. The journal file contains all the
keystrokes you made during the editing session. You can specify a different
journal file name in the EDIT/EDT command line.
The EXIT command tries to apply the attributes of the input file to the output
file it creates. If these attributes have been violated by any editing work done
during the session (for example, altering the length of a record in a fixed
length record file on some systems), EDT might not be able to finish copying
the MAIN buffer text into the output file. In these instances, EDT displays
the error detected by the appropriate file service and discontinues processing
the EXIT command. You can use the WRITE command to copy the text to an
external file, but the attributes of the input file are no longer preserved. The
WRITE command always creates an external file with EDT's default attributes.
(Then use the QUIT command to exit from EDT after you have issued the
WRITE command.)

EDT—133

EDT Commands
EXIT Command

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Shows the beginning and end of an EDT session. The input file is
WKREP25.RNO and the output file is WKREP25.RNO;2. The system
command DIRECTORY shows that both files exist in the directory after
the EXIT command is used.
$ EDIT /EDT WKREP25.RNO
1

.FILL.JUSTIFY

♦EXIT
DISK$USER:[SMITH:STATUS]WKREP25.RNO;2
$ DIRECTORY WKREP25.RNO
WKREP25.RNO;1

example 2:

63 lines

WKREP25.RNO;2

Shows the beginning and end of an EDT session. The input file is
LETTER.RNO;4 and the output file is SANCHEZ.RNO;l. The system
command DIRECTORY shows that both files exist in the directory after
the EXIT command is used.
$ EDIT /EDT LETTER.RNO;4
1
.FILL.JUSTIFY

♦EXIT SANCHEZ.RNO
DISK$USER:[MARSDEN.LETTERS]SANCHEZ.RNO;1 37 line
$

DIRECTORY

LETTER.RNO;4

SANCHEZ.RNO;1

example 3:

Shows the beginning and end of an EDT session. The input file is EOL.RNO
and the output file is ENDOFLINE.RNO. The /SAVE qualifier causes the
journal file to be saved so this editing work can be repeated with other files.
Uses the DCL DIRECTORY command to show the journal file.
$ EDIT /EDT EOL.RNO
1
.FILL.JUSTIFY.LEFT
♦SUBSTITUTE/GIN0/GIN10/
1
.FILL.JUSTIFY.LEFT
1 substitution
♦SUBSTITUTE/70/80/
1
.FILL.JUSTIFY.LEFT
1 substitution
♦INSERT ;.PAGE
1
.FILL.JUSTIFY.LEFT

MARGINO.RIGHT MARGIN70
MARGIN10.RIGHT MARGIN70

MARGIN10.RIGHT MARGIN80

♦EXIT ENDOFLINE.RNO /SAVE
DISK$USER:[SMITH.CHAPTER8]ENDOFLINE.RNO;1 54 lines
$ DIRECTORY ♦.JOU
EOL.JOU;1

EDT—134

EDT Commands
EXIT Command

related
commands

None.

EDT—135

EDT Commands
FILL Command

FILL Command—Line
SYNTAX

FILL [=buffer][range]

DESCRIPTION

Use the SHOW WRAP command to find the current wrap value or setting.
The fill process considers a blank line to be a break between paragraphs.
Even if there are spaces on the blank line, EDT fills the text up to the blank
line and then resumes filling with the next line that contains text.
If you do not specify a range or buffer with the FILL command, EDT assumes
that a select range has been established in one of the screen modes. If no
select range is active, EDT displays an error message.
If your SET SCREEN width is 80, EDT will fill lines to column 79; if your
SET SCREEN width is 132, EDT will fill lines to column 131.

EXAMPLE
Uses the SET WRAP command to limit the line length to 40 characters. Then
reformats lines 10 through 15.
10
11
12
13
14
15

With regard to your letter of January 4th,
I am unable to satisfy your need for terminals
that scroll sideways.
To the best of my knowledge,
no such terminals are available on today's market.
We do, however,
have an editor named EDT with this capability.

♦SET WRAP 40
♦FILL 10 THRU 15
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

EDT—136

With regard to your letter of January
4th, I am unable to satisfy your need
for terminals that scroll sideways.
To
the best of my knowledge, no such
terminals are available on today's
market. We do, however, have an editor
named EDT with this capability.

EDT Commands
FILL Command

related
commands

— Keypad—FILL
— Nokeypad—FILL

EDT-137

EDT Commands
FIND Command

FIND Command—Line
SYNTAX

FIND [=buffer][range]

DESCRIPTION

The FIND command moves EDT to a new position in the current buffer or
in the specified buffer. In line mode, once the specified line has been found,
EDT signals with the line mode prompt (*). The new current line is not
displayed at the terminal. (Use the TYPE command if you want to see the
line.)
If you use the FIND command from keypad or nokeypad mode, the cursor
moves to the first character of the specified line. If you use a string for range,
the cursor moves to the character to the right of the search string.
When FIND is used with a buffer specifier but no range specifier, EDT
positions itself at the first character of the specified buffer. When you use
both buffer and range specifiers, EDT positions itself at the line you specified
as the range in the specified buffer. Use a space to separate the buffer name
from the range specifier if the range specifier begins with a letter or digit (for
example, =PASTE 1). Otherwise, EDT will interpret the range as part of the
buffer name.
With the FIND command, you can search either forward or backward for a
string in the current buffer. To search backward toward the beginning of the
buffer, you must precede the search string with a minus sign (-). When you
use a line number as the range specifier, FIND will locate the line regardless
of direction.
If you use a string as the range specifier, you should be aware of how
EDT searches for a matching string in the text. EDT performs searches in
several ways. The default ways are GENERAL, BEGIN, and UNBOUNDED.
GENERAL means that EDT ignores the case and diacritical marks of letters
in performing searches. BEGIN means that EDT places the cursor on the
first character of the search string. UNBOUNDED means that EDT performs
the search on the portion of the buffer between the cursor position and the
beginning or end of the buffer, depending on the direction of the search. Use
the SET SEARCH command to change the way EDT performs searches. The
SHOW SEARCH command tells you which search parameters are currently
in effect. (BEGIN is applicable only in change mode.)
The FIND command is frequently used to move EDT from one buffer to
another. When you type FIND =buffer name, EDT moves to the first line
of the specified buffer. If that buffer does not already exist, EDT creates the
buffer.
You can use the period range specifier (.) to return to the last line you were
working on in a previously used buffer. For example, suppose 254.2 was
the last line EDT was at in the MAIN buffer. When you finish your editing
in the TEST buffer, type FIND =MAIN. to return to the MAIN buffer. EDT
positions itself at line 254.2 in the MAIN buffer. (You can place the period
immediately after the buffer name without confusing EDT, because periods
are not valid characters in buffer names.)

EDT—138

EDT Commands
FIND Command

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Moves EDT to line 15, but prints nothing. The new location is correct for the
SUBSTITUTE command.
11

In regard to your letter of the 24th, we are planning

♦FIND 15
♦SUBSTITUTE/December/January/
15
I will be flying to Denver on January 15th, arriving at
1 substitution

example 2:

Moves EDT to the next line containing the string Bob but prints nothing. The
new location is correct for the SUBSTITUTE command.
♦FIND "Bob"
♦SUBSTITUTE/Bob/Harry/
21
with Harry at the next Board of Directors Meeting.
1 substitution

example 3:

Moves to the end of the buffer so that you can insert a new line at the end of
the text.
♦FIND END
♦INSERT; cc:
[EOB]

John C. Fredericks

example 4:

Moves to the buffer named LIST but prints nothing. The TYPE command
simply verifies the new location.
♦FIND =LIST
♦TYPE .
1

related
commands

Distribution List for File Copies

- Keypad—FIND
— Nokeypad—"string"

EDT—139

EDT Commands
HELP Command

HELP Command—Line
SYNTAX

HELP [topic [subtopic [subsubtopic]]]

DESCRIPTION

The HELP command puts you in touch with EDT's HELP facility. When you
type HELP by itself, EDT prints general information and instructions on how
to get help for a specific topic. To get information on subtopics, you must
type the name of the topic and then the name of the subtopic, for example,
HELP EXIT /SAVE. Using the HELP facility has no effect on your editing
session.
You can access the HELP file any time you see the line mode asterisk prompt
(*). You can also access the information directly from keypad mode by using
the COMMAND function or from nokeypad mode by using the EXT (extend)
command.
HELP for nokeypad commands is available through the line mode HELP
command. Type HELP CHANGE for information on nokeypad syntax and
the list of subtopics. To get information on nokeypad commands, type HELP
CHANGE SUBCOMMANDS.
If you have access to more than one HELP file, use the SET HELP command
to change HELP files. The SHOW HELP command prints the name of the
HELP file that is currently available for your editing session.

EXAMPLES
Q

*.HELP JOURNAL

Prints information on EDT's journal facility.
Q

* HELP CHANGE HARDCOPY

Prints information on hardcopy change mode.
gj

*HELP DEFINE KEY VT100

Prints the keypad key number chart for VT100 terminals. These key numbers
are used with the DEFINE KEY and SHOW KEY commands.
0

*.HELP RESEQUENCE /SEQUENCE

Prints information on the /SEQUENCE qualifier when used with the
RESEQUENCE command.
E

* HELP CHANGE SUBCOMMANDS

Prints general information on nokeypad commands.
E

*:help change subcommands tadj

Prints information on the nokeypad command TADJ.

related
commands

EDT—140

— Keypad—HELP

EDT Commands
INCLUDE Command

INCLUDE Command—Line
SYNTAX

INCLUDE file-specification [=buffer][range]

DESCRIPTION

The INCLUDE command copies external files into an EDT text buffer. In line
mode, EDT displays its asterisk prompt (*) when the INCLUDE command has
finished copying the file. If you use the INCLUDE command from keypad or
nokeypad mode, the included text appears on the screen.
The file specification is the name of the file you want to include in the
specified text buffer. If the file name is omitted, EDT assumes the same name
as the input file. Similarly, if the file type is omitted, EDT assumes the same
file type as the input file. However, you must include some element of the
file specification in the command line.
If no buffer is specified, the file is added to the current buffer. The range
specifier refers to a single line. EDT puts the new text above the range line.
If you omit the range specifier, EDT puts the text above the current line or at
the top of the specified buffer. EDT assigns appropriate numbers to the new
lines that are added to the buffer. If there are any sequence numbers stored
with the included file, EDT ignores them.

EXAMPLES
Q

^INCLUDE LIST.DAT

EDT places a copy of the file LIST.DAT in the current buffer immediately
above the current line.
2

* INCLUDE ADDR.DAT =ADDRESS

EDT places a copy of the file ADDR.DAT at the top of the buffer ADDRESS.
If no buffer named ADDRESS exists, EDT creates one.
B

* INCLUDE [JACKSON]MEM035.RN0 12

EDT places a copy of the file MEM035.RN0 from the directory JACKSON in
the current buffer immediately above line 12.
□

* INCLUDE EXTRAPAR.X =MAIN 58

EDT places a copy of the file EXTRAPAR.X in the MAIN buffer immediately
above line 58.

related
commands

None.

EDT—141

EDT Commands
INSERT Command

INSERT Command—Line
SYNTAX

INSERT [=buffer] [range] ;line-to-be-inserted
INSERT [=buffer] [range] RETURN text CTRL/Z

DESCRIPTION

The INSERT command is used to add text to the current buffer or to another
buffer, if one is specified. Text is always inserted above the line specified by
range, above the current line if you omit the range specifier, or at the top of
the specified buffer if only a buffer name is supplied.
To insert a single line of text, you can type INSERT, followed optionally by
a buffer and/or range specifier, then a semicolon (;), and finally the text to
be inserted. You must press RETURN to process the one-line insert. If the
semicolon is omitted, EDT prints an error message. To see the line you have
just inserted you can use the TYPE command with -1 for the range specifier.
To insert one or more lines, type INSERT, followed optionally by a buffer and
/or range specifier, and press RETURN. EDT is now in the insert state. You
can type as many lines as you want. EDT assigns ascending line numbers to
the new lines. When you have finished typing the text, press CTRL/Z to exit
from the insert state.
If you use a buffer specifier with your INSERT command, EDT moves to the
named buffer and remains there after you have finished inserting the text.
You must use the FIND command to return to the buffer where you were
previously editing.
Only the INSERT ;line-to-be-entered form of the command can be used
in startup command files or EDT macros. To insert several lines of text in a
startup command file or EDT macro, put INSERT[SP]; before each text line.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Adds the telephone number line after the last line of the address. Uses PE
to show the newly inserted line.
2

South Bend.

♦INSERT 3 ;(219) 555-1234
3
♦TYPE -1
2.1

EDT—142

(219) 555-1234

46628

EDT Commands
INSERT Command

example 2:

Moves to the buffer ADDRESS and inserts an address. Then uses FIND to
return to the MAIN buffer.
♦ INSERT = ADDRESS 1 RETURN |
Dr. James Grogan
Charlotte Professional Building
Suite 12A
Charlotte, NC 28202
[CTRL/z|
[EOB]
♦FIND =MAIN

related
commands

— Nokeypad—I

EDT—143

EDT Commands
MOVE Command

MOVE Command—Line
SYNTAX

MOVE

DESCRIPTION

The MOVE command moves the line(s) specified by location-1 (buffer-1
and/or range-1) to location-2 (buffer-2 and/or range-2). The lines specified
in location-1 are deleted from their original position and inserted at the new
location. Use the COPY command if you want to have the text appear in
both places.

buffer-1 ] [range- 1]TO [=buffer-2] [range-2]
//query;

If location-1 is omitted, EDT moves the current line. When location-2 is
omitted, EDT inserts the text above the current line. Whenever you omit
the buffer specifier, EDT assumes the current buffer. If buffer-1 is specified
without a range-1 specifier, the entire contents of buffer-1 are moved to
location-2. If buffer-2 is specified without a range-2 specifier, the text is
inserted at the beginning of buffer-2.
Range-1 can refer to one or more lines in the buffer, but range-2 is limited
to a single line in the current or specified buffer. Remember to leave spaces
between the buffer name and any range specifier if one is used. Otherwise,
EDT might misinterpret the buffer name.
If you do not include a buffer-2 specifier, then EDT completes the MOVE
command in the same buffer from which you issued the command. When
you do specify buffer-2, that buffer becomes the current buffer.
The /QUERY qualifier allows you to make decisions during the MOVE
operation. EDT prints out each line in range-1 and prompts you with a
question mark (?) so that you can decide whether you want to move that
line. The four valid responses are: Y (YES), N (NO), A (ALL), and Q (QUIT).

EXAMPLES
Q

*MOVE 5 TO 15

Moves line 5 in the current buffer to be above line 15, also in the current
buffer.

*MOVE =PAGE7 TO 198

Moves the entire contents of the buffer PAGE7 to be above line 198 in the
current buffer.
E

*MOVE =ADDRESS 1 THRU 5 TO

Moves lines 1 through 5 in the buffer ADDRESS to be above the current line
in the current buffer.
Q

*MOVE 38 THRU 94 TO =SECTI0N1

Moves lines 38 through 94 in the current buffer to be at the beginning of the
buffer SECTION1. If no buffer named SECTION 1 exists, EDT creates it.

EDT—144

EDT Commands
MOVE Command

*M0VE TO =MAIN 26

Moves the current line in the current buffer to be above line 26 in the MAIN
buffer.

related
commands

— Keypad—CUT [+ "move" ] + PASTE
- Nokeypad—CUT [+ "move" ] + PASTE

EDT—145

EDT Commands
NEXT Command

NEXT Command—Line
SYNTAX

[SUBSTITUTE] N EXT[/[string-1 ]/string-2/]

DESCRIPTION See SUBSTITUTE next.

EDT—146

EDT Commands
/NOTYPE Qualifier

/NOTYPE Qualifier—Line
SYNTAX

/NOTYPE

DESCRIPTION

The /NOTYPE qualifier, which is used only with the line mode
SUBSTITUTE command, instructs EDT not to display the lines in which
substitutions have been made. EDT displays only the message giving the
number of substitutions. Always precede an EDT qualifier with a slash.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Instructs EDT not to display the lines in which substitutions occurred.
★SUBSTITUTE/chairman/Chairperson/ WHOLE /NOTYPE
14 substitutions

example 2:

Instructs EDT not to display the lines in which substitutions occurred.
★SUBSTITUTE*input/output*I/O*
7 substitutions

. THRU +20 /NOTYPE

EDT—147

EDT Commands
< null> Command

< null

Command—Line

SYNTAX

[=buffer] [[%]range]

DESCRIPTION

The <null> command causes EDT to display the specified text. This
command consists only of optional specifiers; there is no command word
to type. If you omit both the buffer and range specifiers, the command
simply consists of pressing the RETURN key in response to the asterisk
prompt. In that case, EDT displays the next line in the current buffer.
The effect of the <null> command is the same as that of the TYPE
command. For this reason the <null> command is referred to as the
"implied TYPE" command.
When you include a buffer specifier, EDT moves to that buffer. If you do
not specify a range, EDT displays every line in the buffer. Otherwise, EDT
displays only the lines specified by range. When you move from one buffer
to another, you can return to the same position in a previous buffer by using
the period specifier (.) after the buffer name. For example, the command
=MAIN[SP]. moves EDT back to the MAIN buffer on line 37.21 if 37.21 was
the most recent current line in MAIN.
After EDT displays the specified lines, it positions itself at the first line of the
range or buffer, not at the end.
When you specify certain ranges, there are some differences between the
TYPE command and the <null> command. Range specifiers that begin
with letters—ALL, BEGIN, END, LAST, and REST—must be preceded by a
percent sign (%) when they are the first element of a <null> command. If
the percent sign is omitted, EDT tries to interpret the word as a command or
macro name and returns an error message.
The <null> command takes no qualifiers. You can use the /BRIEF and
/STAY qualifiers with the TYPE command.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Causes EDT to display lines 2 through 4.
1
2
3
4
5
6

This
This
This
This
This
This

is
is
is
is
is
is

the
the
the
the
the
the

first line in the MAIN buffer,
second line in the MAIN buffer
third line in the MAIN buffer,
fourth line in the MAIN buffer
fifth line in the MAIN buffer,
sixth line in the MAIN buffer.

*2 THRU 4
2
3
4

EDT—148

This is the second line in the MAIN buffer,
This is the third line in the MAIN buffer,
This is the fourth line in the MAIN buffer.

EDT Commands
< null> Command

example 2:

Causes EDT to display the line below the current line.
♦+i
3

example 3:

This is the third line in the MAIN buffer.

Causes EDT to display the first line of the buffer.
♦‘/.BEGIN
1

example 4:

This is the first line in the MAIN buffer.

Causes EDT to display the third line after the current line.
♦ +3
4

example 5:

This is the fourth line in the MAIN buffer.

Causes EDT to display the next line after the current line when no specifier is
supplied.
*| RETURN|
5

example 6:

This is the fifth line in the MAIN buffer.

Causes EDT to display the line two lines above the current line.
♦ -2
3

example 7:

This is the third line in the MAIN buffer.

Causes EDT to display all remaining lines in the buffer starting with the
current line.
♦‘/.REST
3
4
5
6
[EOB]

example 8:

This
This
This
This

is
is
is
is

the
the
the
the

third line in the MAIN buffer.
fourth line in the MAIN buffer.
fifth line in the MAIN buffer.
sixth line in the MAIN buffer.

Moves to the PASTE buffer and causes EDT to display the entire contents of
that buffer.
*=PASTE
1
2
[EOB]

example 9:

This is the first line in the PASTE buffer.
This is the last line in the PASTE buffer.

Moves to the buffer MEMO and displays lines 17 through 42.
♦=MEMO 17 THRU 42

EDT-149

EDT Commands
< null> Command

related
commands

EDT—150

17
18

after the product has been thoroughly tested.

41
42

Please notify me of any changes in your schedule
as soon as you become aware of them.

None,

EDT Commands
PRINT Command

PRINT Command—Line
SYNTAX

PRINT file-specification[=buffer][range]

DESCRIPTION

The PRINT command puts a copy of the specified range or buffer in an
external file in the current or specified directory. EDT adds a form feed and
two blank lines for every 60 lines it copies to the external file. Also, the
EDT line numbers become part of the text in the external file. EDT does
not resequence the lines when it processes the PRINT command. The line
numbers remain exactly as they were before you issued the PRINT command.
When you specify neither range nor buffer, the entire current buffer is copied.
If you give only a buffer name with no range, EDT copies the entire contents
of the specified buffer, but does not move to that buffer. Instead, EDT remains
in the buffer from which you issued the PRINT command.
Nonprinting characters are shown in the external file as EDT displays them,
for example, <ESC> for the escape character (decimal value 27) and
for
the null character (decimal value 0).
If you include a directory name in the file specification, that directory must
exist and you must have access to it. When you use the PRINT command,
EDT creates a file, but EDT cannot create a directory.
The line numbers that appear in a file created by the PRINT command are
different from those created by the WRITE command with the /SEQUENCE
qualifier.

EXAMPLES
□

* PRINT MEM01.RN0

Copies the entire current buffer to the file MEMOl.RNO.
S

*PRINT [JONES.STATUS]WEEK43 12 THRU END

Copies the current buffer, starting with line 12, to the file WEEK43 in the
subdirectory JONES.STATUS.
E

*PRINT ADDRESS.DAT =HEADING

* PRINT LETTER1.RNO =B0DY 7 THRU 56

Copies the contents of the buffer HEADING to the file ADDRESS.DAT.
Copies lines 7 through 56 from the buffer BODY to the file LETTER1.RNO.

related
commands

None,

EDT—151

EDT Commands
/QUERY Qualifier

/QUERY Qualifier—Line
SYNTAX

/QUERY

DESCRIPTION

The /QUERY qualifier gives you control over the processing of four
commands: COPY, DELETE, MOVE, and SUBSTITUTE. Use the /QUERY
qualifier when you are performing one of the four operations on a range of
lines, but do not want every line in the range to be affected by the command.
Always precede an EDT qualifier with a slash.
When you include the /QUERY qualifier in a command line, EDT prompts
you for each line in the range before any action is taken. EDT prints the
line and then displays the question mark prompt (?) so that you can decide
whether to have EDT perform the command for that line, skip the operation
for that line, process the command for all remaining lines in the range, or
stop processing the command at that line.
The four responses to the question mark prompt are:

(YES)

Perform the command on this line.

(NO)

Do not perform the command on this line.

(ALL)

Perform the command on all remaining lines in the range.

(QUIT)

Stop performing the command at this line. The remaining lines in the
range will not be affected.

When you use the /QUERY qualifier with the SUBSTITUTE command, it
might seem that there are four delimiters on the command line.
SUBSTITUTE/1984/1985/ WHOLE /QUERY

The slash before the word QUERY is the qualifier signal, not a delimiter.
If you use a different delimiter for the substitute strings, you can see the
distinction:
SUBSTITUTE*1984*1985* WHOLE /QUERY

EXAMPLE
Prompts you to find out which lines in the range 5 through 9 you want to
delete. The TYPE command shows which lines in the range 4 through 10
remain in the buffer.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

EDT—152

Jacksonville, FL
Huntsville, AL
Thomasville, GA
Potsdam, NY
Grand Forks, ND
Missoula, MT
Eugene, OR

8
Grand Forks, ND
?A
4 lines deleted
10
Eugene, OR
♦TYPE 4 THRU 10
4
6
10

Jacksonville, FL
Thomasville, GA
Eugene, OR

EDT Commands
QUIT Command

QUIT Command—Line
SYNTAX

QUIT [/SAVE]

DESCRIPTION

The QUIT command ends an EDT session without copying any text to an
external file. Only a copy of the original file as it was before you started your
EDT session exists. There is no copy of the edited text. If you use EDT to
create a new file and you type QUIT to end your editing session, no copy
of the text will exist in any directory. Use the EXIT command to preserve a
copy of the MAIN buffer text in an external file.
If you use the /SAVE qualifier with QUIT, EDT saves the journal file from
your editing session. You might want to do this if your text has become
confused or if you have accidentally deleted some text that you want to
recover. First, use QUIT/SAVE to end your editing session. Then using EDT,
delete the last few commands from the journal file. To resume your work,
use the /RECOVER qualifier with your EDIT/EDT command to restore your
editing work up to the point where the problem occurred.
Pressing CTRL/Z three times in a row has the same effect as issuing the
QUIT/SAVE command.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Ends your EDT session without copying the MAIN buffer contents to an
external file. Only the system prompt appears.
♦QUIT
$

example 2:

Lists the files in the directory. Then starts an EDT session, but ends it
with QUIT/SAVE to retain the journal file. A second system DIRECTORY
command shows the journal file (CHAPTER1.JOU) in the directory.
$ DIRECTORY
CHAPTER1.RNO;2

CHAPTER1.RNO;1

$ EDIT /EDT CHAPTER1.RNO

♦QUIT/SAVE
$ DIRECTORY
CHAPTER1.JOU;1

related
commands

EDT—154

CHAPTER1.RNO;2

— Nokeypad—QUIT

CHAPTER1.RNO;1

EDT Commands
range specifier

range specifier—Line
SYNTAX

range-indicator

DESCRIPTION

The range specifier is used with these line mode commands:
CHANGE

<null>

COPY

DELETE

REPLACE

FIND

RESEQUENCE

INCLUDE

SUBSTITUTE

INSERT

TYPE

MOVE

WRITE

The range specifier can reference one line or a group of lines depending on
your needs or the command with which you use the range.
There are a number of ways to indicate a range. Some of the more common
ones are listed here. When you use the string specifier with most line mode
commands, EDT considers that you are referencing the entire line. For
example, if you issue the command DELETE "string" , EDT deletes the entire
line that contains the quoted string.
EDT keeps track of the string location when you use a string specifier with
a command like FIND or TYPE. By remembering the position of the string,
EDT allows you to locate the next occurrence of that string.

Range

Description

. (period)

The current line.

number

The exact line number, for example, 95.31.

range THRU range
range:range

The lines starting at the first range indicator and
continuing through the second range indicator.

WHOLE

Every line in the buffer.

BEGIN

The top of the buffer.

END

The bottom of the buffer.

BEFORE

The first line in the current buffer through the line
above the current line.

REST

The current line in the current buffer through the last
line in the buffer.

SELECT

The active select range established by the keypad
SELECT function or the nokeypad SEL, SSEL, or
TGSEL command. The select range can include only
whole lines.

EDT—155

EDT Commands
range specifier

Range

Description

“string"
'string'

A string of characters located on or after the current
line.

-“string"
-'string'

A string located before the current line

The number of lines below the current line; for
example, +3 is the third line below the current one.

-n

The number of lines above the current line; for
example, -10 is the tenth line above the current one.

When a string is used for the range specifier, it must be surrounded by either
single (') or double (") quotation marks. When the first element of the
<null> command is a word range specifier such as BEGIN, END, BEFORE,
REST, and WHOLE it must be preceded with a percent sign (%) to indicate to
EDT that it is not a command or an EDT macro.

EXAMPLES
□
Types the current line.
2

♦CHANGE "page"

Shifts to a change mode and puts the cursor to the right of the next
occurrence of the word page.

♦DELETE 25 THRU END

Deletes lines, starting with 25, through the end of the buffer.

□

♦FIND =PASTE 23

Moves to line 23 in the PASTE buffer.

♦•/.REST

Displays the remaining lines in the current buffer, starting with the current
line.

♦WRITE OUTFILE.DAT .

THRU +10

Creates a file called OUTFILE.DAT and copies 11 lines into it, starting with
the current line and ending with the tenth line after the current line.

♦RESEQUENCE 25 -5 THRU 30 /SEQUENCE:100

Resequences the lines starting with five lines before line number 25 and
continuing through line number 30 or as far as is necessary to maintain
ascending line numbers. Assigns the number 100 to the first line in the range.
Then increments the line numbers by 1.

♦WRITE LETTER1A.RN0 "In response" THRU "cc:

David North"

Creates a file called LETTER1A.RNO and puts into it a copy of the lines
starting with the one containing the string In response through the one with
the string cc: David North.

EDT—156

EDT Commands
REPLACE Command

REPLACE Command—Line
SYNTAX

REP LAC E /=buffer] [range] [;line to be inserted]
REPLACE [=buffer] [range] RETURN text CTRL/Z

DESCRIPTION

The REPLACE command deletes the line(s) specified by range from the
current or specified buffer. EDT then replaces the deleted line(s) with text
that you enter at the terminal. There are two ways to enter new text: 1) on
the same line as the REPLACE command, or 2) through the insert state.
If the text to be entered does not contain any line terminators, it can be
typed on the same line as the REPLACE command. Separate the text from
the command with a semicolon (;). When you press RETURN, the line or
lines specified by range are deleted and replaced by the text following the
semicolon.
To replace the deleted text with one or more lines, press RETURN after typing
the REPLACE command. EDT shifts to the insert state as soon as it deletes
the specified lines. Use CTRL/Z to exit from the insert state when you have
finished entering the new text.
Only the single line form of the REPLACE command can be used in startup
command files or EDT macros.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Using the single line form of the REPLACE command, deletes line 3 and
replaces it with new text. The TYPE command verifies that the new line has
been entered.
1
2
3
4

Mr. Theodore R. Swenson
34 North Main Street
Londonderry, NH 03053
(603) 555-1234

♦REPLACE "London" ;Derry, NH
1 line deleted
4
(603) 555-1234
♦TYPE -1
3

example 2:

Derry, NH

03038

Deletes line 7 and inserts new text. The TYPE command verifies the new text.
6
7

Robert Harrison
John Barber

♦ REPLACE 7 I RETURN 1
1 line deleted

EDT—157

EDT Commands
REPLACE Command

Marjorie Dickerson
James Newbold
Dorothy Urquart
Faith Jaspersen
ICTRL/Zj

William Wetherall

♦TYPE 6 THRU 8
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
8

example 3:

Robert Harrison
Marjorie Dickerson
James Newbold
Dorothy Urquart
Faith Jaspersen
William Wetherall

Using the single line form of the REPLACE command, moves to the buffer
HEADING and replaces the first line with new text. Verifies the new text
with the TYPE command.
(These are the contents of the buffer HEADING.)
1
2
3

DATE:
TO:
FROM:

July 8. 1985
Sam Hill
John Archer

(The REPLACE command is typed from the MAIN buffer.)
♦REPLACE =HEADING 1;DATE:
1 line deleted

related
commands

August 20, 1985

TO:

Sam Hill

♦TYPE 1
1

DATE:

August 20, 1985

— Keypad—REPLACE
— Nokeypad—R (replace)

EDT Commands
RESEQUENCE Command

RESEQUENCE Command—Line
SYNTAX

RESEQUENCE [=buffer] [range]
[/SEQUENCE]: initial]: increment] ] ]

DESCRIPTION The RESEQUENCE command assigns new EDT line numbers to the lines

of the current buffer or the specified buffer. If you use the buffer specifier
without a range specifier, EDT renumbers the entire buffer. If a range is
given, the lines within that range must be contiguous.
When RESEQUENCE is used without the /SEQUENCE qualifier, EDT uses
the value 1 for both of the /SEQUENCE specifiers—initial and increment.
You get the same results if you use RESEQUENCE /SEQUENCE with no
:initial and increment specifiers. You can omit the /SEQUENCE qualifier and
its specifiers only when you are renumbering an entire buffer or when the
line specified by range has a number less than or equal to 1.
After EDT renumbers your text, it prints the number of lines that have been
resequenced. This number reflects the actual number of lines that EDT had to
resequence in order to avoid duplicating or overlapping line numbers.

EXAMPLES
□

+RESEQUENCE
♦RESEQUENCE /SEQUENCE
♦RESEQUENCE /SEQUENCE:1:1

All three commands resequence the entire current buffer using default
increment and initial values of :1:1.
0

♦RESEQUENCE =BUFF3

Resequences all of buffer BUFF3 using the default values :1:1.

*RESEQUENCE /SEQUENCE:100:10

Resequences the entire current buffer, starting with an initial line number of
100 and using increments of 10.
Q

♦RESEQUENCE =LIST 5 THRU END /SEQUENCE:10:10

Moves to the buffer LIST and resequences it, starting at line 5. Assigns the
initial value of 10 to line 5 and then increments the successive line numbers
by 10.

related
commands

None,

EDT—159

EDT Commands
/SAVE Qualifier

/SAVE Qualifier—Line
SYNTAX

/SAVE

DESCRIPTION

The /SAVE qualifier instructs EDT to save a copy of the journal file in the
current directory. The journal file contains a record of all the keystrokes you
have made during the current EDT session.
/SAVE is used with the line mode commands EXIT and QUIT. When a
normal exit is made from EDT, whether by means of EXIT or QUIT, EDT
discards the journal file. The /SAVE qualifier causes the journal file to
be saved in your current directory. The journal file is automatically saved
whenever your editing session ends abnormally.
All EDT qualifiers must be preceded by slashes.

EXAMPLES
□

*EXIT /SAVE

Exits from EDT, saving a copy of the MAIN buffer as well as the journal file.
$ EDIT /EDT LIST.DAT

♦EXIT NEWLIST.DAT /SAVE

Exits from EDT, saving a copy of the MAIN buffer in a file called
NEWLIST.DAT. The journal file is called LIST.JOU.

*QUIT /SAVE

Exits from EDT without saving a copy of the MAIN buffer. Only the journal
file is saved.

EDT—160

EDT Commands
/SEQUENCE Qualifier

/SEQUENCE Qualifier—Line
SYNTAX

/SEQUENCE/": initialf: increment]]

DESCRIPTION

The /SEQUENCE qualifier is used with the line mode commands EXIT,
RESEQUENCE, and WRITE. Using the /SEQUENCE qualifier enables you
to renumber the EDT line numbers for a block of lines. With the EXIT and
WRITE commands, the /SEQUENCE qualifier causes sequence numbers to be
written to the external file created by those commands.
With the RESEQUENCE command, the initial specifier is the line number
you want assigned to the first line of the specified buffer or range. The
default value for initial is 1. The increment specifier refers to the spacing
you want between the numbers in the new sequence. The default value for
increment is also 1. You must include the rinitial specifier if you want to use
increment.
When you use the /SEQUENCE qualifier with EXIT or WRITE, the default
values for initial and increment are different. The default values are the
current EDT line numbers for the block of lines being copied to the external
file. However, line numbers with decimal fractions cannot be stored in a
sequenced file, so EDT must adjust any decimal line numbers to be whole
numbers when you use the /SEQUENCE qualifier with no specifiers.
All EDT qualifiers must be preceded by slashes.

EXAMPLES
Q

*RESEQUENCE
♦RESEQUENCE /SEQUENCE
♦RESEQUENCE /SEQUENCE:1:1

All of these RESEQUENCE commands renumber the entire current buffer
starting with 1 and incrementing by 1.
E

♦EXIT /SEQUENCE:100:10

Exits from EDT. The output file has sequence numbers that start at 100 and
increase by 10.
E

♦WRITE LIST.DAT 25 THRU END /SEQUENCE:10:5

Writes a copy of lines 25 through the end of your current buffer to an external
file called LIST.DAT. The file has sequence numbers starting at 10 for line 25
in the current buffer and incrementing by 5.

EDT—161

EDT Commands
SET [NO]AUTOREPEAT Command

SET [NO]AUTOREPEAT Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET AUTOREPEAT
SET NOAUTOREPEAT

DESCRIPTION

The SET AUTOREPEAT command enables EDT to use the DECARM VT100
control sequence to prevent keypad keys (including arrow keys) from
repeating faster than EDT can update the screen. SET AUTOREPEAT is
the default.
On some VTlOO-type terminals, SET AUTOREPEAT causes the arrow keys
to repeat very slowly (approximately .5 seconds for each repeated use). With
SET NOAUTOREPEAT, the arrow keys repeat faster because EDT does not
use the DECARM control sequence. If EDT gets behind, it simply skips
intermediate screen updates.
Occasionally, on the VT100 terminal with printer port (but not on the VT102,
which has an integrated printer port), use of SET NOAUTOREPEAT causes
the terminal to stop transmission. If this occurs, press the SET-UP key
(located at the upper lefthand comer of the keyboard) twice to clear the
keyboard buffer.
SET [NO]AUTOREPEAT has no effect on the keypad mode GOLD/repeat
feature or on the SPECINS function. These operations are affected by SET
[NO]REPEAT.

EXAMPLE
Changes the default SET AUTOREPEAT setting to SET NOAUTOREPEAT.
•SET NOAUTOREPEAT

related
commands

EDT—162

None.

EDT Commands
SET CASE Command

SET CASE Command—Line
SYNTAX

SETCASE NONE
SET CASE LOWER
SET CASE UPPER

DESCRIPTION

The SET CASE command is useful when you are reading text which has
both upper- and lowercase letters at a single-case terminal. The SET CASE
command uses flags to distinguish lowercase letters from uppercase ones.
If you use SET CASE UPPER, each uppercase letter in the original file is
preceded by an apostrophe ('). When you specify SET CASE LOWER, each
lowercase letter in the original file is marked by an apostrophe. The flags
appear only when the text is displayed at a terminal under line mode. No
permanent marks are placed in the text itself.
The default state for EDT is SET CASE NONE, meaning that no provisions
are made for artificially distinguishing between upper- and lowercase letters.

EXAMPLE
Assumes that you are working at a single-case terminal. Issues the SET CASE
UPPER command to flag all letters that are actually uppercase in the original
text.
USE THE SET CASE UPPER COMMAND WITH A SINGLE-CASE TERMINAL.
*SET CASE UPPER
'USE THE 'S'E'T 'C'A'S'E 'U'P'P'E'R COMMAND WITH A SINGLE-CASE TERMINAL.

related
commands

None.

EDT-163

EDT Commands
SET COMMAND Command

SET COMMAND Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

The SET COMMAND command allows you to process additional startup
command files at the beginning of your EDT session. The word COMMAND
refers to the startup command file, as does the /COMMAND qualifier used
in EDIT/EDT command lines. You can use the SET COMMAND command
only in a startup command file.

file-specification

The default startup command file that EDT looks for is a system-wide file
located in the system library. The file specification is:

SYNTAX

SYS$LIBRARY:EDTSYS.EDT
When you issue the system EDIT/EDT command, EDT first checks the
command line to see whether you have included a command file specification.
If EDT finds one, it processes that file. Otherwise, EDT looks for a systemwide startup-command file to process. If no system-wide command file
exists, EDT looks for a file named EDTINI.EDT in your default directory
and processes that file. If you use the /NOCOMMAND qualifier in your
EDIT/EDT command line, or if EDT fails to find a startup command file, your
session begins with the default settings for all parameters.
You must include at least the file name in the SET COMMAND command
line. .EDT is the default file type. If the specified file does not exist, EDT
ignores the SET COMMAND command and continues to process any
remaining commands in the current startup command file. Thus, you can
have several SET COMMAND commands in the system startup command
file, each branching to a different group or personal startup command file.
To bypass the default startup command file, either specify a different startup
command file in the EDIT/EDT command line or use the /NOCOMMAND
qualifier in the EDIT/EDT command line.
If you include the SHOW COMMAND command in a startup command file,
the name of that file is displayed at your terminal when EDT reads the file.

EDT—164

EDT Commands
SET COMMAND Command

EXAMPLE
Shows the SET COMMAND entry in a system-wide startup command
file, branching to the personal command file EDTEXPERT.EDT. Another
SET COMMAND command at the end of the file transfers EDT to the
EDTINI.EDT command file for users who do not have an EDTEXPERT.EDT
command file in their default directories.
DEFINE KEY GOLD S AS "S''Q?'Find:
SET WRAP 65

' ~Q?' Substitute:

' ~®."

SET COMMAND EDTEXPERT.EDT
DEFINE KEY GOLD L AS "SHL."
DEFINE KEY GOLD R AS "SHR."

SET COMMAND EDTINI.EDT

related
commands

None.

EDT—165

EDT Commands
SET CURSOR Command

SET CURSOR Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET CURSOR

DESCRIPTION

The SET CURSOR command controls the scrolling of the screen relative to
the cursor position. SET CURSOR has no effect if you are using a screen
terminal in line mode.

top.bottom

The top specifier refers to the number of lines from the top of the screen to
the cursor. As you move the cursor up toward the beginning of the buffer,
EDT begins to scroll the screen display. Lines are added at the top of the
screen when the cursor is the specified number of lines from the top. The
bottom specifier refers to the number of lines from the cursor to the bottom
of the screen. As you move the cursor down toward the end of the buffer,
EDT begins to scroll the screen display. Lines are added at the end of the
screen when the cursor is the specified number of lines from the bottom.
The default cursor settings are 7:14. When you move the cursor down to
the 15th line on the screen, the first line on the screen disappears and the
next line after the current bottom line appears at the bottom of the screen.
Conversely, as you move the cursor up the screen, when it reaches the
seventh line from the top, EDT begins scrolling down. Of course, scrolling
stops when you are near the beginning or end of the buffer.
When using the SET CURSOR command, top must be a smaller number than
bottom, and both must be less than or equal to the total number of screen
lines.
The maximum number of lines on a screen is 22, designated 0 through 21 for
the SET CURSOR command. The minimum value for the top specifier is 0
and the maximum number for the bottom specifier is 21.
You can use the SET LINES command to reduce the maximum number of
lines visible on your screen.

EXAMPLES
Q

*SET CURSOR 1:20

The cursor remains either one line from the top of the screen or from the
bottom of the screen, depending on the scrolling direction.
0

*SET CURSOR 9:11

The cursor remains one line on either side of the middle of the screen,
depending on the scrolling direction.

related
commands

EDT—166

None.

EDT Commands
SET ENTITY Command

SET ENTITY Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET ENTITY WORD

"string"

SET ENTITY SENTENCE

"string"

SET ENTITY PARAGRAPH
SET ENTITY PAGE

DESCRIPTION

"string

"string"

The SET ENTITY command defines the delimiters that mark certain entity
boundaries for EDT commands and functions. You can use the SET ENTITY
command to redefine the boundaries for four screen mode entities: WORD,
SENTENCE, PARAGRAPH, AND PAGE. Other entities, such as character
and line, cannot be redefined.
The default delimiters for the four EDT entities that can be reset are:
WORD
SENTENCE
PARAGRAPH
PAGE

A WORD is defined as any group of characters bounded by a space,
horizontal tab (displayed by the EDT as if it were a group of spaces), a
line feed, a vertical tab, a form feed, or a carriage return. A SENTENCE is
defined as any group of characters bounded by a period, a question mark,
or an exclamation point, each of which must be followed by at least one
space or line terminator. A PARAGRAPH is defined as a group of characters
bounded on either side by an empty line (two line terminators in succession—
displayed by EDT as <CR> <CR>). A PAGE is bounded by a form feed,
top of buffer, or bottom of buffer.
In resetting delimiters, remember that the SET ENTITY command overwrites
the default values. If you want to add delimiters to the existing ones, you
must include all the original delimiters in your command string, not just the
new ones you want to add. The delimiters you specify must be enclosed in
quotation marks, single (') or double ("). If you want to include both kinds
of quotation marks in your list of delimiters, double the kind that is used to
enclose the list. The command SET ENTITY SENTENCE
BOLD) has
all the default sentence boundary characters plus both kinds of quotation
marks.
The elements in the WORD and SENTENCE boundary list are single
characters, each of which is a boundary by itself. You can have any number
of different WORD and SENTENCE boundaries at the same time during
your EDT session. Do not use spaces or any other characters to separate
the individual boundary marks in the SET ENTITY WORD or SENTENCE
command.

EDT-167

EDT Commands
SET ENTITY Command

For PARAGRAPH and PAGE, you can only have a single boundary at any
given time, but that boundary can be composed of several characters. For
example, your PAGE boundary can be the word PAGE. If you use letters
in your PARAGRAPH or PAGE boundary, EDT uses its current search
parameters when locating the boundary string. Thus, if SET SEARCH EXACT
is in effect and the PAGE boundary is .PAGE, EDT will not recognize .page
as a page separator.
For SET ENTITY WORD, EDT considers all word boundaries, except spaces,
to be word entities themselves unless SET WORD NODELIMITER is in
effect.

EXAMPLES
Q

O □ 0<LF><VT><FF><CR>'

*SET ENTITY WORD '

Sets the word entity to include all the default boundaries as well as braces,
brackets, and parentheses.
B

*SET ENTITY SENTENCE

Sets the sentence entity to be any string of characters ending with ., !, ?, ", ', ),
or ] followed by at least one space or line terminator. Notice that the double
quotation mark (") inside the boundary list is doubled.
E

*SET ENTITY PARAGRAPH "<CR><CR><CR>"

Sets the paragraph entity to be any group of lines separated by two empty
lines.
Q

*SET ENTITY PAGE '.HL1'

Sets the page entity to be any text beginning with a RUNOFF level-one
header.

related
commands

EDT—168

None,

EDT Commands
SET [NO]FNF Command

SET [NO]FNF Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET FNF
SET NOFNF

DESCRIPTION

The SET NOFNF command suppresses the message that appears when you
use EDT to create a new file. (FNF stands for File Not Found.) Normally,
when you call up EDT to create a file, you see this message:
Input file does not exist

This is the default state—SET FNF.
When you have the SET NOFNF command in an EDT startup command file,
EDT does not display the Input file does not exist message at the start of
your editing session. Note that SET NOFNF does not suppress the message

Input file does not have standard text file format.

EXAMPLE
Shows the start of an EDT session in which the "Input" message is displayed
and then shows a session in which the message has been suppressed by
placing the SET NOFNF command in the startup command file.
$ EDIT /EDT JUL141989.RNO
Input file does not exist.
[EOB]

♦EXIT

(Now put the SET NOFNF command in your startup command file.)
$ EDIT /EDT JUL141989.RNO
[EOB]

related
commands

None.

EDT—169

EDT Commands
SET HELP Command

SET HELP Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET HELP

DESCRIPTION

The SET HELP command enables you to access different HELP files for your
EDT session. Since EDT allows users to modify the HELP file text or create
new HELP files, you might have access to more than one HELP file. The SET
HELP command enables you to use the HELP file that corresponds to your
key definitions and EDT macros, even if that file is not the default HELP text
for your site.

[file-specification]

If you have key definitions and EDT macros that are documented in a revised
HELP file, include the appropriate SET HELP command in your startup
command file so that your HELP text will be consistent with your editing
environment.
When you issue the SET HELP command without a file specification or when
you type SET HELP EDTHELP, EDT returns you to the default HELP file.
The SHOW HELP command tells you the name of the current HELP file.
If you omit parts of the file specification in your SET HELP command, the
following defaults will be supplied by the operating system:
Device Name

File Name

File Type

SYS$HELP:

EDTHELP

.HLB

EXAMPLES
Q

*SET HELP EDTHELP

Specifies EDT's default HELP file.
g

*SET HELP DISK$USER:[SMITH]XEDTHELP.HLB

Specifies a different EDT HELP file.

related
commands

EDT—170

None,

EDT Commands
SET KEYPAD Command

SET KEYPAD Command
—Line
SET NOKEYPAD Command
SYNTAX

SET KEYPAD
SET NOKEYPAD

DESCRIPTION

The SET KEYPAD/NOKEYPAD command determines which screen mode
EDT accesses. The default screen mode is keypad. When you begin an
EDT session and give the CHANGE command, your editing session is
automatically shifted to keypad mode. If you give the SET NOKEYPAD
command and then the CHANGE command, you enter nokeypad mode.
If you have the SET MODE CHANGE command in your startup command
file, EDT automatically starts your session in keypad mode. To have your
EDT sessions start in nokeypad mode, you must include the SET NOKEYPAD
command in the startup command file.
You can use the SET NOKEYPAD command with the keypad COMMAND
function to shift directly to nokeypad editing from keypad mode. Conversely,
when you are in nokeypad mode, you can issue the EXT SET KEYPAD
command to shift directly to keypad editing.
Once you have issued a SET NOKEYPAD command, you can switch back
and forth between line mode and nokeypad mode without having to reissue
the SET NOKEYPAD command.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Shifts from line mode to nokeypad mode at the start of an editing session.
$ EDIT /EDT LETTER.RNO
♦SET NOKEYPAD
♦CHANGE

example 2:

Shifts from line mode to keypad mode when SET NOKEYPAD is in effect.
♦SET KEYPAD
♦CHANGE

related
commands

None.

EDT—171

EDT Commands
SET LINES Command

SET LINES Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET LINES

DESCRIPTION

The SET LINES command is used to limit the number of lines that EDT
displays on the terminal screen at one time. The number specifier can be any
integer from 1 to 22. The default value is the maximum: 22 lines per screen.
This command has no effect on the number of lines moved by the keypad
SECT function. SET LINES also has no effect in line mode.

number

If you reduce the number of lines on the screen, use the SET CURSOR
command to adjust the cursor settings that tell EDT when to scroll the screen.
If you set the number of lines small enough to invalidate the current SET
CURSOR values, EDT adjusts the SET CURSOR values so that they will be
valid. However, EDT does not change the SET CURSOR values when you
increase the number of lines displayed per screen. Use the SHOW CURSOR
command to see the current cursor settings.
The SET LINES command is useful if you are working at a terminal operating
at a low data transmission rate. With fewer lines displayed on the screen,
EDT requires less time to redraw the screen when you issue a command or
keypad keystroke that significantly alters the screen image.

EXAMPLE
Limits the screen display to eight lines. Checks the new cursor setting and
then uses the SET CURSOR command to reset the scrolling lines to 2 and 6.
This
This
This
This
This
This
This
This
This
This

is
is
is
is
is
is
is
is
is
is

line
line
line
line
line
line
line
line
line
line

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10

This is line 22
1 gold! +

Command:
ENTER
SUBS

EDT—172

PAGE
COMMAND

SET LINES 8

EDT Commands
SET LINES Command

This
This
This
This
This
This
This
This

is
is
is
is
is
is
is
is

line
line
line
line
line
line
line
line

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

♦SHOW CURSOR
7:7
♦SET CURSOR 2:6

related
commands

None.

EDT—1 73

EDT Commands
SET MODE Command

SET MODE Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET MODE CHANGE
SET MODE LINE

DESCRIPTION

The SET MODE command establishes the initial mode of your EDT session.
When SET MODE CHANGE is in an EDT startup command file, your editing
session automatically starts off in change mode instead of line mode, which is
the default.
The default change mode is keypad mode if the operating system informs
EDT that you have either a VTlOO-type or VT52 terminal. If you are using
some other kind of terminal, the default change mode is hardcopy change
mode.
The SHOW MODE command shows the mode that was last set by a SET
MODE command. The mode that SHOW MODE displays will not necessarily
correspond to the current EDT mode since you can use other commands to
shift from one editing mode to another during your editing session.

EXAMPLE
Shows an EDT session starting out in the default mode—line. Then shows
the beginning of the same session if SET MODE CHANGE is in the startup
command file.
$ EDIT /EDT LETTER.RNO
1
January 1,

1986

*
(After you put the SET MODE CHANGE command in the startup command
file, reissue the EDIT /EDT command.)
$ EDIT /EDT LETTER.RNO
January 1,
Mr.

Jordan R. Kingsberry

[EOB]

related
commands

EDT—174

1986

None.

EDT Commands
SET [NOJNUMBERS Command

SET [IMO]IMUMBERS Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET NUMBERS
SET NONUMBERS

DESCRIPTION

SET [NOJNUMBERS determines whether or not EDT displays its line
numbers during line mode editing. If you request SET NONUMBERS, EDT
displays text in line mode starting at the left margin of your screen or paper,
without showing the EDT line numbers. To restore the default state, give the
SET NUMBERS command. EDT maintains its line numbering system even
when SET NONUMBERS is in effect.

EXAMPLE
The first TYPE command lists lines 3 through 5 with the EDT line numbers
displayed. The second TYPE command lists the same lines when SET
NONUMBERS is in effect.
* TYPE 3 THRU 5
3
4
5

Ms. Phyllis Davenport
3587 Charter Lane
Hartford. CT 06107

* SET NONUMBERS
♦TYPE 3 THRU 5
Ms. Phyllis Davenport
3587 Charter Lane
Hartford. CT 06107

related
commands

None.

EDT—175

EDT Commands
SET PARAGRAPH [NO]WPS Command

SET PARAGRAPH [NO]WPS
Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET PARAGRAPH WPS
SET PARAGRAPH NOWPS

DESCRIPTION

The default boundary limits for a paragraph in EDT are two line terminators
in succession. When you use the paragraph entity to move the cursor in a
change mode with EDT in the forward direction, EDT positions the cursor
on the character immediately following the second line terminator of the
paragraph boundary. SET PARAGRAPH NOWPS is the default.
The SET PARAGRAPH WPS command recognizes an empty line as the
paragraph boundary, but does not leave the cursor at the next character
after the empty line if that character is another line terminator. With SET
PARAGRAPH WPS in effect, EDT looks for the first character beyond the
paragraph boundary that is not a line terminator, and moves the cursor there.
If EDT's direction is backward and SET PARAGRAPH WPS is in effect, EDT
moves the cursor to the nearest character preceded by two line terminators in
succession, providing that character is not a line terminator itself.
If you have changed the paragraph boundary with the SET ENTITY
PARAGRAPH command and the new entity ends with a line terminator
(<CR>), SET PARAGRAPH WPS will cause EDT to skip over any blank
lines that might follow directly after the paragraph entity.

EXAMPLE
Shows the cursor position when the PAR entity is used with the default
SET PARAGRAPH NOWPS. Then shows the cursor position when SET
PARAGRAPH WPS is in effect. The EDT direction is forward.
at any time since the last war.
Later that day she was to regret her unkind remark.
True, it had been unintentional, but she could tell
PAR
at any time since the last war.

Later that day she was to regret her unkind remark.
True, it had been unintentional, but she could tell

(Move the cursor back to the a in at.)
EXT SET PARAGRAPH WPS
PAR

EDT—176

EDT Commands
SET PARAGRAPH [NO]WPS Command

at any time since the last war.
Later that day she was to regret her unkind remark.
True,

related
commands

it had been unintentional,

but she could tell

None,

EDT—177

EDT Commands
SET PROMPT Command

SET PROMPT Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET PROMPT

DESCRIPTION

The SET PROMPT command is used during EDT development to facilitate
automatic testing of EDT. It allows redefinition of the prompt string that is
displayed in line mode, in keypad mode, in nokeypad mode, in hardcopy
change mode, in line mode when inserting, in line mode when inserting with
NONUMBERS, and in line mode with the /QUERY qualifier.

prompt-type "string

Prompt types cannot be abbreviated. They are:
LINE

KEYPAD

NOKEYPAD

INSERT

INSERTN

QUERY

HCCHANGE

EDT's automatic testing facility uses SET PROMPT to add a unique,
nonprinting character (CTRL/A) to the end of each prompt. The character
signals the tester that EDT is ready for simulated user input.
Use of this command is not recommended. Note that with SET PROMPT in
effect, EDT will become confused if the new prompt string for the keypad
or nokeypad prompt causes a net motion of the cursor. Also note that if a
<CR> <LF> pair is not included in the new string for any prompt that
has those characters in the default prompt, these characters will be inserted
at the beginning of the new string. The insert prompt is modified if the line
numbers near the point of insertion become large.
The default prompts are:
LINE:
KEYPAD:
NOKEYPAD:
HCCHANGE:

<CR><LF>*

INSERT:
INSERTN:
QUERY:

<CR><LF>xxxxxxxxxxxx
<CR><LF>
<CR><LF>?

<CR><LF>C*

EXAMPLES
Q

*SET PROMPT LINE "<CR><LF>!!!"

Sets the line mode prompt to an end of line followed by three exclamation
points.
0

*SET PROMPT KEYPAD "

Sets the keypad mode prompt to a string containing one null character.
0

*SET PROMPT NOKEYPAD ""

Sets the nokeypad mode prompt to nothing.
Q

*SET PROMPT HCCHANGE "<CR><LF>CHANGE"

Sets the hardcopy change mode prompt to an end of line followed by the
word CHANGE.
0

*SET PROMPT INSERT "<CR><LF>{"

Sets the line mode insert prompt to an end of line followed by a left brace.

EDT—178

EDT Commands
SET PROMPT Command

♦SET PROMPT INSERTN "<CR><LF>+"

When SET NONUMBERS is in effect, sets the line mode insert prompt to an
end of line followed by a plus sign.

♦SET PROMPT QUERY "<CR><LF>?????"

Sets the line mode /QUERY prompt to an end of line followed by five
question marks.

related
commands

None,

EDT—179

EDT Commands
SET [NO]QUIET Command

SET [NO]QUIET Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET QUIET
SET NOQUIET

DESCRIPTION

The SET QUIET command silences the terminal bell that ordinarily sounds
whenever EDT issues an error message during a screen mode editing session.
Use SET NOQUIET, the default, to restore the bell sound.
SET [NOJQUIET has no effect on the nokeypad BELL command.

EXAMPLE
Shows the SET QUIET command in a startup command file.
SET SEARCH EXACT
SET QUIET
SET MODE CHANGE

related
commands

EDT—180

None.

EDT Commands
SET [NO]REPEAT Command

SET [NO]REPEAT Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET REPEAT
SET NOREPEAT

DESCRIPTION

The SET NOREPEAT command disallows use of the GOLD repeat feature,
which enables you to repeat functions in keypad mode. The default is SET
REPEAT, where pressing GOLD followed by a keyboard digit (or digits)
causes the subsequent keypad function to be repeated as many times as the
number entered. SET NOREPEAT also disallows the use of the SPECINS
keypad function, which enables you to insert any character from the DEC
Multinational Character Set into your text by using its decimal equivalent
value.
If you are accustomed to a word processing system, you might find the
NOREPEAT option more convenient to use.

EXAMPLE
Shows the SET NOREPEAT command in a startup command file.
SET PARAGRAPH WPS
SET NOREPEAT
SET MODE CHANGE

related
commands

None.

EDT—181

EDT Commands
SET SCREEN Command

SET SCREEN Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET SCREEN

DESCRIPTION

The SET SCREEN command allows you to change the maximum number
of characters displayed on each screen line during your editing session. The
width specifier can be either 80 or 132 for VT 100-type terminals (including
VT102s) with advanced video option (AVO) or 80 for VT52s and VTlOOs
without AVO (including VTlOls). SET SCREEN also affects the number of
characters displayed on your paper if you are using a hardcopy terminal. For
hardcopy terminals, the width specifier can take any value between 1 and
132.

width

Be sure not to specify a value for width that exceeds your terminal's capacity
or exceeds 132. Otherwise, EDT becomes confused and cannot process your
edits properly.
To see if your VTlOO-type terminal has AVO, press the SET-UP key at the
top left comer of the keyboard. The word SET-UP is displayed in large letters
at the top of the screen. If SET-UP flashes, your terminal has the advanced
video option and can accommodate a SET SCREEN value of 80 or 132. Press
the SET-UP key again to restore the previous screen display.
The SET SCREEN command does not cause EDT to wrap long lines in the
screen modes. Use the SET NOTRUNCATE command to show the ends of
lines that exceed the screen width. Use SET WRAP in keypad mode to have
EDT wrap lines of text as you insert them.
You must use the SET WRAP command to change the line width for the
keypad FILL function and the nokeypad FILL command because SET
SCREEN can accept values only of 80 or 132 in screen modes. EDT uses
the SET SCREEN value to determine the line length for filling text only
if SET NOWRAP (the default) is in effect. If SET WRAP is in effect, EDT
always uses the wrap value, regardless of the SET SCREEN width.
In line mode, EDT always wraps lines that are longer than the SET SCREEN
width specifier.
EDT gets the initial screen width from the operating system or from
commands either in your login file or an EDT startup command file.
Remember that the only screen width possible for VT52 terminals is 80
characters. Using a width specifier of 132 on a VT52 causes confusing line
wraps and truncations. If you try to use EDT on a VT52 and your working
line length is greater than 80, use QUIT to leave EDT and reset whatever is
sending EDT that information. Then start your editing session over again.
You can also use EDT's SET SCREEN 80 command at the beginning of your
session. Use the SHOW SCREEN command to determine the current screen
width setting.

EDT—182

EDT Commands
SET SCREEN Command

When a line exceeds the screen width in a screen mode, EDT indicates that
there are additional characters on the line by placing a diamond (♦) in the last
column. If the number of characters on your line equals the current screen
width exactly, you will see all of them. If you have one more character, you
will see one less character than the screen width value. The last column will
contain the diamond. In other words, if your screen width is 80 and you have
exactly 80 characters in the line, all 80 characters will be visible. If you have
81 or more characters in your line, only the first 79 will be visible.

EXAMPLE
Increases the screen width so that you can see the entire line.
This is a line of text that is longer than 80 characters, the screen default wi+
|GOLD 1 +

PAGE
COMMAND

Command: SET SCREEN 132
ENTER
SUBS

This is a line of text that is longer than 80 characters, the screen default
width for my VT100.

related
commands

None,

EDT—183

EDT Commands
SET SEARCH Command

SET SEARCH Command—Line
SYNTAX

SETSEARCH GENERAL
EXACT
WPS
CASE INSENSITIVE
DIACRITICAL INSENSITIVE
SET SEARCH BEGIN
END
SET SEARCH BOUNDED
UNBOUNDED

DESCRIPTION

The SET SEARCH command influences how EDT locates strings during your
editing sessions. All EDT commands that involve search strings, regardless
of editing mode, are affected by the SET SEARCH parameters. The keypad
mode functions that use search strings are FIND, FNDNXT, and SUBS. In
line mode, both substitute commands and all commands that use a string for
the range specifier are affected by the SET SEARCH parameters. In nokeypad
mode, SET SEARCH influences any command using either the string specifier
or the string entity.
There are three groups of SET SEARCH parameters. The first deals with the
case and diacritical marks of letters in the search string as compared with the
string EDT finds in your text. The second deals with the cursor position after
the string has been found. The third determines how much of the text buffer
EDT looks at to find a matching string.

SET SEARCH {GENERAL! EXACT WPSI CASE
INSENSITIVE! DIACRITICAL INSENSITIVE} determines how EDT
matches the case and diacritical marks of the letters in the search string
with the letters in the text. When SET SEARCH GENERAL, the default,
is in effect, EDT disregards both case and diacritical marks in performing
a search. Thus, FUR, F UR, Fur, F tir, fur, and f tir all match the search
string fur.
With SET SEARCH EXACT, the case and diacritical mark of each letter in
the search string must exactly match the case and diacritical mark of each
corresponding letter in the string that EDT locates. If the search string is
angel, EDT ignores ANGEL, Angel or ang el in the text.
SET SEARCH WPS requires that only uppercase letters in the search string
match uppercase letters in the text. The search string The matches THE,
The, THe, or ThE, but not the or tHE.

EDT—184

EDT Commands
SET SEARCH Command

SET SEARCH CASE INSENSITIVE matches diacritical marks exactly,
but disregards the case of the letters. The words Eon and eon match the
search string EON; E on and e 6n do not. Conversely, SET SEARCH
DIACRITICAL INSENSITIVE matches the case of letters exactly, but
ignores any diacritical marks EDT might encounter. The words piece and
pi'ece match the search string piece; Piece and Pi'ece do not.

2 SET SEARCH {BEGIN1END} determines where the cursor stops after EDT
finds the search string when you are working in a screen mode. With
SET SEARCH BEGIN, the default, EDT positions the cursor at the first
character in the found string. With SET SEARCH END, the cursor stops
at the character immediately to the right of the last character in the string.
This parameter has no effect in line mode.

3 SET SEARCH {BOUNDEDI UNBOUNDED} determines how much of
the text EDT searches through when trying to find a string. With SET
SEARCH UNBOUNDED, the default, EDT starts its search at the current
cursor position or current line and continues to search until it either finds
the string or reaches the end of the buffer. If the current direction is
forward, EDT stops at the bottom of the buffer. If the current direction is
backward, the search stops at the top of the buffer.
When SET SEARCH BOUNDED is in effect, EDT stops the search either
when it finds the string or when it reaches a page boundary marker. The
default page marker is the form feed (<FF> —CTRL/L). To insert form
feeds in your text, simply press CTRL/L at the appropriate locations.
If you have used the SET ENTITY PAGE command to establish a
different page marker, EDT stops at that boundary marker when the
search parameter is BOUNDED. If there are no page boundary markers
in your buffer, SET SEARCH BOUNDED has the same effect as SET
SEARCH UNBOUNDED.
Use the SHOW SEARCH command to have EDT display the current search
parameters.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Shows EDT printing different lines, depending on the case of letters in the
search string, first with SET SEARCH EXACT and then with SET SEARCH
WPS.
1
2
3
4
5

EDT's screen modes use CUT and PASTE to delete, move,
and copy text.
Cutting the text removes it from its
original location and puts it in a separate buffer.
Use PASTE to put a copy of the cut text in a new
location.

*SET SEARCH EXACT
♦TYPE ALL "CUT"
1

EDT's screen modes use CUT and PASTE to delete, move,

♦TYPE ALL "cut"
4

Use PASTE to put a copy of the cut text in a new

♦SET SEARCH WPS
♦TYPE ALL "Cut"
1
2

EDT's screen modes use CUT and PASTE to delete, move,
and copy text.
Cutting the text removes it from its

EDT—185

EDT Commands
SET SEARCH Command

example 2:

Shows the cursor located on the character after the search string in screen
mode (nokeypad in this case).
Maynard, MA

01754

EXT SET SEARCH END
EXT TYPE "01754"
Maynard, MA

example 3:

01754

Stops EDT from looking for the string after line 254. Therefore, EDT prints
the message String was not found.
254
255
256

After the long trip home, he needed some rest.
<FF>
The next afternoon, Martha came to the house for tea.

♦TYPE .
254

After the long trip home, he needed some rest.

♦SET SEARCH BOUNDED
♦TYPE "Martha"
String was not found

related
commands

EDT—186

None.

EDT Commands
SET [NO]SUMMARY COMMAND

SET [IMO]SUMMARY COMMAND—Line
SYNTAX

SET SUMMARY
SET NOSUMMARY

DESCRIPTION

The SET NOSUMMARY command suppresses the summary information
printed at the terminal when you use the EXIT or WRITE command to copy
text from your EDT session into an external file.
Normally with the default state, SET SUMMARY, EDT prints a line of
information giving you the complete file specification and number of lines in
the file that EDT has created as a result of your EXIT or WRITE command.
With SET NOSUMMARY, only the appropriate prompt appears after the
command has been processed.

EXAMPLE
Shows the default summary information printed after the EXIT command.
Then shows no summary information being supplied when SET
NOSUMMARY is in effect.
♦EXIT
DISK$USER:[SMITH.SUBCAT1]MEM035.RNO;3 36 lines

$
$ EDIT /EDT MEM035.RNO

♦SET NOSUMMARY
♦EXIT

related
commands

None.

EDT—187

EDT Commands
SET TAB Command

SET TAB Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET TAB

number

SET NOTAB

DESCRIPTION

The SET TAB command establishes the SET TAB value for various tabbing
functions in all three editing modes. The default for this command is SET
NOTAB. With SET NOTAB in effect only the keypad mode TAB (CTRL/H)
function and the nokeypad TAB command have any effect on your text.
The TAB key also works when you are in line mode to insert horizontal tab
characters in your text. The remaining tabbing commands and functions do
nothing unless you have issued the SET TAB command.
SET TAB activates EDT's tabbing facility that enables you to format layered
text, such as outlines and indented computer programs. The keypad tabbing
functions are:

CTRL/A (tab compute)

CTRL/E (tab increment)

CTRL/D (tab decrement)

CTRL/T (tab adjust)

The corresponding nokeypad tabbing commands are:

TC (tab compute)

Tl (tab increment)

TD (tab decrement)

TADJ (tab adjust)

SET TAB also activates the line mode TAB ADJUST command.
The SET TAB value establishes the working value for the tabbing facility.
The tab compute, decrement, and increment functions use the SET TAB value
to determine the number of tab stops for EDT to indent a line. The tab adjust
functions enable you to indent blocks of text.

EXAMPLE
After setting the SET TAB value to 5, uses the TAB key to indent the line 5
columns.
PLASTIC RINGS
39
TC076
No. 46 Plastic Rings
|GOLD | +

PAGE
COMMAND

Command:

SET TAB 5

ENTER
SUBS

[TAB]

EDT—188

.03

EDT Commands
SET TAB Command

PLASTIC RINGS
39
TC076

related
commands

No. 46 Plastic Rings

.03

None,

EDT—189

EDT Commands
SET TERMINAL Command

SET TERMINAL Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET TERMINAL HCPY
VTIOO
VT52
SET TERMINAL SCROLL
NOSCROLL
SET TERMINAL EIGHTBIT
NOEIGHTBIT
SET TERMINAL EDIT
NOEDIT

DESCRIPTION

With the SET TERMINAL command, you can correct or change EDT's
assumptions about the type of terminal you are using. Generally, EDT is
able to get all the information it needs to know about your terminal from the
operating system. However, in some instances the data it receives is incorrect.
At other times, you might want to change one or more of the settings for
some special purpose.
Note that you must not issue a SET TERMINAL {VT100IVT52IHCPY}
command from a screen mode. You can issue the other SET TERMINAL
commands from any mode (for example, SET TERMINAL NOSCROLL).
There are four terminal characteristics that you can reset:
basic terminal type:

HCPY, VTIOO, VT52

scrolling regions:

SCROLL, NOSCROLL

additional character display:

EIGHTBIT, NOEIGHTBIT

enhanced screen editing:

EDIT, NOEDIT

If EDT does not support your terminal for screen editing, the terminal should
be set for HCPY (hardcopy). This setting allows you to use both line mode
and hardcopy change mode, but not the screen modes.
The VTIOO setting is for terminals belonging to the VTIOO family. These
terminals have reverse video display and 22 keypad keys. VT 100-type
terminals include VT101, VT102, VT125, VT131, and VT132 and terminals
that have the LK201 keyboard and VTIOO emulation.
The VT52 setting is for VT52 terminals. VT52 terminals have 19 keypad keys
and do not have reverse video display.
The SCROLL option shows that your terminal has scrolling regions that EDT
can use. This is the default for most VTlOO-type terminals.

EDT-190

EDT Commands
SET TERMINAL Command

If you do not have a VTlOO-type terminal, be sure that EDT has your terminal
set to NOSCROLL. This is the default for VT52 terminals.
The EIGHTBIT option is for terminals that can display characters requiring
eight bits for their representation. The eight bit characters are those in the
DEC Multinational Character Set with decimal values of 128 through 255. If
your terminal has eightbit character capacity, EDT can display the additional
printing characters on your screen in their proper graphic representation, for
example, n for decimal value 241.
If your terminal cannot display the additional DEC Multinational Character
Set characters, you need to use the NOEIGHTBIT option. On NOEIGHTBIT
terminals, the characters from 128 through 225 are displayed using symbols
inside angle brackets, for example, <A"> for decimal 196. You need to use
the keypad SPECINS function or the ASC command in either nokeypad or
hardcopy change mode to insert these characters in your text.
The EDIT option is for terminals, such as the VT102, that have internal screen
editing features. These features are: IL (insert line), DL (delete line), the
insert state of IRM (insertion-replacement mode), and DCH (delete character).
If you have a VT102 or similar terminal and it is set to EDIT, EDT is able to
use the terminal's internal screen editing features to enhance performance.
Note that terminals using the LK201 keyboard have internal screen editing
features. The NOEDIT option is for all terminals that do not have the
VT102-type internal screen editing features.
The SET TERMINAL command can be used to turn off features that your
terminal has, but it cannot be used to increase the capabilities of your
terminal. For instance, if your terminal does not have internal editing
capabilities, issuing the SET TERMINAL EDIT command merely confuses
EDT and causes problems in your editing session.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Changes a VT100 or VT52 terminal to the hardcopy setting.
♦SET TERMINAL HCPY
♦SHOW TERMINAL
Hardcopy noscroll noeightbit noedit

example 2:

Changes the EDIT/NOEDIT setting to accommodate a VT102 terminal.
♦SET TERMINAL EDIT
♦SHOW TERMINAL
VT100 scroll noeightbit edit

related
commands

None.

EDT—191

EDT Commands
SET TEXT Command

SET TEXT Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET TEXT END
SET TEXT PAGE

DESCRIPTION

"string"

The SET TEXT command allows you to personalize two items during the
course of your EDT session. SET TEXT PAGE displays the string you supply
for any form feed characters (<FF>) in the buffer. SET TEXT END causes
EDT to display your string instead of the [EOB] (end of buffer) mark at the
end of each EDT buffer. Once you exit from EDT, these strings are not part
of the file.
You can put the SET TEXT END and SET TEXT PAGE commands in a startup
command file or you can issue them during your editing session. They have
no permanent effect on the text that you are editing.
The strings used for PAGE and END can contain any printing characters
(but control characters and DELETE are not allowed). These strings can have
several words, but cannot exceed a single line.

EXAMPLE
Changes the characters that EDT displays for <FF> and [EOB].
<FF>
I will be in touch with you as soon as I have found a
source for the plastic tubing.
Sincerely yours,

[EOB]
EXT SET TEXT PAGE "PAGE BREAK HERE!"
EXT SET TEXT END "END OF LETTER, DID YOU REMEMBER THE CCs?"
PAGE BREAK HERE!
I will be in touch with you as soon as I have found a
source for the plastic tubing.
Sincerely yours,

END OF LETTER, DID YOU REMEMBER THE CCs?

related
commands

EDT—192

None.

EDT Commands
SET [NO]TRUNCATE Command

SET [IMO]TRUIMCATE Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET TRUNCATE
SET NOTRUNCATE

DESCRIPTION

The SET NOTRUNCATE command causes lines longer than the current
screen width to wrap onto subsequent lines when you are working in
a screen mode. The default screen width is the terminal width that the
operating system reports to EDT at the start of your editing session. This
width can be changed by the SET SCREEN command.
When you use SET NOTRUNCATE, EDT marks the start of the wrapped
portion of a line with a diamond followed by a space. (SET NOTRUNCATE
has no effect when you are working in line mode, thus no diamond appears
on the screen or paper. In line mode, EDT always wraps long lines.)
SET NOTRUNCATE uses only the screen width value to determine where
to break the line. It does not take word boundaries into consideration. Use
SET WRAP to break lines at word boundaries when you insert text in keypad
mode.
SET NOTRUNCATE has no effect on the text in your buffer, only on how
that text is displayed on the screen. SET WRAP has a permanent effect on
your text.

EXAMPLE
Shows the difference between the text when SET TRUNCATE is in effect, and
again when SET NOTRUNCATE is in effect. The SET SCREEN width is 80.
We are now planning our new sales campaign for the fall.
I want every sales rep+
to become fully aware of all the products being marketed by our competition.
[GOLD | +

PAGE
COMMAND

Command: SET NOTRUNCATE
ENTER
SUBS

We are now planning our new sales campaign for the fall.
I want every sales rep
♦
resentative
to become fully aware of all the products being marketed by our competition.

related
commands

None,

EDT—193

EDT Commands
SET [NO]VERIFY Command

SET [NO]VERIFY Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET VERIFY
SETNOVERIFY

DESCRIPTION

The SET VERIFY command instructs EDT to print at the terminal the
commands in a startup command file or EDT macro as the commands are
being processed. Under the default condition, SET NOVERIFY, EDT does
not display the contents of the startup command file or macro as it is being
processed.

EXAMPLE
First shows the startup command file with SET VERIFY at the top. Then
shows the start of your EDT session.
Suppose this is your startup command file:
SET VERIFY
FIND =TABLE
INCLUDE TABLE.MAC
FIND =MAIN
SET MODE CHANGE

Now start to edit a new file.
$ EDIT /EDT TABLE35.RNO
FIND =TABLE
INCLUDE TABLE.MAC
FIND =MAIN
SET MODE CHANGE
[EOB]

Input file does not exist

related
commands

EDT—194

None.

EDT Commands
SET WORD [NO]DELIMITER Command

SET WORD [NO]DELIMITER
Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET WORD DELIMITER
SET WORD NODELIMITER

DESCRIPTION

The SET WORD NODELIMITER command changes the way EDT responds to
word entity boundaries. Normally, EDT considers all word delimiters (except
the space) to be words themselves when deleting words or when moving
the cursor a word at a time. After you issue the SET WORD NODELIMITER
command, EDT still uses the word delimiters to determine where words begin
and end, but it does not treat these characters as separate words. SET WORD
DELIMITER is the default.

EXAMPLE
First shows the cursor moving to the line terminator when SET WORD
DELIMITER is in effect. Then, using the same sample text, shows the cursor
moving to the first character of the next line with SET WORD NODELIMITER
in effect.
During the winter months, people who live in the northern
states like to travel to the south for vacations as well
as for business trips.
WORD
CHNGCASE

WORD
CHNGCASE

During the winter months, people who live in the northern
states like to travel to the south for vacations as well
as for business trips.

(Now, move the cursor back to the first t in the northern and repeat the
example, with SET WORD NODELIMITER in effect.)
IGOLD | +

PAGE
COMMAND

Command: SET WORD NODELIMITER
ENTER
SUBS

WORD
CHNGCASE

During the winter months, people who live in the northern
states like to travel to the south for vacations as well
as business trips.

EDT—195

EDT Commands
SET WORD [NO]DELIMITER Command

related
commands

EDT—196

None.

EDT Commands
SET [NO]WRAP Command

SET [NO]WRAP Command—Line
SYNTAX

SET WRAP

number

SET NOWRAP

DESCRIPTION

The SET WRAP command causes lines of text to wrap when new text is being
inserted into a buffer in keypad mode. The command also determines the line
length for the keypad FILL function and the line and nokeypad mode FILL
commands. The number specifier tells EDT what the maximum line length
should be for the inserted or filled text. SET NOWRAP is the default.
Two important things to remember about SET WRAP are: 1) that it has no
effect on text already in your buffer, and 2) that it has no effect on text that
you insert in line or nokeypad mode.
When you are inserting text in keypad mode, SET WRAP always breaks the
line at a space, line terminator, or other word boundary so that no words are
divided. If there are no spaces in the line, you can type up to 255 characters
on a line and still have no wrapping take place, regardless of the SET WRAP
value. If you are inserting characters in the middle of an existing line in such
a way that no spaces are added, no break occurs, even if there are spaces
elsewhere in the line.
SET WRAP has no effect on lines that are already in a buffer, but once set,
it has a permanent effect on text that is inserted in keypad mode or text
that has been reformatted by a FILL function. When a wrap takes place,
EDT considers the wrapped portion to be a separate line and numbers it
accordingly. So, although you did not type a line terminator, one now exists
at the spot where the wrap was made. The wrapped portion of the line
has its own line number and maintains its separateness during your editing
session and in any external files that EDT creates from that text.
When you use SET WRAP with FILL, the number specified for the SET
WRAP command is used by EDT to determine the maximum line length. If
SET NO WRAP is in effect, the line length for FILL is determined by the SET
SCREEN value. However, SET WRAP overrides SET SCREEN.
In screen mode, the SET NOTRUNCATE command causes EDT to wrap
all lines that exceed the current SET SCREEN setting. SET NOTRUNCATE
breaks the line at the SET SCREEN width, regardless of word boundaries.
NOTRUNCATE has no permanent effect on your text.

EDT—197

EDT Commands
SET [NO]WRAP Command

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Before entering keypad mode, sets the SET WRAP value to 40. EDT then
wraps the text as you insert it.
♦SET WRAP 40
♦CHANGE

(Here is the line as you start to type it.)
As we type this line, we pause just befo_

(Here is the text as it appears when you finish.)
As we type this line, we pause just
before the 41st character position._

example 2:

Sets the SET WRAP value to 40 and then uses the FILL nokeypad command
to reformat the text.
You can devise command procedures to simplify and
enhance your program development.
For example,
you can write a command procedure that will
compile, link, and run a specific
PL/I program.
EXT SET WRAP 40
FILL6L
You can devise command procedures to
simplify and enhance your program
development. For example, you can write
a command procedure that will compile,
link, and run a specific PL/I program.

related
commands

EDT—198

None.

EDT Commands
SHOW AUTOREPEAT Command

SHOW AUTOREPEAT Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW AUTOREPEAT

DESCRIPTION This command indicates whether SET AUTOREPEAT or SET

NOAUTOREPEAT is currently in effect. The default for EDT is generally
AUTOREPEAT. Use SET NO AUTOREPEAT to change the default if your
terminal requires that setting.

EXAMPLE
Prints the current autorepeat setting.
♦SHOW AUTOREPEAT
autorepeat

related
commands

None.

EDT—199

EDT Commands
SHOW BUFFER Command

SHOW BUFFER Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW BUFFER

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW BUFFER command lists all accessible buffers currently in your
EDT session. Inaccessible storage areas, such as the delete character, delete
word, delete line, search, and substitute buffers, do not appear in the SHOW
BUFFER list. EDT uses the buffer specifier in both line mode and nokeypad
mode to create buffers.
When you issue the SHOW BUFFER command, EDT indicates the current
buffer by preceding its name with an equal sign (=). EDT also lists the
number of lines in each buffer. If the number of lines in the MAIN buffer
is marked with an asterisk (*), it means that EDT has not read through the
entire buffer and therefore is only aware of the number of lines shown. You
can have EDT "read" the entire buffer by issuing a command such as TYPE
END.
Once a buffer has been created, it remains open for the remainder of the EDT
session, unless it is deleted by the CLEAR command. The MAIN and PASTE
buffers are automatically created by EDT at the start of every editing session.
These buffers cannot be eliminated by the CLEAR command, although their
contents can be deleted.

EXAMPLE
First shows the current buffer status at the start of your EDT session, when
EDT has seen only the first line of the MAIN buffer. Then shows the buffer
status after you have used the TYPE command to move to the end of the
buffer.
$ EDIT/EDT LETTER.RNO
1

March 4.

♦SHOW BUFFER
=MAIN
PASTE

1*
No

lines
lines

♦TYPE END
[EOB]
♦SHOW BUFFER
=MAIN
PASTE

related
commands

EDT—200

None.

45
No

lines
lines

1985

EDT Commands
SHOW CASE Command

SHOW CASE Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW CASE

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW CASE command tells you which case, if any, has been established
by the SET CASE command. The possible responses are: Upper, Lower, or
None. None is the default.

EXAMPLE
Shows the current case setting.
♦SHOW CASE
None

related
commands

None.

EDT—201

EDT Commands
SHOW COMMAND Command

SHOW COMMAND Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW COMMAND

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW COMMAND command prints the name of the active startup
command file. Include SHOW COMMAND in the startup command file to
have EDT print the name of that file at the start of your EDT session.
When the SET COMMAND command appears in a startup command file,
it causes EDT to look for another startup command file. You can include a
SHOW COMMAND command in each startup command file so that you will
see which files have been processed before you begin your editing session.
If you issue the SHOW COMMAND command during your editing session,
EDT displays nothing.

EXAMPLE
In this example, each SHOW COMMAND command is in a separate startup
command file. The file name that EDT prints appears as soon as EDT
completes processing that startup command file.
(First startup command file)

SET MODE CHANGE
SHOW COMMAND
SET COMMAND EDTEXPERT

(Second startup command file)

DEFINE KEY GOLD E AS "EXT EXIT."
SHOW COMMAND
$ EDIT/EDT ACCTPROG.COB
EDTSYS
EDTEXPERT

related
commands

EDT—202

None.

EDT Commands
SHOW CURSOR Command

SHOW CURSOR Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW CURSOR

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW CURSOR command displays the values that have been set by
the SET CURSOR command. The SET CURSOR command establishes the
cursor positions at which scrolling of the screen image occurs. The default
values are 7:14—that is, the screen image scrolls up when the cursor is on the
15th line of the screen and you are moving forward. The screen image scrolls
down when the cursor is on the 8th line of the screen and you are moving
backward. (The SET CURSOR values for the 22 lines on the screen range
from 0 to 21.)

EXAMPLE
First shows the default cursor values. Then after a new set has been
established, shows the new values.
♦SHOW CURSOR
7:14

♦SET CURSOR 2:20

♦SHOW CURSOR
2:20

related
commands

None.

EDT—203

EDT Commands
SHOW ENTITY Command

SHOW ENTITY Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW ENTITY WORD
SHOW ENTITY SENTENCE
SHOW ENTITY PARAGRAPH
SHOW ENTITY PAGE

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW ENTITY command lists the current delimiters that determine the
boundaries of four entities: WORD, SENTENCE, PARAGRAPH, and PAGE.
Use the SET ENTITY command to change the boundaries for these entities.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

These examples show the default boundary settings for each entity.
♦SHOW ENTITY WORD
<LF><VT><FF><CR>
♦SHOW ENTITY SENTENCE

. !?
♦SHOW ENTITY PARAGRAPH
<CR><CR>
♦SHOW ENTITY PAGE
<FF>

related
commands

EDT—204

None.

EDT Commands
SHOW FILES Command

SHOW FILES Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW FILES

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW FILES command displays the current input file and output file
for your EDT session. The input file is displayed exactly as you entered it on
the EDIT/EDT command line. If you use the /OUTPUT qualifier in the EDIT
/EDT command line, SHOW FILES displays the output file exactly as you
typed it. If you do not include an output file specification in the command
line, SHOW FILES displays the same information for both the input file and
the output file.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Displays the input and output files when the /OUTPUT qualifier has been
used.
$ EDIT /EDT DATALIST.DAT
♦SHOW FILES
Input File:
Output File:

example 2:

DATALIST.DAT
DATALIST.DAT

Displays the input and output files when no output file is specified in the
EDIT/EDT command line.
$ EDIT /EDT /OUTPUT=SMITH.RNO LETTER.RNO
♦SHOW FILES
Input File:
Output File:

related
commands

LETTER.RNO
SMITH.RNO

None.

EDT—205

EDT Commands
SHOW FNF Command

SHOW FNF Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW FNF

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW FNF command indicates whether SET FNF or SET NOFNF is in
effect. (FNF stands for File Not Found.) The default is SET FNF, meaning
that the message Input file does not exist is displayed whenever you create a
new file with EDT. Put the SET NOFNF command in your startup command
file to suppress that message. SET NOFNF does not suppress the message

Input file does not have standard text file format.

EXAMPLE
Shows the current FNF setting.
♦SHOW FNF
nofnf

related
commands

EDT—206

None.

EDT Commands
SHOW HELP Command

SHOW HELP Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW HELP

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW HELP command tells you which EDT HELP file is currently
available for your editing session. The default HELP file is:
SYS$HELP:EDHELP.HLB

If you or your site has created a customized HELP file, and you are not sure
which HELP file version is currently in use, you can use the SHOW HELP
command to find that information. Use the SET HELP command to access a
different HELP file.

EXAMPLE
First shows the default system HELP file. After you issue a SET HELP
command to access a different HELP file, shows the new current HELP file.
♦SHOW HELP
Help file name:

SYSSHELP:EDTHELP.HLB;1

♦SET HELP SYSSHELP:MYEDTHELP.HLB

♦SHOW HELP
Help file name:

related
commands

SYSSHELP:MYEDTHELP.HLB;3

None.

EDT—207

EDT Commands
SHOW KEY Command

SHOW KEY Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW KEY [GOLD] keypad-key-number
SHOW KEY GOLD character
SHOW KEY [GOLD] CONTROL character
SHOW KEY [GOLD] DELETE
SHOW KEY [GOLD] FUNCTION key-number

DESCRIPTION The SHOW KEY command tells you the definition of any keys that have
keypad editing functions. It shows you the definition for any key that EDT
has preset, such as the keypad keys and the preset control keys, as well
as any key that you have defined or redefined during your editing session.
(Once you have redefined a preset key, SHOW KEY shows only the new
definition.)
Because keypad mode function keys are defined in terms of nokeypad
commands, the definition that is displayed for the SHOW KEY command
uses the nokeypad command syntax. For example, when you ask for the
definition of the CONTROL A key, EDT prints TC. in response.
All preset key definitions, except RESET and GOLD, end with a period. The
period indicates that the operation is set into motion as soon as you press
the key or key sequence. The RESET and GOLD function definitions are
not nokeypad commands; they are special EDT keywords. For a keypad key
to have the RESET function, it must be defined exactly as RESET with no
period. The same is true for GOLD. Neither RESET nor GOLD can be part of
a multicommand definition.
When using the SHOW KEY command, you must type the words GOLD and
CONTROL in your commands. If you are looking for the definition of the
DELETE key, you must type the word DELETE. To find the definition of a
function key on the LK201 keyboard, type the word FUNCTION.
When you want to find the definition for the BACKSPACE, LINEFEED or
TAB key, you must use the key's CONTROL equivalent: CONTROL H for
BACKSPACE, CONTROL J for LINEFEED, and CONTROL I for TAB. For
terminals with LK201 keyboards, you need to use the FUNCTION numbers
for the FI2 and FI3 keys: FUNCTION 24 and FUNCTION 25.
Keypad-key-number refers to EDT's numeric designations for the keypad
keys. For example, the period key on the keypad is number 16, the ENTER
key is number 21, and the down arrow key is number 13.

EDT—208

EDT Commands
SHOW KEY Command

FUNCTION key refers to the additional keys on the LK201 keyboard that
you can define. These include the six keys on the terminal's "editing" keypad,
located above the arrow keys, as well as the keys on the function key row
from F6 through F20. You cannot define keys FI through F5 on the function
key row. EDT uses its own numbers for these keys, ranging from FUNCTION
1 through FUNCTION 99, to encompass the special user define keys (UDKs)
that are allowed on terminals with LK201 keyboards.

EXAMPLE
First shows the default definition for the CTRL/N key sequence. Then shows
the new definition after CTRL/N has been defined with the DEFINE KEY
command.
♦SHOW KEY CONTROL N
No definition
♦DEFINE KEY CONTROL N AS

”?'Nokeypad Command:

♦SHOW KEY CONTROL N
?'Nokeypad Command:

OTHER
EXAMPLES
□

♦SHOW KEY 7
PAGETOP.

Shows the default definition for the 7 key on the keypad.

♦SHOW KEY 16
SEL.

Shows the default definition for the period (.) key on the keypad.

♦SHOW KEY GOLD

RESET

Shows the default definition for GOLD+. keypad key sequence.

♦SHOW KEY CONTROL U
DBL.

Shows the default definition for the CTRL/U key sequence.

♦SHOW KEY DELETE
D-C

Shows the default definitiongfor the DELETE key.

♦SHOW KEY 20
GOLD

Shows the default definition for the GOLD key.

♦SHOW KEY FUNCTION 5
(-16L).

Shows the default definition for the Prev Screen key on the LK201 keyboard
editing keypad.

♦SHOW KEY FUNCTION 24
BL.

Shows the default definition for the FI 2 key on the LK201 function key row.

related
commands

None.

EDT—209

EDT Commands
SHOW KEYPAD Command

SHOW KEYPAD Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW KEYPAD

DESCRIPTION The SHOW KEYPAD command tells you which screen editing mode is in

effect: KEYPAD or NOKEYPAD. Use the SET [NO]KEYPAD command to
reset your session to a different screen mode.

EXAMPLE
Shows the current screen mode setting from line mode when SET
NOKEYPAD is in effect.
♦SHOW KEYPAD
nokeypad

related
commands

EDT—210

None.

EDT Commands
SHOW LINES Command

SHOW LINES Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW LINES

DESCRIPTION The SHOW LINES command tells you the number of lines that EDT is

displaying on the screen at one time. The default (and maximum) number
is 22. Rather than count the number of lines being displayed, you can
use SHOW LINES. The SET LINES command resets the number of lines
per screen. The number of lines ranges from 1 to 22. The SET CURSOR
command resets the cursor positions that activate the scrolling mechanism.

EXAMPLE
First shows the default setting for LINES. Then shows the new value after
SET LINES 10 is in effect.
★SHOW LINES
22
★SET LINES 10

★SHOW LINES
10

related
commands

None.

EDT—211

EDT Commands
SHOW MODE Command

SHOW MODE Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW MODE

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW MODE command tells you which SET MODE command was
most recently issued. The response does not necessarily correspond to your
current editing mode if you have used the line mode CHANGE command,
the nokeypad EX command, or the keypad CTRL/Z function to shift editing
modes.

EXAMPLE
Shows that SET MODE CHANGE was the most recent SET MODE command.
IgoldI +

PAGE
COMMAND

Command: SHOW MODE
Change
ENTER
SUBS

Command:
Change

related
commands

EDT—212

None,

SHOW MODE

EDT Commands
SHOW NUMBERS Command

SHOW NUMBERS Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW NUMBERS

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW NUMBERS command tells you if the EDT line numbers are
being displayed in line mode. When SET NONUMBERS is in effect, EDT
does not display the line numbers in line mode. Your text begins at the left
margin of your screen or paper. However, even when you have used SET
NONUMBERS, EDT continues to keep track of the EDT line numbers. Thus,
you can still use them in line mode range specifiers. The default is SET

NUMBERS.

EXAMPLE
Shows that SET NONUMBERS is in effect.
♦SHOW NUMBERS
nonumber8

related
commands

None.

EDT—213

EDT Commands
SHOW PARAGRAPH Command

SHOW PARAGRAPH Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW PARAGRAPH

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW PARAGRAPH command tells you whether SET PARAGRAPH
WPS or SET PARAGRAPH NO WPS is currently in effect for your editing
session. SET PARAGRAPH NOWPS is the default. SET PARAGRAPH WPS
causes EDT to position the cursor on the first character after the default
paragraph boundary that is not a line terminator.

EXAMPLE
Shows that SET PARAGRAPH NOWPS is in effect.
♦SHOW PARAGRAPH
nowps

related
commands

EDT—214

None.

EDT Commands
SHOW PROMPT Command

SHOW PROMPT Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW PROMPT prompt-type

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW PROMPT command tells you which prompt settings are currently
in effect. The SET PROMPT commands are used with EDT's testing facility
to signal that EDT is ready for simulated user input.
The prompt types cannot be abbreviated. They are:
LINE

KEYPAD

NOKEYPAD

INSERT

INSERTN

QUERY

HCCHANGE

EXAMPLE
These examples show all the default SET PROMPT settings.
♦SHOW PROMPT LINE
<CR><LF>*
♦SHOW PROMPT KEYPAD
♦SHOW PROMPT NOKEYPAD
♦SHOW PROMPT HCCHANGE
<CR><LF>C*
♦SHOW PROMPT INSERT
<CRXLF>!

♦SHOW PROMPT INSERTN
<CR><LF>
♦SHOW PROMPT QUERY
<CR><LF>?

related
commands

None.

EDT—215

EDT Commands
SHOW QUIET Command

SHOW QUIET Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW QUIET

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW QUIET command tells you whether the bell, which sounds when
EDT returns an error message in screen mode, has been turned off. With
SET QUIET in effect, the terminal bell does not sound when EDT issues an
error message in one of the screen modes. SET NOQUIET is the default. SET
QUIET has no effect on the nokeypad BELL command.

EXAMPLE
First shows the default setting. Then shows the new setting after SET QUIET
is in effect.
★SHOW QUIET
noquiet
★SET QUIET

★SHOW QUIET
quiet

related
commands

EDT—216

None.

EDT Commands
SHOW REPEAT Command

SHOW REPEAT Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW REPEAT

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW REPEAT command lets you know whether you can use the
GOLD repeat feature and the SPECINS function in keypad mode. SET
REPEAT is the default. With SET NOREPEAT, you cannot use GOLD and
a digit to repeat a keypad mode function nor can you use the SPECINS
function.

EXAMPLE
Shows the current REPEAT setting.
★SHOW REPEAT
repeat

related
commands

None.

EDT—217

EDT Commands
SHOW SCREEN Command

SHOW SCREEN Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW SCREEN

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW SCREEN command tells you the current screen width setting.
The default screen width is the terminal's width as determined by the
operating system. For VTlOO-type terminals and VT52s the default width
is usually 80. VT52 terminals and VT100-type terminals without advanced
video option (AVO) cannot accommodate screen widths greater than 80
characters. The only valid screen width settings for screen mode editing are
80 and 132. Line mode can use a screen width value from 1 to 132. Use the
SET SCREEN command to change the screen width.

EXAMPLE
First shows the current screen width. Then shows the new screen width after
SET SCREEN 132 is in effect.
♦SHOW SCREEN
80
♦SET SCREEN 132

♦SHOW SCREEN
132

related
commands

EDT—218

None.

EDT Commands
SHOW SEARCH Command

SHOW SEARCH Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW SEARCH

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW SEARCH command tells you the current search parameters that
EDT uses to locate strings in your text. There are three sets of parameters:
1) those that deal with the case or diacritical marks of letters, 2) those that
determine the position of the cursor after the search is completed, and 3)
those that determine what portion of the buffer EDT will search to find the
string.
The first set contains GENERAL (the default), EXACT, WPS, CASE
INSENSITIVE (Cl), AND DIACRITICAL INSENSITIVE (DI). GENERAL
means that EDT ignores case differences and diacritical marks in searching
for strings. EXACT means that all case differences and diacritical marks
are considered when matching the search string. WPS means that the case
of uppercase letters must be matched exactly when locating search strings.
With CASE INSENSITIVE, case is ignored, but diacritical marks are not.
Conversely, with DIACRITICAL INSENSITIVE, diacritical marks are ignored,
but case differences are not.
The second set of parameters, BEGIN and END, determines the new cursor
position after EDT locates the string in a screen mode. With BEGIN, the
default, the cursor is on the first character of the string. END puts the cursor
on the character to the right of the last string character.
The third set of parameters is BOUNDED or UNBOUNDED. UNBOUNDED,
the default, means that EDT searches from the current cursor position to
the top or bottom of the buffer, depending on the direction of the search.
BOUNDED limits the search from the current cursor position to the next
PAGE boundary mark that EDT encounters in the current direction. If
there are no PAGE markers in your text, the effect of BOUNDED and
UNBOUNDED is the same. The default PAGE marker is the form feed
(<FF> —CTRL/L). Use the SET ENTITY PAGE command to change the
PAGE boundary marker.
The search parameters are used in keypad mode with the FIND, FNDNXT,
and SUBS functions. In nokeypad mode, the search parameters are used
with the string entity, the string specifier, and the substitute commands. Line
mode uses search parameters with substitute operations as well as with the
string range specifier.

EDT—219

EDT Commands
SHOW SEARCH Command

EXAMPLE
First, shows the default search settings. Then shows the new ttings after
SET SEARCH EXACT and SET SEARCH END are in effect.
♦SHOW SEARCH
general begin unbounded
♦SET SEARCH EXACT
♦SET SEARCH END

♦SHOW SEARCH
exact end unbounded

related
commands

EDT—220

None.

EDT Commands
SHOW SUMMARY Command

SHOW SUMMARY Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW SUMMARY

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW SUMMARY command tells you whether the SET SUMMARY
feature is in effect for your editing session. If the SET NOSUMMARY
command has been given, EDT does not display the summary file information
after processing either an EXIT or WRITE command. SET SUMMARY is the
default.

EXAMPLE
First, uses the SET NOSUMMARY command to change the default. Then
shows the current SUMMARY setting. Finally, shows the effects of SET
NOSUMMARY when you issue the EXIT command.
*SET NOSUMMARY

♦SHOW SUMMARY
nosummary

♦ EXIT

related
commands

None.

EDT—221

EDT Commands
SHOW TAB Command

SHOW TAB Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW TAB

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW TAB command tells you the current SET TAB value (or size) as
well as the current tab indentation level count. If no tab value is currently in
use, EDT prints notab in response to the SHOW TAB command. NOTAB is
the default. Use the SET TAB command to establish a tab value.
In order for the following commands and functions to have any effect on your
text, you must establish a SET TAB value:

Keypad

Nokeypad

CTRL/A

(tab compute)

CTRL/D

(tab decrement)

CTRL/E

(tab increment)

CTRL/T

(tab adjust)

TADJ

Line Mode

TAB ADJUST

The tab level count displayed by the SHOW TAB command is not affected by
any of the following:
•

The n specifier in the line mode TAB ADJUST command

•

A count specifier with the nokeypad TADJ command

•

A repeat count used with the keypad CTRL/T function

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Shows the default TAB setting.
♦SHOW TAB
notab

example 2:

Shows the TAB setting after SET TAB 10 is in effect.
♦SET TAB 10

♦SHOW TAB
tab size 10; tab level 1

example 3l

First sets the SET TAB value to 5 and shifts to keypad mode. Then uses
CTRL/A to reset the tab level count. Shows the new tab size and tab level.
♦SET TAB 5
♦CHANGE

EDT—222

EDT Commands
SHOW TAB Command

[gold]

+g + □

ICTRL/A]
I GOLD | +1
PAGE
I
1-1
[COMMAND]

Command:

SHOW TAB

ENTER
SUBS

tab size 5; tab level 4

related
commands

None,

EDT—223

EDT Commands
SHOW TERMINAL Command

SHOW TERMINAL Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW TERMINAL

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW TERMINAL command shows the terminal settings that are
currently in effect for your editing session. Normally, EDT receives the
terminal settings from the operating system when you start your editing
session. You can use the SET TERMINAL command to change these default
settings if EDT is receiving incorrect or insufficient information about the
terminal you are using.
There are four groups of terminal settings. The first group indicates the
terminal type: VT100, VT52, HCPY (hardcopy). The second group refers to
scrolling regions in your terminal: SCROLL, NOSCROLL. The third group
refers to the number of bits that your terminal uses to represent an individual
character: EIGHTBIT, NOEIGHTBIT. The fourth group refers to internal
editing features built into the terminal: EDIT, NOEDIT.

EXAMPLE
Shows terminal settings for a variety of terminals.
General VT 100-type terminal with advanced video option
♦SHOW TERMINAL
VT100 scroll noeightbit noedit

VT52 terminal
♦SHOW TERMINAL
VT52 noscroll noeightbit noedit

Hardcopy terminal or terminal not supported for screen mode editing.
♦SHOW TERMINAL
Hardcopy noscroll noeightbit noedit

VT102 terminal
♦SHOW TERMINAL
VT100 scroll noeightbit edit

related
commands

EDT—224

None.

EDT Commands
SHOW TEXT Command

SHOW TEXT Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW TEXT END
SHOW TEXT PAGE

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW TEXT command tells you what text EDT is currently displaying
for the <FF> page mark or the [EOB] (end of buffer) mark. Use the SET
TEXT PAGE and SET TEXT END commands to customize these messages.
Neither the SET TEXT END command nor the SET TEXT PAGE command
has any effect on the text you are editing.

EXAMPLE
Shows the new text that EDT will display in place of <FF> page mark or the
[EOB] (end of buffer) mark after you have issued the SET TEXT commands.
♦SET TEXT END "No more lines in this buffer."
♦SET TEXT PAGE "Oh no, not another page!"

♦SHOW TEXT END
No more lines in this buffer.

♦SHOW TEXT PAGE
Oh no, not another page!

related
commands

None.

EDT—225

EDT Commands
SHOW TRUNCATE Command

SHOW TRUNCATE Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW TRUNCATE

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW TRUNCATE command tells you whether SET TRUNCATE
or SET NOTRUNCATE is currently in effect for your editing session. The
default is SET TRUNCATE. In screen editing, NOTRUNCATE causes EDT
to display the portion of a line that exceeds the current screen width on the
next line. SET NOTRUNCATE does not add line terminators to your text.
Use SET WRAP to add line terminators to your text when inserting text in
keypad mode or filling text in all three editing modes. Lines exceeding the
current SET SCREEN width are always wrapped in line mode.

EXAMPLE
Shows that SET NOTRUNCATE is currently in effect.
♦SHOW TRUNCATE
notruncate

related
commands

EDT—226

None.

EDT Commands
SHOW VERIFY Command

SHOW VERIFY Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW VERIFY

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW VERIFY command tells you whether SET VERIFY or SET
NOVERIFY is currently in effect for your editing session. If SET VERIFY is in
effect, EDT displays the commands in the startup command file or EDT macro
that are being processed. SET NOVERIFY is the default.

EXAMPLE
Shows that the default NOVERIFY is in effect.
♦SHOW VERIFY
noverify

related
commands

None.

EDT—227

EDT Commands
SHOW VERSION Command

SHOW VERSION Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW VERSION

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW VERSION command displays the version of EDT that is being
used by your operating system. The command also displays EDT's copyright
notice. There is no way for you to reset the version of EDT currently available
on your system from within EDT. (EDT has no SET VERSION command.)
However, this information is useful when reporting EDT problems.
The version syntax is:
support version.update-edit patch

Support is a letter that indicates the support status of the version of EDT that
you are using. The possible letters are:
B

Benchmark configuration; no support

Demonstration configuration; no support

Special customer configuration; negotiated support

Field test version; not supported after field test ends

Released version; full support

Experimental version; no support.

Version is the version number. If it does not match the number on the title
page of this manual, the book does not apply to your version of EDT. Update
represents an update to the base version. The update involves minor changes
to the documentation. Check to be sure that this number is the same as that
given in the front of this manual.
Edit represents a minor change to EDT that has no documentation impact.
Patch is an optional letter, which represents a minor change to EDT with no
documentation impact. The change has been applied by means of a binary
patch.
When you fill out a Software Performance Report (SPR) for EDT, be sure to
include the full version number that EDT displays when you issue the SHOW
VERSION command. Use the space provided on the SPR form to enter the
version number.

EDT—228

EDT Commands
SHOW VERSION Command

EXAMPLE
Explains the meaning of the version number.
♦SHOW VERSION
V3.00-1

This is a fully supported released version. The version number is 3. The 00
indicates that this version has no updates. The 1 in the edit position indicates
a minor change that has no impact on the documentation. No patch letter is
present.

related
commands

None.

EDT—229

EDT Commands
SHOW WORD Command

SHOW WORD Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW WORD

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW WORD command tells you how EDT is interpreting word
boundaries when you use the word entity in keypad or nokeypad mode.
When NODELIMITER is in effect, EDT does not consider word delimiters,
such as line terminators and horizontal tabs, to be words themselves. (The
space word boundary is always considered to be part of a word, never as a
separate word.) The default is SET WORD DELIMITER.

EXAMPLE
Shows that SET WORD NODELIMITER is currently in effect.
♦SHOW WORD
nodelimiter

related
commands

EDT—230

None.

EDT Commands
SHOW WRAP Command

SHOW WRAP Command—Line
SYNTAX

SHOW WRAP

DESCRIPTION

The SHOW WRAP command tells you if a SET WRAP command is in effect
and if so, what the SET WRAP value is. SET WRAP has two functions. It
causes EDT to wrap lines when you are inserting text in keypad mode and
it sets the right margin for all three EDT FILL functions. SET WRAP always
overrides the current SET SCREEN width in determining the line length for
FILL functions.
In the screen modes, SET NOTRUNCATE wraps lines that are already in
your buffer for display purposes only; it has no effect on the text.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Shows that the default NOWRAP setting is in effect.
♦SHOW WRAP
nowrap

example 2:

Shows that SET WRAP 50 is currently in effect.
♦SHOW WRAP
50

related
commands

None.

EDT—231

EDT Commands
/STAY QUALIFIER

/STAY QUALIFIER—Line
SYNTAX

/STAY

DESCRIPTION

The /STAY qualifier is used with the line mode TYPE command. All EDT
qualifiers must be preceded by a slash. /STAY keeps the EDT pointer at its
current position, regardless of which lines have just been displayed by the
TYPE command.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Shows that EDT remains on line 35 even after typing lines 2 through 4.
35

whenever you are ready to send me the information,

♦TYPE 2 THRU 4 /STAY
2
3
4

August 17,

1985

Dr. Hugo Arndt

♦TYPE .
35

example 2:

whenever you are ready to send me the information,

Displays the contents of the PASTE buffer while still in the MAIN buffer.
♦TYPE =PASTE /STAY
1
2
[EOB]

whether or not you have made your decision.
But, of course, we would welcome your joining

♦TYPE .
284

related
commands

EDT—232

None.

the details of our current business plan.

EDT Commands
string specifier

string specifier—Line
SYNTAX

"string"
'string'
/string-1/string-2/

DESCRIPTION

The string specifier is generally used either to locate characters in a buffer
or to replace the located characters. When a string specifier is used to locate
a piece of text, it is referred to as the search string. All three editing modes
use search strings. Generally a search string must be enclosed in quotation
marks (single (') or double (")) to distinguish it from other characters in the
command line.
When strings are used in EDT substitute commands, they are generally
referred to as string-1 or string-2. String-1 is always a search string. EDT
must locate that string and then replace it with string-2, the substitute
string. Strings in substitute commands must be surrounded by delimiters
to separate them from the other characters in the command line. A variety of
nonalphanumeric characters can be used as delimiters as long as the delimiter
does not appear in either string-1 or string-2. (In line mode you cannot use
the percent sign (%) or the underscore (_) as string delimiters.) All delimiters
used in a single substitute command line must be identical.
Whenever you issue a search string, EDT overwrites the contents of the
search buffer. Similarly, when you issue a substitute string, EDT overwrites
the contents of the substitute buffer.
The search and substitute buffers cannot be edited or entered. Their names
never appear in the SHOW BUFFER list. You can use the nokeypad CLSS
(clear search string) command to delete the contents of the search buffer.
EDT has a number of ways to perform searches. See the discussion of the
SET SEARCH command for information about the EDT search parameters.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Deletes the line containing the string afternoon.
♦DELETE "afternoon"

example 2:

Displays the line containing the string January.
♦TYPE "January"

example 3:

Finds the next occurrence of the string line and replaces it with the string
keypad.
♦SUBSTITUTE NEXT/line/keypad/

EDT—233

EDT Commands
SUBSTITUTE Command

SUBSTITUTE Command—Line
SYNTAX

SUBSTITUTE//sfr/ngr- 1 ]/string-2/ [=buffer] [range]
//BRIE F[:n]] //QUERY7 //NOTYP E/

DESCRIPTION

The SUBSTITUTE command replaces string-1 with string-2 everywhere
in the specified range. If no range is given, the substitution is made on
the first occurrence of the string in the current line. You must reissue the
SUBSTITUTE command or use the SUBSTITUTE NEXT command to change
subsequent occurrences.
String-1 and string-2 must be surrounded by delimiters. You can use any
nonalphanumeric character as a delimiter (except the percent sign (%) and the
underscore (_)) provided that the character does not appear in either string-1
or string-2. The three delimiters must be identical. Notice that the delimiters
are not optional.
The SUBSTITUTE command displays the lines in which substitutions were
made as well as a message indicating the number of substitutions. If EDT is
unable to process the command, it prints the message No substitutions.
The SUBSTITUTE command can take several specifiers and qualifiers.
The range specifier tells EDT to make as many substitutions as there are
occurrences of string-1 in the range. If your range covers only one line, but
there are two occurrences of string-1 in that line, both substitutions are made.
Without the range specifier, only the first substitution would be made.
You can also perform substitutions in other buffers. If you do not use a range
specifier following the buffer name, all occurrences of string-1 in the specified
buffer are found and replaced with string-2. EDT leaves you in the specified
buffer. You must use another command to return to your original buffer.
You do not have to include both string-1 and string-2 in your SUBSTITUTE
command, but you must include at least one of them. If you omit string1, EDT always uses the current search string. If you omit string-2, EDT
always deletes string-1 and inserts nothing. If you use a string for range,
EDT considers that to be the current search string if string-1 is omitted. The
following samples show what happens:
This
This
This
This
This

is
is
is
is
is

file
file
file
file
file

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

SUBSTITUTE/file/buffer/
SUBSTITUTE///
SUBSTITUTE/file//
SUBSTITUTE//buffer/
SUBSTITUTE//buffer/ "e."

This is buffer A.
Search string cannot be null
This is C.
This is buffer D.
This is file buffer

The /BRIEF qualifier limits the number of characters displayed for each line
in which a substitution is made. The default value for the n specifier is 10.
By using the n specifier, you can have more or fewer than 10 characters
displayed. When the /BRIEF qualifier is not used, the entire line is printed,
unless the /NOTYPE qualifier is in effect.

EDT—234

EDT Commands
SUBSTITUTE Command

The /QUERY qualifier prints the line containing string-1 before the
substitution is made. EDT then prompts you with the question mark (?)
to let you decide whether to make the substitution in that line or go on to the
next occurrence of string-1. Type one of these four responses to the question
mark prompt: Y (YES), N (NO), A (ALL), or Q (QUIT).
When you use the /NOTYPE qualifier, EDT does not display the lines after
making the substitutions. However, EDT does print the message that tells
you how many substitutions were made.

Note: The slashes preceding the qualifiers /BRIEF, /QUERY, and /NOTYPE
are signals to EDT, not delimiters. Only the slash can indicate that the
following letters refer to a qualifier.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Replaces the first occurrence of this editor with EDT on the current line.
95

with this editor.

This editor can also

♦SUBSTITUTE/this editor/EDT/
95
with EDT.
1 substitution

example 2:

This editor can also

Replaces both occurrences of this editor with EDT on the current line.
95

with this editor.

This editor can also

♦SUBSTITUTE/this editor/EDT/ 95
95
with EDT.
2 substitutions

EDT can also

(Note that SUBSTITUTE/this editor/EDT/ . produces the same results.)

example 3:

Replaces all occurrences of April 19 with May 16 in lines 15 through 30.
15
16

The meeting is scheduled for
April 19, 1985 at 7:00 p.m. at the Campus Inn.

29
30

All programmers planning to attend the April 19th
meeting should contact Marsha Lambert as soon as

♦SUBSTITUTE/April 19/May 16/ 15 THRU 30
16
May 16, 1985 at 7:00 p.m. at the Campus Inn.
29
All programmers planning to attend the May 16th
2 substitutions

example 4:

Replaces 2B with 1C for the entire buffer, but uses the /QUERY qualifier to
let you decide individually which instances to replace. Note that the delimiter
character is the exclamation point (!).

EDT—235

EDT Commands
SUBSTITUTE Command

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

John Hershey
Max Greenstein
Jennifer Grogan
Larry Sadler
Quincy Marcus
Shirley Green
Thomas Orlovsky
Theodore Rossmann
Marion Andrews

2A
2B
2B
2B
2A
2A
2B
2B
2B

♦SUBSTITUTE!2B!1C! WHOLE /QUERY
2

Max Greenstein

2
3

Max Greenstein
Jennifer Grogan

1C
2B

Larry Sadler

4
7

Larry Sadler
Thomas Orlovsky

1C
2B

Theodore Rossmann

8
Theodore Rossmann
9
Marion Andrews
4 substitutions

1C
1C

?N
?Y

?N
?A

example 5:

Replaces PICTURE with PIC on lines 21 through 23. Only the number of
substitutions made appears, not the altered lines. Uses the TYPE command to
verify the change.
21
22
23

00120
00121
00122

STUDENT-CARD
05 STUDENT-NAME
05 SOC-SEC-NO

PICTURE IS A(20)
PICTURE IS 9(9)

♦SUBSTITUTE+PICTURE+PIC+ 21 THRU 23 /NOTYPE
2 substitutions
♦TYPE 22 THRU 23
22
23

example 6:

00121
00122

05
05

STUDENT-NAME
S0C-SEC-N0

Replaces the string 125 State with the string 1001 Main. Displays only the
first 20 characters on the line after the substitution is made.
15

125 State Street, North Adams, Massachusetts

♦SUBSTITUTE1125 State'1001 Main' /BRIEF:20
15
1001 Main Street, No
1 substitution

related
commands

EDT—236

PIC IS A(20)
PIC IS 9(9)

— Keypad—SUBS
— Nokeypad—S (substitute)

EDT Commands
SUBSTITUTE NEXT Command

SUBSTITUTE NEXT Command—Line
SYNTAX

[SUBSTITUTE] NEXT[/[string-1 ]/string-2/]

DESCRIPTION

The SUBSTITUTE NEXT command causes EDT to search for the next
occurrence of string-1 and replace it with string-2. The SUBSTITUTE NEXT
command takes neither a buffer specifier nor a range specifier. It can perform
only one substitution at a time. Hence EDT never prints the number of
substitutions for the command. If EDT cannot find string-1, it stops at the end
of the buffer. No message is printed.
Since the word SUBSTITUTE is optional in the SUBSTITUTE NEXT
command, this command is sometimes referred to simply as the NEXT
command. If you do include SUBSTITUTE or its abbreviation—S—in
your command line, be sure to put a space before the word NEXT or its
abbreviation—N.
The string-1 and string-2 specifiers must be surrounded by delimiters. You
can use any nonalphanumeric character as a delimiter (except the percent sign
(%) and the underscore (_)), provided that the character does not appear in
either string-1 or string-2. The three delimiters must be identical.
The string-1 or string-2 specifier can sometimes be omitted from the
SUBSTITUTE NEXT command. If you omit string-1, EDT always uses the
current search string. If you omit string-2, but supply string-1, EDT deletes
the search string from the text and replaces it with nothing. If you supply
neither string-1 nor string-2 and do not include the delimiters, EDT uses the
current search string for string-1 and the current substitute string for string-2.
If you omit both strings, but include the delimiters, EDT displays an error
message.
The following samples show what happens when you omit one or both string
specifiers:

This
This
This
This
This

is
is
is
is
is

file
file
file
file
file

A
B
C
D
E

SUBSTITUTE
SUBSTITUTE
SUBSTITUTE
SUBSTITUTE
SUBSTITUTE

NEXT/file/buffer/
NEXT///
NEXT/file//
NEXT//buffer/
NEXT

This is buffer A.
Search string cannot be null
This is C.
This is buffer D.
This is buffer E.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Moves to line 6 to replace formula with FORmula.
5
6

FORTRAN gets its name from the two words
formula and translation.

♦SUBSTITUTE NEXT/formula/FORmula/
6

FORmula and translation.

EDT—237

EDT Commands
SUBSTITUTE NEXT Command

example 2:

Uses SUBSTITUTE to replace 84 with 85 on line 12. Then uses SUBSTITUTE
NEXT without any strings to make the substitution on line 13.
12
13

January 1, 1985
May 30. 1985

♦SUBSTITUTE/84/85/ 12
12
January 1,
1 substitution

1985

♦SUBSTITUTE NEXT
13

example 3:

May 30.

1985

First replaces the VT52 with the VT100 on line 59. Then using the same
search string, replaces it with a VT100.
58
59
60
61

EDT is optimized for use on a high-speed
terminal with a keypad, such as the VT52.
You can use the VT52 keypad both as a
numerical keypad and as an editing keypad.

♦SUBSTITUTE NEXT/the VT52/the VT100/
59

terminal with a keypad, such as the VT100.

♦SUBSTITUTE NEXT//a VT100/
60

example 4:

You can use a VT100 keypad both as a

Replaces the string input-output with the string I/O. Uses the colon as the
delimiter character.
37

Computer terminals are input-output devices.

♦SUBSTITUTE NEXT:input-output:I/O:
37

related
commands

EDT—238

Computer terminals are I/O devices.

— Keypad—SUBS
— Nokeypad—SN (substitute next)

EDT Commands
TAB ADJUST Command

TAB ADJUST Command—Line
SYNTAX

TAB ADJUST [~]n [=buffer][range]

DESCRIPTION

The TAB ADJUST command enables you to indent whole lines to format
outlines, indent computer programs, or create other types of layered text.
In order for the command to work, you must establish a SET TAB value
for your editing session. (The default is SET NOTAB.) The TAB ADJUST
command cannot be used to arrange text into columns.
The n specifier is the multiple that EDT applies to the SET TAB value to
determine how far to indent the line(s). For example, if your SET TAB value
is 5, you must use an n specifier of 3 to indent a line 15 columns. The lines
of text are always moved to the right unless you use a minus sign before the
n specifier. The minus sign enables you to move indented text back toward
the left margin. Notice that the n specifier is not optional. You must include
a value of 1 to indent the text one tab stop.
When you specify a range, EDT indents every line specified by the range.
If you include a buffer specifier with no range, the entire buffer is indented.
When you omit both the buffer and range specifiers, EDT assumes that
you have an active select range. Use the keypad SELECT function or the
nokeypad SEL command to establish a select range. The select range can
contain only whole lines.
To find out the current SET TAB value, use the SHOW TAB command. The
level count displayed by the SHOW TAB command is not affected by the TAB
ADJUST n specifier. The level count is only affected by the tab compute, tab
decrement, and tab increment functions in the keypad and nokeypad modes.
To see the results of the TAB ADJUST command as you are working on the
text, use the SET NONUMBERS command. With SET NUMBERS in effect,
the EDT line numbers interfere with the indentation display.

EXAMPLE
First establishes a SET TAB value of 3 and issues the SET NONUMBERS
command. Then indents lines 2 through 5 so that each line moves one tab
stop farther over than the line above. Finally moves lines 4 and 5 to the left
to change the format.
1
2
3
4
5

This
This
This
This
This

is
is
is
is
is

the
the
the
the
the

first line.
second line.
third line.
fourth line.
fifth line.

♦SET TAB 3
♦SET NONUMBERS
♦TAB ADJUST 1 2
♦TAB ADJUST 2 3
♦TAB ADJUST 3 4
♦TAB ADJUST 4 5
♦TYPE WHOLE

EDT—239

EDT Commands
TAB ADJUST Command

This is the first line.
This is the second line.
This is the third line.
This is the fourth line.
This is the fifth line.
♦TAB ADJUST -2 4
♦TAB ADJUST -4 5
♦TYPE WHOLE
This is the first line.
This is the second line.
This is the third line.
This is the fourth line.
This is the fifth line.

related
commands

EDT—240

— Keypad—CTRL/T
— Nokeypad—TADJ (tab adjust)

EDT Commands
TYPE Command

TYPE Command—Line
SYNTAX

TYPE [=buffer][range///BRIEF[:nJ]//STAY]

DESCRIPTION

The TYPE command is used to display lines of text at your terminal. If you
omit both the buffer and range specifiers, EDT prints the current line. You
can use the range specifier to print one or more lines anywhere in the current
or specified buffer. If you use the buffer specifier without a range specifier,
EDT moves to the named buffer and prints all its lines. (Use CTRL/C if you
want to stop EDT from printing all the lines in a long buffer.) When you
include the buffer specifier, EDT moves to the named buffer and remains
there unless you use the /STAY qualifier.
The /BRIEF qualifier signals EDT to display only part of each line. If you
omit the n specifier, EDT prints the first 10 characters (the default). Use the n
specifier to have EDT print more or less than 10 characters per line.
The /STAY qualifier instructs EDT to leave its pointer at the current line
rather than relocate it at the first line of the buffer or range being displayed.
Even if the lines being printed are in another buffer, the /STAY qualifier
maintains EDT's position as it was before you issued the TYPE command.
Thus, you can display the contents of another buffer without having EDT
transfer you to that buffer.
The line mode <null> command is similar to TYPE, but it has no command
word and cannot take any qualifiers.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Displays the current line.
5
6
7
8
9

All classes begin at 8:30 a.m., unless otherwise
noted.
Please be prompt.
Course material has
been designed so that it fills the entire scheduled
time.
Breakfast will be provided, so no need to
stop for a cup of coffee on the way to class.

♦ TYPE
5

example 2:

All classes begin at 8:30 a.m., unless otherwise

Using the same text as in Example 1, displays lines 6 through 8.
*TYPE 6 THRU 8
6
7
8

noted.
Please be prompt.
Course material has
been designed so that it fills the entire scheduled
time.
Breakfast will be provided, so no need to

EDT—241

EDT Commands
TYPE Command

example 3:

Using the same text as in Example 1, displays only the first five characters of
line 9.
♦TYPE 9 /BRIEF:5
9

example 4:

stop

Using the same text as in Example 1, displays line 5, but the current line does
not change.
♦TYPE 5 /STAY
5

All classes begin at 8:30 a.m., unless otherwise

♦TYPE
9

example 5:

stop for a cup of coffee on the way to class.

Moves to the PASTE buffer and displays every line.
♦TYPE =PASTE
1
2
[EOB]

example 6:

for the meeting.
When you are ready to put
together an agenda, contact the Sales Manager

Returns to the MAIN buffer and displays lines 5 through 9.
♦TYPE =MAIN 5 THRU 9
5
6
7
8
9

related
commands

EDT—242

— Nokeypad—"move"

EDT Commands
WRITE Command

WRITE Command—Line
SYNTAX

WRITE file-specification [=buffer] [range]
[/S E QU E N C E[:initial]: increment]]]

DESCRIPTION

The WRITE command copies text from an EDT buffer to an external file. The
WRITE command has no effect on the buffer you are editing or the contents
of any buffer in your EDT session. When you omit both the buffer and range
specifiers from your WRITE command, EDT copies the entire contents of
the current buffer to the external file. If you use the buffer specifier with no
range, EDT copies the entire contents of the named buffer. When you issue
a WRITE command with a buffer specifier, EDT does not move to the named
buffer. You are still in the same buffer from which you issued the WRITE
command.
The /SEQUENCE qualifier instructs EDT to put sequence numbers in the
external file for use in subsequent editing sessions. The sequence numbers
used with the WRITE command are not part of the text of the external file (as
is the case with the PRINT command). However, these sequence numbers
become EDT line numbers when the file is edited with EDT. (The sequence
numbers are ignored if you use the INCLUDE command to add the file to
an EDT session already in progress.) Use the RESEQUENCE command to
renumber your text when you are working in EDT.
The WRITE command assigns EDT's default file attributes to the file it creates.

EXAMPLES
Q

* WRITE DATA.DAT

* WRITE LETTER1.RNO 9 THRU 87

Copies the entire current buffer to the file DATA.DAT.
Copies lines 9 through 87 in the current buffer to the file LETTER1.RNO.
g

* WRITE MEM011125.MEM =REVED11125

Copies the entire buffer REVED11125 to the file MEMOH125.RNO.
Q

*WRITE YESNO.BAS =YESNOFIXD 123 THRU END

Copies lines 123 through the end in the buffer YESNOFIXD to the file
YESNO.BAS.
0

*WRITE OVER.DAT /SEQUENCE:10:5

Copies the entire current buffer to the file OVER.DAT. Assigns sequence
numbers to the external file. The numbers begin with 10 and increment by 5.

related
commands

None,

EDT—243

EDT Commands
ADV (Advance) Command

ADV (Advance) Command—IMokeypad
SYNTAX

ADV

DESCRIPTION

The ADV (advance) command sets the direction for subsequent editing work
to forward (to the right of the cursor and down toward the end of the buffer).
When ADV is in effect, you can move backward for a single command by
preceding that command with a minus sign (-).
ADV can be used with a search string to ensure that the direction of the
search is forward. In this case, ADV follows the quoted string ("New Jersey"
ADV). The current direction is now forward.
If a keypad key whose definition starts with the ADV command is used to
process a prompt, the function of that key is also performed. For example,
if you have defined a key to be ADV BR., when you press that key to send
the search string to EDT in response to the Search for: prompt, EDT not only
processes the search, but also the rest of the ADV BR. definition, thus moving
the cursor to the top of the buffer.
ADV is the default and remains in effect until you give the BACK command.

EXAMPLE
Sets the direction to forward. Moves the cursor to the period in Md. and
deletes the period. Uses the minus sign to reverse direction for the CHGCC
command.
Mr. John H. Jones
Digital Equipment Corporation
6707 Whitestone Road
Baltimore, Md.
21207
ADV
HMd. "
2C
DC
-CHGCC
Mr. John H. Jones
Digital Equipment Corporation
6707 Whitestone Road
Baltimore, MD 21207

related
commands

EDT—244

- Keypad—ADVANCE

EDT Commands
APPEND Command

APPEND Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[+l-][count] APPEND [+l-][count]entity[=buffer]

DESCRIPTION

The APPEND command deletes the specified entity from the current buffer
and adds it to the end of either the PASTE buffer (the default) or the specified
buffer. The previous contents of the PASTE or specified buffer remain in that
buffer; nothing is deleted. The appended entity is inserted below the text that
is already in the buffer.

EXAMPLE
Alphabetizes the list of names using CUT, APPEND, and PASTE.
Joe Spitzer
Trudi Schutz
Becky Santerre
Kathy Waldbauer
CUTL

(Move the cursor to the T in Trudi.)
APPENDL

(Move the cursor to the J in Joe.)
PASTE
Becky Santerre
Trudi Schutz
Joe Spitzer
Kathy Waldbauer

related
commands

- Keypad—APPEND

EDT—245

EDT Commands
ASC (ASCII) Command

ASC (ASCII) Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[number] ASC

DESCRIPTION

The ASC (ASCII) command causes EDT to insert a special character into the
text. The inserted character corresponds to the decimal equivalent number
specified with the ASC command. EDT inserts the character to the left of the
cursor. You must use a separate ASC command for each different character
you want to insert.
If you do not supply the number specifier with the ASC command, EDT
inserts the null character—~(g) (decimal value 00). The number specifier can
range from 0 to 255.
In order to use a count specifier with the ASC command, you must enclose
the decimal number and the ASC command word in parentheses, for
example, 5(12ASC).
The ASC command is most useful when you need to add control and other
"nonprinting" characters to your text. You can use the circumflex command
(~) to insert ASCII control characters (decimal value 0 through 31) in both
text and EDT command lines.

EXAMPLE
Inserts three bell control characters (CTRL/G) at the end of a line.
Today is Halloween!
3(7ASC)
Today is Halloween!~G~G~G

related
commands

EDT—246

- Keypad—SPECINS

EDT Commands
BACK (Backup) Command

BACK (Backup) Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

BACK

DESCRIPTION

The BACK command sets the direction for subsequent editing work to
backward (to the left of the cursor and up toward the beginning of the
buffer).
After giving the BACK command, you can move forward for a single
command by preceding that command with a plus sign (+).
You can use BACK with a search string to set the direction of the search to
backward. In this case, BACK follows the quoted string ("New Jersey" BACK).
The current direction is now backward.
If a keypad key whose definition starts with the BACK command is used to
process a prompt, the function of that key is also performed. For example, if
you have defined a key to be BACK BR., when you press that key to send
the search string to EDT in response to the Search for: prompt, EDT not
only processes the search, but also the rest of the BACK BR. definition, thus
moving the cursor to the top of the buffer.
To change EDT's direction to forward, use the ADV command.

EXAMPLE
Sets the direction to backward for the "move" command. The plus sign
reverses direction for the CHGUW command only.
Mr. Edward Johnson
Technical Writer
Digital Equipment Corporation
Nashua. Nh 03061
BACK
2W
+CHGUW
Mr. Edward Johnson
Technical Writer
Digital Equipment Corporation
Nashua. NH 03061

related
commands

— Keypad—BACKUP

EDT—247

EDT Commands
BELL Command

BELL Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

BELL

DESCRIPTION

The BELL command is designed primarily for use in keypad key definitions.
It causes the terminal bell (buzzer) to sound when the command is processed.

EXAMPLE
Puts the BELL command in a keypad key definition.
♦DEFINE KEY GOLD L AS "2500DL BELL."

The key sequence GOLD/L is defined to delete 2500 lines. When EDT
finishes deleting the lines, it sounds the terminal bell, letting you know that
the work is complete.

related
commands

EDT—248

None.

EDT Commands
buffer specifier

buffer specifier—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

=?buffer name

DESCRIPTION

The buffer specifier consists of two elements, the signal to EDT that the
following characters are a buffer name and the buffer name itself.
The specifier buffer refers to the name of a location used by EDT to store
text during an editing session. When you begin your EDT session, a copy of
your file is put in the buffer called MAIN. EDT also creates a buffer called
PASTE for use with the CUT, PASTE, and APPEND commands. When you
exit from EDT using the EXIT command, a copy of the MAIN buffer text is
put in an external file. All other buffers created during your editing session
disappear. If you use QUIT to leave EDT, no copy of the MAIN buffer is
made.
You create additional buffers during an EDT session each time you specify a
new buffer name in a line or nokeypad command. For example, the command
CUT=LIST creates a buffer called LIST.
Buffer names can have more than 80 alphanumeric characters. Only letters,
digits, and the underscore character (_) can be used to create buffer names. A
letter must always be the first character in the name.
You can edit any buffer you create, as well as the MAIN and PASTE buffers.
Text can be copied or moved from one buffer to another. The SHOW
BUFFER command lists all the accessible buffers in your editing session and
indicates the current buffer by preceding the name with an equal sign (=).
EDT has several storage areas that you cannot access. These include the
delete character, delete line, delete word, search, and substitute buffers. The
first three are used only in keypad and nokeypad editing. These buffers
contain the most recent character, line, or word deleted by the respective
delete functions. The search buffer is used by the various find, substitute, and
change case functions. The substitute buffer is used only by substitute
commands. Storage areas also exist for entity and prompt definitions.
Although you have some control over what goes into these various buffers,
you cannot enter them or edit them, and their names never appear in the
SHOW BUFFER list.

EXAMPLES
Q

CUT6L=SAVE

This nokeypad command moves six lines to the buffer called SAVE. EDT
remains in the current buffer.
2

PASTE=PAR10

This nokeypad command inserts the contents of the buffer called PAR 10 to
the left of the cursor.

EDT—249

EDT Commands
CHGC (Change Case) Command

CHGC (Change Case)
Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[+l—][count] CHGC[+l-][count]entity

DESCRIPTION

The CHGC (change case) command causes the case of all letters within the
specified entity to be changed to the opposite case. For example, if the entity
is W (word), Boston becomes BOSTON.
The CHGL (change case lower) command only changes uppercase letters
to lowercase. Conversely, the CHGU (change case upper) command only
changes lowercase letters to uppercase.
When CHGC is used with the SR (select range) entity and there is no active
select range, the case of one or more letters will be changed, depending
on the cursor location. See the chart under the description of the keypad
CHNGCASE function for more information.

EXAMPLE
Changes the case of the M in Maynard and then changes the case of the
entire word so that Maynard has all uppercase letters.
Maynard,

CHGCC

(Move the cursor back to the m in maynard.)
CHGCW
MAYNARD^ MA

related
commands

- Keypad—CHNGCASE

EDT Commands
CHGL (Change Case Lower) Command

CHGL (Change Case Lower)
Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[+l-][count] CHGL[+I—][count]entity

DESCRIPTION

The CHGL (change case lower) command changes all uppercase letters within
the specified entity to be lowercase. Letters that are already lowercase remain
unchanged.
To change lowercase letters to uppercase, use CHGU (change case upper). To
change all letters to their opposite case use CHGC (change case).
When CHGL is used with the SR (select range) entity and there is no active
select range, the case of one or more letters might be changed, depending
on the cursor location. See the chart under the description of the keypad
CHNGCASE function for more information. Remember, however, that for
CHGL, only uppercase letters are changed to lowercase; lowercase letters
remain the same.

EXAMPLE
Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase for all three words in the line.
Word Processing/Small Systems
CHGL3W
word processing/small systems

related
commands

- Keypad—CHNGCASE

EDT—251

EDT Commands
CHGU (Change Case Upper) Command

CHGU (Change Case Upper)
Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[+1 -][count] C H G \J[+l-][count]en tity

DESCRIPTION

The CHGU (change case upper) command changes all lowercase letters
to uppercase within the entity. Letters that are already uppercase remain
unchanged.
CHGL (change case lower) changes all uppercase letters to lowercase. CHGC
(change case) changes all lowercase letters to uppercase and all uppercase
letters to lowercase.
When CHGU is used with the SR (select range) entity and there is no active
select range, the case of one or more letters will be changed, depending
on the cursor location. See the chart under the description of the keypad
CHNGCASE function for more information. Remember, however, that for
CHGU, only lowercase letters are changed to uppercase; uppercase letters
remain the same.

EXAMPLE
Changes all lowercase letters to uppercase for the entire line.
The United States of America
CHGUL
THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA

related
commands

EDT—252

- Keypad—CHNGCASE

EDT Commands
"(Circumflex) Command

1(Circumflex) Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[count]''character

DESCRIPTION

The circumflex (*) command enables you to insert ASCII control characters
(decimal value 0 through 31) in your text or enter them in nokeypad
command lines. When you type the circumflex first and then a character
from the keyboard, EDT interprets the two symbols as one control character.
The ASCII control characters are formed from the combination of the control
key with the 26 letters and the following nonalphanumeric characters: the at
sign (@), the backslash (\), square brackets ([ ]) the circumflex (*), and the
underscore (_).
You can use the ASC command to enter any character from the DEC
Multinational Character Set list by using the decimal equivalent values 0
through 255. The circumflex works only for characters with decimal values 0
through 31.

EXAMPLE
Uses the main keyboard characters circumflex (~) and Z to complete the
single line form of the nokeypad I (insert) command.
Mail to Digital Equipment Corporation.
I, Merrimack. NH

03054~Z

Mail to Digital Equipment Corporation, Merrimack, NH

related
commands

03054.

— Keypad—SPECINS

EDT—253

EDT Commands
CLSS (Clear Search String) Command

CLSS (Clear Search String)
Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

CLSS

DESCRIPTION

The CLSS (clear search string) command clears the search string that is
currently in the search buffer. After you issue the CLSS command, the search
buffer is empty. This command can be used to redefine keypad keys that
include SR (select range) in their definitions so that only the select range is
affected by the function, never the search string.
When you use the SR (select range) nokeypad entity, EDT first checks to see if
there is an active select range. If there is none and the cursor is located in the
appropriate position of the current search string, the command that contains
the SR entity affects the search string. You might find this inconvenient,
particularly with the keypad CHNGCASE command, where you often use
FIND to locate a word in which you want to change the case of the initial
letter only. By including CLSS in the CHNGCASE definition, you can empty
the search buffer before EDT processes the CHNGCASE function.
Other keypad definitions that include the SR entity are APPEND, CUT, and

FILL.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Moves to the string Wednesday. Then clears the search buffer before issuing
the CHGCSR command to change the case of the letter w.
The meeting will take place on Wednesday afternoon at 2:30.
"Wednesday" CLSS CHGCSR
The meeting will take place on Wednesday afternoon at 2:30.

example 2:

This example takes place in keypad mode. You first redefine the CHNGCASE
function to include the CLSS command ahead of the CHGCSR definition.
After finding the string albu, EDT changes the case of only the first letter
because there is no current search string.
Before leaving for the airport, be sure to contact Jim
in albuquerque.
If he has not made arrangements for the
PAGE
1|gold| +
COMMAND

Command:
ENTER
SUBS

EDT—254

DEFINE KEY GOLD 1 AS "CLSS CHGCSR."

EDT Commands
CLSS (Clear Search String) Command

IgolpI + FNDNXT
FIND

Search for:

albu

ENTER
SUBS

Before leaving for the airport, be sure to contact Jim
in albuquerque.
If he has not made arrangements for the
iGOLDl +

WORD
CHNGCASE

Before leaving for the airport, be sure to contact Jim
in Albuquerque.
If he has not made arrangements for the

related
commands

None,

EDT—255

EDT Commands
CTRL/C (Control C) Function

CTRL/C (Control C) Function—Nokeypad
KEY
SEQUENCE
DESCRIPTION

CTRL/C

ignored.

EXAMPLE
Stops EDT from printing the entire contents of the buffer DARCY_LET.
EXT SHOW BUFFER
DARCY.LET
=MAIN
12
PASTE No
Press return to

40
lines
lines
lines
continue

EXT TYPE =DARCY_LET
1
2
3
4
5
6

August 20,

1985

Mr. Charles R. Darcy
Production Manager
Midland Manufacturing Corporation
East St. Louis, IL 62202

I CTRL/C |

Aborted by CTRL/C

related
commands

EDT—256

— Keypad—CTRL/C
- Line—CTRL/C

EDT Commands
CTRL/Z (Control Z) Function

CTRL/Z (Control Z) Function—Nokeypad
KEY
SEQUENCE
DESCRIPTION

CTRL/Z

CTRL/Z performs the same function in nokeypad editing as it does in line
editing. (It has a different function in keypad editing.) You use CTRL/Z
to exit from the insert state. After you have given the appropriate insert
command and typed the text you want to add, use CTRL/Z to complete the
insert procedure. CTRL/Z is used with both the INSERT and REPLACE
commands in line mode and the I (insert) and R (replace) commands in
nokeypad mode. In nokeypad mode, typing the circumflex and then the
letter Z (-Z) has the same effect as pressing CTRL/Z.

EXAMPLE
Completes the insert operation and returns EDT to the command state.
Customer called Repair Service 5/25/85.
One of his telephones was not working.
He was told to disconnect his phone and
take it to his nearest phone store.

I mu
(Now type in the line REPAIR SERVICE REPORT #825 where the cursor is
and press RETURN to move the Customer called text to the next line.)

| CTRL/Z |

REPAIR SERVICE REPORT #825
Customer called Repair Service 5/25/85.
One of his telephones was not working.
He was told to disconnect his phone and
take it to his nearest phone store.

related
commands

- Line—CTRL/Z

EDT—257

EDT Commands
count specifier

count specifier—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

digit(s)

DESCRIPTION

The count specifier indicates either the number of times a nokeypad command
is to be repeated or the number of entities that the command will affect. The
maximum value for the count specifier is 32767.

EXAMPLES
□
5W

Moves the cursor five words.

CHGC27C

Changes e case of the next 27 characters.
H

8UNDC

Inserts the contents of the delete character buffer eight times.
Q

D4SEN

Deletes the next four sentences.
g

-3SN

Performs the same substitution three times, but toward the beginning of the
buffer.
0

5(+V D+W)

Deletes the first word in each of the next five lines. The parentheses indicate
that the repeat count applies to both commands—hV and D+W. If you omit
the parentheses, EDT deletes only the first word on the fifth line.
H

2(7ASC)

Inserts two bell control characters (CTRL/G) into your text. The parentheses
are necessary to distinguish the count number from the decimal equivalent
value of CTRL/G.

EDT—258

EDT Commands
CUT Command

CUT Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[+l-][count] CUT[+l—][count]entity[=buffer]

DESCRIPTION

The CUT command removes the specified entity from the text buffer and
stores it in the PASTE buffer or the specified buffer. EDT uses the PASTE
buffer when you do not specify a buffer name with the CUT command.
You can use the CUT command to delete large or small sections of text.
When you use CUT in conjunction with the PASTE command, you can move
or copy text from one place to another in the same buffer, or from one EDT
buffer to another, but not to or from external files. The line mode commands
INCLUDE and WRITE are used with external files.
When you use CUT to put part of a line into a buffer, EDT adds a line
terminator at the end of the line fragment. The line terminator is necessary
because EDT cannot store partial lines in a buffer. When you use the PASTE
command to insert that text, EDT removes the extra line terminator.
The steps for moving or copying text are described under the nokeypad
PASTE command.

EXAMPLE
Moves the first line to the TJ buffer and then uses the PASTE command to
insert that line in the proper chronological sequence between Adams and
Madison.
Thomas Jefferson
George Washington
John Adams
James Madison
CUTL=TJ

(Move cursor to the J in James Madison.)
PASTE=TJ
George Washington
John Adams
Thomas Jefferson
James Madison

related
commands

— Keypad—CUT

EDT—259

EDT Commands
D (Delete) Command

D (Delete) Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[+l-][count] D[+! -][count]entity

DESCRIPTION

The D (delete) command removes the specified entity from the current buffer.
If the entity involves a character, word, or line, the deleted text is stored
in the delete character, delete word, or delete line buffer. EDT overwrites
the contents of the appropriate buffer each time you use a D command that
involves a character, word, or line entity. You can use the UNDC, UNDW,
and UNDL commands to insert the current contents of the respective delete
buffers anywhere in the current buffer.
You can use the count specifiers to process several deletions in one command.
For example, D3W deletes three words; 2DL deletes two lines. The sign
specifier enables you to delete entities to the left of the cursor without
changing EDT's direction. For example, -2DC deletes the two characters to
the left of the cursor.
!

EXAMPLE
Deletes the first line. Then deletes the third line and uses UNDL to insert
that line in chronological order. Deletes the last character in Todd and the
word at the end of the last line.
Coming Events:
January 18,
January 30,
January 23,
February 2,
February 7,

1985
1985
1985
1985
1985

Luncheon Seminar on Technical Communications
Meeting of the EDT Development Staff
Seminar on Writing for Programmers
Lecture by Todd Brockman
Meeting of the Secretarial Staff Group

(Move the cursor to the January 23 line.)
DL

(Move the cursor up to the January 30 line.)
UNDL
January 23,
January 30,

1985
1985

Seminar on Writing for Programmers
Meeting of the EDT Development Staff

(Move the cursor to the second d in Todd.)
DC
February 2,

1985

Lecture by Tod_Brockman

(Move the cursor to the G in Group.)
DW
Coming Events:
January 23, 1985
January 30, 1985
February 2, 1985
February 7, 1985

EDT—260

Seminar
Meeting
Lecture
Meeting

on
of
by
of

Writing for Programmers
the EDT Development Staff
Tod Brockman
the Secretarial Staff_

EDT Commands
D (Delete) Command

related
commands

— Keypad—DEL C, DEL EOL, DELETE, DEL L, DEL W, LINEFEED,
CTRL/U
— Line—DELETE

EDT—261

EDT Commands
DATE Command

DATE Command—IMokeypad
SYNTAX

DATE

DESCRIPTION

The DATE command inserts the current date into your text. The format of
the DATE text is determined by the operating system. Generally the format
includes the time as well as a leading and a trailing space. The text is always
placed to the left of the cursor, regardless of EDT's current direction.

EXAMPLE
Inserts the current date and time to the right of the heading.
DATE/TIME:
DATE
DATE/TIME:

related
commands

EDT—262

None.

16-APR-1985 09:33:12

EDT Commands
DEFK (Define Key) Command

DEFK (Define Key) Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

DEFK

DESCRIPTION

The DEFK command enables you to define a keypad function key or key
sequence other than CTRL/K to handle the key definition process. The DEFK
command does not allow you to create keypad definitions from nokeypad
mode. In fact, DEFK has no function at all in nokeypad editing.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Using the line mode DEFINE KEY command, defines CTRL/D to have the
define key function in keypad mode.
♦DEFINE KEY CONTROL D AS "DEFK."

example 2:

Using the keypad CTRL/K function, defines CTRL/D to have the define key
function in keypad mode.
[CTRL/kl
Press the key you wish to define
I CTRL | + [D]
Enter the definition terminated by ENTER
DEFK.
ENTER
SUBS

related
commands

— Keypad—CTRL/K
— Line—DEFINE KEY

EDT—263

EDT Commands
DESEL (Deactivate Select) Command

DESEL (Deactivate Select)
Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

DESEL

DESCRIPTION

DESEL (deactivate select) cancels a select range after you have used the SEL
(select) command. If you change your mind about a select range, issue the
DESEL command. You can then continue with your editing work. If you
want to change a select range that is currently active, use DESEL to cancel it
and then SEL to mark the beginning of the new range.
DESEL also cancels a select range set by either the SSEL (search and select)
or TGSEL (toggle select) command.

EXAMPLE
Creates a select range of five lines. Then cancels that range, because the first
line of the next address was included by mistake. Moves the cursor back one
line and creates a four-line select range, using the minus sign (-) to reverse
direction only for that command.
SEL5L
Albuquerque, NM

87112

Mr. Edward B. Sanders
1749 General Lee Highway
Richmond, VA 23235
Dr.

Jane Marantz-Connor

DESEL
Albuquerque, NM

87112

Mr. Edward B. Sanders
1749 General Lee Highway
Richmond, VA 23235
Dr.

Jane Marantz-Connor

BL SEL-4L
Albuquerque, NM

87112

Mr. Edward B. Sanders
1749 General Lee Highway
Richmond, VA 23235
Dr.

related
commands

EDT—264

Jane Marantz-Connor

- Keypad—RESET

EDT Commands
DLWC (Default Lowercase) Command

DLWC (Default Lowercase)
Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

DLWC

DESCRIPTION

The DLWC (default lowercase) command instructs EDT to change all
uppercase letters to lowercase letters whenever you move the cursor during
your EDT session. As the cursor moves through the buffer, every uppercase
letter it passes over is changed to lowercase.
Since DLWC resets the default state, uppercase letters continue to be changed
to lowercase each time you move the cursor. Use the DMOV (default move)
command to reset EDT so that case is not affected by move operations.
DUPC (default uppercase) causes EDT to change all lowercase letters that the
cursor passes over to uppercase.

EXAMPLE
Changes EDT's default to lowercase and then shows the effect by moving the
cursor over four lines of text.
DATE:
FROM:
DEPT:
NET:

06-APR-85
Linda Westbrook
CED
QQQQ::WESTBROOK

DLWC 4L
date:
from:
dept:
net:

related
commands

06-apr-85
linda westbrook
ced
qqqq::westbrook

None.

EDT—265

EDT Commands
DMOV (Default Move) Command

DMOV (Default Move)
Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

DMOV

DESCRIPTION

The DMOV (default move) command returns your editing session to EDT's
default state after you have used either DLWC (default lowercase) or DUPC
(default uppercase). With DLWC, EDT automatically changes the case of
every uppercase letter to lowercase as the cursor moves through the text.
With DUPC, all lowercase letters become uppercase as EDT moves through
the buffer. For example, if you move from the current line to the end of the
buffer with DUPC in effect, that entire portion of your buffer will contain
only uppercase letters. DMOV sets things back to the normal state, where
EDT does not alter the case of letters during move operations.

EXAMPLE
Uses DLWC to change the default to lowercase and moves four words. Then
restores the default to EDT's normal state—DMOV.
The SOFTWARE SERVICES Training Proposal was issued last
May for the current fiscal year.
DLWC 4W
The software services training proposal was issued last
May for the current fiscal year.
DMOV

related
commands

EDT—266

None.

EDT Commands
Down Arrow

Down Arrow-—Nokeypad
KEY
SEQUENCE
DESCRIPTION

The Down Arrow key moves the cursor down one line toward the bottom of
the buffer, regardless of EDT's direction.
When you use the Down Arrow, EDT attempts to maintain the same vertical
column as it moves the cursor from one line to the next. If there are not
enough characters to fill out a line of text, the cursor moves to the end of that
line. If you continue to use Down Arrow, the cursor will return to the same
vertical column for all lines that have enough characters. However, once you
press some other key, EDT cancels the column position for Down Arrow and
resets it the next time you use the function. Note that the Down Arrow is not
a true nokeypad command.

EXAMPLE
Moves the cursor from the end of the first line to the end of the last line.
Asuncion, Paraguay
Bogota, Colombia
Brasilia, Brazil
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Caracas, Venezuela
Georgetown, Guyana

ffl
Asuncion, Paraguay
Bogota, Colombia

Bogota, Colombia
Brasilia, Brazil
Buenos Aires, Argentina

m + m
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Caracas, Venezuela
Georgetown, Guyana

EDT—267

EDT Commands
DUPC (Default Uppercase) Command

DUPC (Default Uppercase)
Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

DUPC

DESCRIPTION

The DUPC (default uppercase) command instructs EDT to change all
lowercase letters to uppercase whenever you move the cursor during your
EDT session. As the cursor moves through the buffer, every lowercase letter
it passes over is changed to uppercase.
Since DUPC resets the default state, lowercase letters continue to be changed
to uppercase each time you move the cursor. Use the DMOV (default move)
command to reset EDT so that case is not affected by move operations.
DLWC (default lowercase) causes EDT to change all uppercase letters that the
cursor passes over to lowercase.

EXAMPLE
Changes EDT's default to uppercase and then shows the effect by moving the
cursor over four lines of text.
Karen Islington
Paul Ohlmeyer
William Jacobson
Sarah Rapf
DUPC 4L
KAREN ISLINGTON
PAUL OHLMEYER
WILLIAM JACOBSON
SARAH RAPF

related
commands

EDT—268

None.

EDT Commands
entity specifier

entity specifier—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

entity

DESCRIPTION

An entity is a group of contiguous characters that EDT recognizes as a unit.
The entity specifier is used with the following nokeypad commands:
APPEND

FILL

CHGC

"move"

CHGL

CHGU

SEL

CUT

TADJ

TGSEL

The nokeypad mode entities are:
C

character

beginning of range

line

end of range

beginning of line

select range

end of line

SEN

sentence

next line

BSEN

beginning of sentence

PAGE

page

ESEN

end of sentence

BPAGE

beginning of page

"string"

string of characters

EPAGE

end of page

vertical

PAR

paragraph

word

BPAR

beginning of paragraph

beginning of word

EPAR

end of paragraph

end of word

EXAMPLES
□

CHGCW

Changes the case of the letters in the next word.
0

APPEND2PAR

Deletes the next two paragraphs and places them at the end of the PASTE
buffer.
0

DBR

Deletes to the beginning of the buffer.
Q

3CUTSEN=EXTRA

Deletes the next three sentences and places them in the buffer named EXTRA.

EDT—269

EDT Commands
EX (Exit to Line Mode) Command

EX (Exit to Line Mode)
Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

DESCRIPTION

The EX (exit to line mode) command shifts your editing session from
nokeypad mode to line mode. It does not cause an exit from EDT.
To exit from EDT when in nokeypad mode you can use EX to shift to line
mode and then give the line mode EXIT or QUIT command. Use the
nokeypad QUIT command to exit directly from nokeypad mode, when
you do not need to save your work. The nokeypad EXT (extend) command
allows you to issue the line mode EXIT or QUIT command directly from
nokeypad mode.

EXAMPLE
Shifts from nokeypad mode to line mode.

Jennifer Smith
John W. Snyder

(401) 555-1111
(401) 555-2222

EX
♦WRITE DELNAMES.DAT . THRU +1
DISKSUSER:[SMITHlDELNAMES.DAT
♦FIND =MAIN

related
commands

EDT—270

— Keypad—CTRL/Z
- Line—CHANGE

2 lines

EDT Commands
EXT (Extend) Command

EXT (Extend) Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

EXT line mode command

DESCRIPTION

The EXT (extend) command allows you to use a line mode command while
still in nokeypad mode. The text following EXT must fit on a single line.
You can issue two or more line mode commands on the same line by
separating the commands with semicolons (;). If you want to put nokeypad
commands after a line mode command, use CHANGE ;nokeypadcommand(s) as the last line mode command on the EXT command line.
You can use an EDT macro with the EXT command just as you would any
other line mode command.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Enables you to enter several line mode SET commands on a single line
directly from nokeypad mode.
EXT SET SEARCH EXACT ;SET WORD NODELIMITER ;SET SCREEN 100

example 2:

Enables you to use the line mode EXIT command directly from nokeypad
mode.
EXT EXIT
DISKSUSER:[SMITH:MEMOS]JAN1.RNO;6

example 3:

34 lines

Uses two line mode commands followed by a nokeypad command to
reposition the cursor after the line mode commands are processed.
EXT COPY =SAVE 4 THRU 27 TO =TEST ;SUBSTITUTE/10/5/ WHOLE; CHANGE ;5L 3C

related
commands

- Keypad—COMMAND

EDT—271

EDT Commands
FILL Command

FILL Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[+l—][count] F1 LL[+l-][count]entity

DESCRIPTION

The FILL command takes a select range of lines and reorganizes the text
so that the maximum number of whole words can fit within the current line
width. The default line width for EDT is the terminal width that the operating
system passes to EDT. Use the line mode SHOW SCREEN command to find
out the current screen/line width. The valid screen width values for screen
mode editing are 80 and 132. (132 is valid only for VT 100-type terminals
with AVO—advanced video option.) If your screen width is set to 80, EDT
will fill lines to column 79; if your screen width is 132, EDT will fill lines to
column 131.
If you want to use a line length other than 80 or 132 for filling text, you
must use the line mode SET WRAP command. The SET WRAP command
also affects the line length that EDT uses for inserting text in keypad mode.
EDT uses the SET SCREEN value to determine the line length for filling text
only if SET NOWRAP (the default) is in effect. If SET WRAP is in effect,
EDT always uses the wrap value, regardless of the SET SCREEN width. You
can use the SHOW WRAP command to find out the current wrap value or
setting.
The filling process considers a blank line to be a break between paragraphs.
Even if there are spaces on the blank line, EDT fills the text up to the blank
line and then resumes filling with the next line that contains text.
The valid entities for the FILL command are: L (line), SEN (sentence), PAR
(paragraph), PAGE, and SR (select range).

EXAMPLE
Uses the SET WRAP command to limit the line length to 60 characters. Then
reformats the first six lines of text.
A computer is a tool that you can use to
process information and solve complicated problems.
It accepts large amounts of information,
called data,
performs various operations on that data,
and provides you with a result.
In order to process data,
there must be communication between you and the computer.
EXT SET WRAP 60
FILL6L
A computer is a tool that you can use to process information
and solve complicated problems. It accepts large amounts of
information, called data, performs various operations on
that data, and provides you with a result.
In order to process data,
there must be communication between you and the computer.

EDT—272

EDT Commands
FILL Command

related
commands

- Keypad—FILL
— Line—FILL

EDT—273

EDT Commands
HELP Command

HELP Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

HELP

DESCRIPTION

The nokeypad HELP command is used exclusively for defining a different
key or key sequence in keypad mode to carry out the keypad HELP function.
HELP, is the preset definition of keypad HELP key.
The nokeypad HELP command has no effect on your nokeypad editing
session. To get help information on nokeypad commands, you must use the
line mode HELP command:
HELP CHANGE [subtopic

[subtopic]

]

The subtopic specifier in the HELP CHANGE command line refers to a
nokeypad help topic. If you do not include any subtopics, EDT prints
general information about nokeypad command syntax and a list of the
available subtopics. Information on nokeypad entities appears under HELP
CHANGE ENTITIES. Information on nokeypad commands appears under
HELP CHANGE SUBCOMMANDS.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Defines the key sequence GOLD/H to have the HELP function in keypad
mode.
’►DEFINE KEY GOLD H AS "HELP."

example 2:

Shows how to get three different types of information on nokeypad mode
using the EXT (extend) command and the line mode HELP command.
EXT HELP CHANGE SUBCOMMANDS

Prints general information about nokeypad commands.
EXT HELP CHANGE SUBCOMMANDS S

Prints information about the nokeypad S (substitute) command.
EXT HELP CHANGE ENTITIES

Prints information about nokeypad entities.

related
commands

None.

EDT Commands
I (Insert) Command

I (Insert) Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

< RET> text CTRL/Z

I text ~Z

DESCRIPTION

The I (insert) command shifts EDT to the insert state so that you can insert
new text in the current buffer. CTRL/Z signals EDT to exit from the insert
state.
The I command has two forms. The first can be used for inserting any
amount of text from a single character or word to several paragraphs or
pages. The second is limited to text that fits on a single line and does not
include a line terminator.
To insert any length of text, type I and press RETURN. The I remains on the
command line while the cursor returns to its former position on the screen.
Now type in the text you want to insert. When you have finished entering
the new text, press CTRL/Z to exit from the insert state. The new text is
now part of the current buffer and the I disappears from the command line to
show that you are no longer in the insert state.
To insert less than a line of text, type the I command and then follow it
immediately with the text you want to insert. (EDT interprets a space after
the I as part of the text to be inserted.) Then type ~Z or press CTRL/Z to
signal EDT that you have finished your inserted text. Finally, press RETURN
to have EDT insert the text to the left of the cursor.
You can use the DELETE key to edit the text while you are inserting it. Or,
you can wait until you finish typing the new text, and then use any nokeypad
editing command to make the necessary changes.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Adds two lines of text to the current buffer.
Have the following materials ready:
interim report
planning budget

i mu
staffing projections
space requirements
I CTRL/Z I

EDT—275

EDT Commands
I (Insert) Command

Have the following materials ready:
interim report
planning budget
staffing projections
space requirements

example 2:

Adds Wednesday,[SP] to the middle of the existing line.
Before the meeting on January 16th, please have the
IWednesday,

Before the meeting on Wednesday.

related
commands

EDT—276

— Line—INSERT

January 16th, please have the

EDT Commands
KS (KED Substitute) Command

KS (KED Substitute) Command—IMokeypad
SYNTAX

DESCRIPTION

The KS (KED substitute) command is used after the nokeypad PASTE
command to modify the position of the cursor at the completion of the
PASTE command. KS can be used only directly after the PASTE command.
Do not put a space between the command words PASTE and KS.
Normally after you issue a PASTE command, the cursor is located one
character to the right of the inserted text, regardless of EDT's current
direction. When you put KS after the PASTE command, the cursor position
changes and becomes dependent on EDT's current direction. If the direction
is forward, the cursor is on the last character of the inserted text. If the
direction is backward, the cursor is positioned on the first character of the
inserted text.
The KS command enables you to locate a search string that includes the
character immediately after or before the inserted text.
The nokeypad definition for the keypad mode SUBS function includes the
KS command. Notice the KS command following directly after the PASTE
command.
(CUTSR=DELETE PASTEKS"").

EXAMPLE
Assumes that the text Atlanta, GA, is in the PASTE buffer. First resets the
direction to backward. Then inserts the contents of the PASTE buffer and
positions the cursor on the first character of the inserted text.
following locations:
Oakland. CA, Augusta. ME,
Billings. MT. Knoxville. TN.
BACK PASTEKS
following locations:
Oakland, CA, Augusta, ME,
Billings, MT, Atlanta, GA, Knoxville, TN.

related
commands

None.

EDT—277

EDT Commands
Left Arrow

Left Arrow—Nokeypad
KEY
SEQUENCE
DESCRIPTION

Left Arrow moves the cursor one character to the left, regardless of EDT's
direction.
If the cursor is at the first character position of a line, pressing Left Arrow
moves the cursor to the line terminator of the previous line.
Note that the Left Arrow is not a true nokeypad command.

EXAMPLE
Moves the cursor to the left, first to the beginning of the second line and then
to the end of the first line.
July 1. 1985
October 1, 1985

1□ + □ + □
July 1. 1985
October 1, 1985

□
July 1, 1985
October 1, 1985

related
commands

EDT—278

— Keypad—Left Arrow

EDT Commands
"move" Command

"move" Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[+l-][count]entity

DESCRIPTION

The "move" command moves the cursor within the current buffer. The entity
specifier is the only required element in the "move" command. There is no
command word or abbreviation.
You can put several "move" commands together. For example, L 3W -4C
moves the cursor down to the beginning of the next line, then three words to
the right, and finally four characters to the left. In cases where you want to
repeat several "move" commands, you can enclose the entities in parentheses:
8(EPAR +C).

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next line.
Only a few computer programs work successfully the first
time they are tried.
Programmers are expected to make
mistakes.
The mark of a good programmer is how quickly
he or she can find and correct the errors that occur.
L
time they are tried.

example 2:

Programmers are expected to make

Using the same text and the new cursor position, moves the cursor to the
string programmer.
"programmer"
mistakes.

example 3:

The mark of a good programmer is how quickly

Using the same text and the new cursor position, moves the cursor three
words to the right.
3W
mistakes.

example 4:

The mark of a good programmer is how quickly

Using the same text and the new cursor position, moves the cursor to the end
of the last line.
2EL
he or she can find and correct the errors that occur.

EDT—279

EDT Commands
"move" Command

related
commands

EDT—280

- Keypad—FIND, char, word, line, page

_ Line; FIND

EDT Commands
PASTE Command

PASTE Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[count] PASTE[=buffer]

DESCRIPTION

The PASTE command copies the contents of any buffer into the current
buffer. The keypad PASTE function only copies the PASTE buffer contents
into the current buffer.
When used together with the CUT or APPEND command, the nokeypad
PASTE command enables you to move or copy text from one location to
another in the same or different buffers. When you do not supply a buffer
name with the PASTE command, EDT uses the PASTE buffer. Do not put
a space between the word PASTE and the equal sign (=) when you are
specifying another buffer name. Otherwise, EDT uses the PASTE buffer and
tries to interpret the buffer name you specified as another command.
Note that the syntax for the PASTE command differs from the CUT
command. You cannot use an entity specifier with PASTE; you can only
copy entire buffers. However, remember that you can enter the PASTE buffer
or another buffer and edit it before using PASTE to copy the contents into
your current buffer. Use the line mode FIND command to move to the other
buffer.
To move text, use the CUT command to delete the text from its present
location. Then move the cursor to the new location and insert the text with
the PASTE command. To copy text, use the CUT command to move the
material you want to copy to the PASTE buffer. Then before moving the
cursor, issue the PASTE command to restore the deleted text to its original
location. Now move the cursor to the place where you want the copy inserted
and issue the PASTE command again.
You can use the APPEND command to add text to the contents of the buffer
you want to insert later with the PASTE command. When you move or copy
text with CUT and PASTE or CUT, APPEND, and PASTE, be sure to use the
same buffer name for all the commands. You can use the line mode SHOW
BUFFER command to list all the buffers that currently exist in your editing
session.
Each time you issue the CUT command, EDT overwrites the contents of the
PASTE buffer or the specified buffer. When you use CUT to put part of a
line into a buffer, EDT adds a line terminator at the end of the text since
EDT buffers cannot contain partial lines. The PASTE command removes the
added line terminator so that when you insert the text, you do not have an
unwanted line break.
For information on how to modify the cursor position after EDT processes a
PASTE command, see the nokeypad KS command.

EDT—281

EDT Commands
PASTE Command

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Inserts the text from the buffer PAGEBLANK at the current cursor location.
in the following three chapters.
<FF>

PASTE=PAGEBLANK
in the following three chapters.
<FF>
[This page intentionally left blank.]
<FF>

example 2:

After using CUT to delete the last line, inserts that line in the middle of the
list.
George G. Haraway
John W. Hardwick
Mason G. Harbaugh
CUTL

(Move the cursor to the J in John.)
PASTE
George G. Haraway
Mason G. Harbaugh
John W. Hardwick

example 3:

Uses CUT, APPEND, and PASTE to alphabetize a list of cities.
Dallas
Houston
Fort Worth
Austin
San Antonio
CUTL

(Move the cursor to the D in Dallas.)
APPENDL

(Move the cursor to the F in Fort Worth.)
APPENDL

(Move the cursor to the H in Houston.)
PASTE
Austin
Dallas
Fort Worth
Houston
San Antonio

EDT—282

EDT Commands
PASTE Command

related
commands

— Keypad—PASTE
— Line—COPY, MOVE

EDT—283

EDT Commands
QUIT Command

QUIT Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

QUIT

DESCRIPTION

The QUIT command ends your nokeypad editing session without saving your
edits and without passing through line mode. You are no longer in EDT, no
new file is saved in any directory, and your terminal is now at the system
command level.
The nokeypad QUIT command cannot take the /SAVE qualifier that the line
mode QUIT command has. The nokeypad QUIT command n only end
your editing session.

EXAMPLE
Ends the nokeypad editing session without copying the MAIN buffer contents
to an external file. Only the system prompt appears.
QUIT

related
commands

EDT—284

- Line—QUIT

EDT Commands
R (Replace) Command

R (Replace) Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[-d-][count] R[-d -][coun t]en tity

DESCRIPTION

The R (replace) command combines the delete and insert functions. First
EDT deletes the specified text; then it shifts to the insert state so that you
can enter text at your terminal. When you finish entering the new text, press
CTRL/Z to exit from the insert state. While you are inserting the new text,
EDT continues to display the R command at the bottom of the screen. The
entity specifier always refers to the text you want to delete.

EXAMPLE
Deletes the last line and replaces it with new text.
This seminar will cover the following topics:
Management by Objective
Management by Design
Management by Intimidation
RL

(Now type in the new line. Management by Consensus, and complete the
insert by pressing CTRL/Z.)
This seminar will cover the following topics:
Management by Objective
Management by Design
Management by Consensus

related
commands

— Keypad—REPLACE
- Line—REPLACE

EDT—285

EDT Commands
REF (Refresh) Command

REF (Refresh) Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

REF

DESCRIPTION

The REF command clears and redraws the entire screen. Use REF to eliminate
any extraneous characters or messages that have appeared on the screen but
are not part of the current text you are editing. After the REF command is
given, EDT discards any characters that are not part of the current text. The
screen is restored to its state prior to the interruption. REF has no effect on
the text you are editing.

EXAMPLE
Refreshes the screen to eliminate the notification of new mail.
and expect to hear from you in the near future.
>NEW MAIL FROM YYYYYY::WHITE!f you have any questions or
problems.
REF
and expect to hear from you in the near future.
In the meantime, please call if you have any questions or
problems.

related
commands

EDT—286

- Keypad—CTRL/R, CTRL/W
- Line—CTRL/R

EDT Commands
Right Arrow

Right Arrow—Nokeypad
KEY
SEQUENCE
DESCRIPTION

Right Arrow moves the cursor one character to the right, regardless of EDT's
direction.
If the cursor is on a line terminator. Right Arrow moves the cursor to the first
character on the next line.
Note that Right Arrow is not a true nokeypad command.

EXAMPLE
Moves the cursor to the right to the end of first line. Then moves the cursor
to the beginning of the second line.
January 1, 1985
April 1, 1985

□ + B + □
January 1, 1985
April 1, 1985

□
January 1, 1985
April 1, 1985

related
commands

— Keypad—Right Arrow

EDT—287

EDT Commands
S (Substitute) Command

S (Substitute) Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[+l-][count] S/[string-1 ]/string-2/

DESCRIPTION

The S (substitute) command looks for the next occurrence of string-1, deletes
it, and replaces it with string-2.
The count specifier instructs EDT to perform the specified number of searches
and substitutions. If the count exceeds the total number of occurrences of
string-1 between the current cursor position and either the beginning or end
of the buffer (depending on the direction specified), EDT performs as many
substitutions as it can, and then prints the message String was not found to
indicate that it could not find another string-1. The cursor is now located just
after the last substitution that was made.
The sign specifier enables you to change the direction of the search for
string-1, for that S command only, without affecting EDT's direction.
The slashes are string delimiters. Any nonalphanumeric character can be
used for a string delimiter as long as that character is not contained in either
string-1 or string-2. All three delimiters must be identical.
String-1 or string-2 can sometimes be omitted from the S command. If you
omit string-1, EDT always uses the current search string. If the search buffer
is empty, EDT simply inserts string-2 into the text to the left of the cursor.
If you omit string-2, EDT always deletes string-1 and inserts nothing. The
following samples show what happens when you omit string-1, string-2, or
both:
This
This
This
This
This

is
is
is
is
is

file
file
file
file
file

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

S/file/buffer/
S///
S/file//
S//buffer/
S

This
This
This
This
This

is buffer A.
is B.
is C.
is buffer D.
is E.

The SN command, which does not take any strings as specifiers, always uses
the current contents of the search buffer and the substitute buffer.
EDT performs searches in several ways. For more information see the SET
SEARCH command. SHOW SEARCH tells which search parameters are
currently in effect.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Changes 1987 to 1988.
January 3,

1987

S/7/8/
January 3,

EDT—288

1988

EDT Commands
S (Substitute) Command

example 2:

Changes pages to Sections in two places.
in pages 17 through 25.

Then in pages 32 through 40 we

2S/pages/Sections/
in Sections 17 through 25.

example 3:

Then in Sections_32 through 40 we

With SET SEARCH EXACT, moves back to the first line to change users to
you, skipping over Users on line 2.
If users are able to access the line printer, then the DCL
PRINT command can be given.
Users who only have access to
their terminals are restricted to the DCL TYPE command.
EXT SET SEARCH EXACT
-S/users/you/
If you are able to access the line printer, then the DCL
PRINT command can be used.
Users who only have access to
their terminals are restricted to the DCL TYPE command.

related
commands

- Keypad—SUBS
- Line—SUBSTITUTE

EDT—289

EDT Commands
SEL (Select) Command

SEL (Select) Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

SEL

DESCRIPTION

The SEL (select) command marks the current cursor position as one end of a
select range. To set up the select range, first position the cursor at one end of
the text you want to select. Then issue the SEL command to have EDT mark
that spot. Use the arrow keys or the "move" command to move the cursor
to the other end of the selected text. The select range is now set. To use that
select range, use SR (select range) as the entity specifier with your nokeypad
mode command.
You can move the cursor either forward or backward in the buffer to set the
other end of the select range once the initial end has been marked. To move
backward toward the start of the buffer, use the Left and Up arrow keys or
precede the "move" command with a minus sign (-). If you have included
more text than you want in the select range, you can move the cursor toward
the position marked by SEL, using the arrow keys and "move" commands to
reduce the size of the range. Adjusting select ranges on VT100 terminals is
easy because EDT displays the text in reverse video. On VT52 terminals, you
might find it easier to use the DESEL command to cancel the select range and
then start over.
The DESEL (deactivate select) command cancels a select range. The TGSEL
(toggle select) command allows you to switch between SEL and DESEL with
the same command, either setting SEL if no select range is active, or DESEL
if there is a current select range. The SSEL (search and select) command
performs a search and makes the found string the select range.
You can use a select range with line mode commands by giving the line mode
range specifier SELECT. However, line mode requires that the select range
include only whole lines.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Creates a select range of the word Digital and then changes all lowercase
letters to uppercase.
This manual was produced by Digital for its customers.
SEL W
CHGUSR
This manual was produced by DIGITAL for its customers.

example 2:

EDT—290

Creates a select range starting near the end of the third line and including the
first two lines. Deletes the unwanted text.

EDT Commands
SEL (Select) Command

The reason for this change of plans should be obvious:
no one
in their right mind would want to have a meeting in North Alaska in
the middle of winter even if they were an avid skier.
The meeting
is now relocated to Lake Tahoe.
For those of you wishing to see
the forty-ninth state, our summer meeting is scheduled for Fairbanks.
SEL
BL -2L
DSR
The meeting
is now relocated to Lake Tahoe.
For those of you wishing to see
the forty-ninth state, our summer meeting is scheduled for Fairbanks.

related
commands

- Keypad—SELECT

EDT—291

EDT Commands
SHL (Shift Left) Command

SHL (Shift Left) Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[count] SHL

DESCRIPTION

The SHL (shift left) command moves the entire buffer text eight characters
(one tab stop) to the left. The first eight characters on each line no longer
appear on the screen. Assuming that your screen width is set to 80, all
characters in positions 80 through 87 that were previously truncated are now
visible.
No characters are actually added to or deleted from the text when you use
the SHL and SHR commands. The effects of the commands are merely visual
and temporary. On a VT100 terminal with advanced video option, or on
a VT102, you can use the SET SCREEN command to display up to 132
characters on a single line, but the size of the characters is reduced.
The count specifier designates the number of tab stops to shift left. When
count is 4, the buffer is shifted 32 character positions to the left. Use the SHR
(shift right) command to move the buffer contents to the right, back to the
original position.
You can define the GOLD/ <— key sequence on VTlOO-type terminals to
perform the SHL function in keypad mode. The following DEFINE KEY
command can be included in your startup command file or issued during your
editing session:
DEFINE KEY GOLD 15 AS "SHL."

EXAMPLE
Shows the effect of SHL on a line of text that has been truncated because it
exceeds the screen width of 80.
AAAAAAAAbbbbbbbbCCCCCCCCddddddddEEEEEEEEf f f f f f f f GGGGGGGGhhhhhhhhIllHIIIjj j j j j j j♦
SHL

related
commands

EDT—292

None,

EDT Commands
SHR (Shift Right) Command

SHR (Shift Right) Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[count] SHR

DESCRIPTION

The SHR (shift right) command moves the entire current buffer eight character
positions (one tab stop) to the right. SHR works only after you have used the
SHL (shift left) command. When SHL has been used to move the buffer over
one tab stop, SHR will move the buffer back to its original position.
You cannot shift text farther to the right with SHR than the text has been
moved to the left. Once column 1 of your buffer is again at the left edge of
the screen, further SHR commands have no effect on the display.
No characters are actually added or deleted from the buffer when SHR or
SHL is used. The effects of these commands are merely visual and temporary.
On a VT100-type terminal with advanced video option, you can use the SET
SCREEN command to display up to 132 characters on a line. However, the
size of each character is reduced.
The count specifier designates the number of tab stops to shift right. When
the count is 4, the buffer is shifted 32 character positions to the right. If the
count used with the SHL command is 5, and you then give the command
4SHR, the buffer will end up still shifted eight character positions to the left.
If you use the SHR command with a count specifier greater than the number
of left shifts that have been made, EDT moves the text back to its original
position and ignores the remaining repeats.
You can define the GOLD/ —♦ key on VTlOO-type terminals to perform the
SHR function in keypad mode. The following DEFINE KEY command can be
included in your startup command file or issued during your editing session:
DEFINE KEY GOLD 14 AS "SHR."

EXAMPLE
Uses the SHL command to move the line 16 columns to the left. Then uses
SHR to restore the characters in columns 9 through 16 to view.
i jjj j jj
2SHL
CCCCCCCCddddddddEEEEEEEEffffffffGGGGGGGGhhhhhhhhlIlHIIIjj j j j jj jKKKKKKKKllllllll4
SHR
bbbbbbbbCCCCCCCCddddddddEEEEEEEEf f f f f f f f GGGGGGGGhhhhhhhhIUIIIIIjj j j j j j jKKKKKKKK^

related
commands

None,

EDT—293

EDT Commands
SN (Substitute Next) Command

SN (Substitute Next)
Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[-d-][count] SN

DESCRIPTION

The SN (substitute next) command is a substitute command that does not
take any string specifiers. It uses strings that have been stored in the search
buffer (string-1) and the substitute buffer (string-2). (Remember that you
cannot access either of these buffers.) The SN command looks for the next
occurrence of string-1 (the current search string) and replaces it with string-2
(the current substitute string).
Since SN uses the contents of the search buffer as its search string, you must
be aware of the current contents of that buffer. If you have used a string
entity after your initial S (substitute) command, that new string will now be
in the search buffer, not the string you want to use with the SN command.
With the count specifier you can repeat the substitution several times. Use
the sign specifier to change EDT's direction for the SN command.

EXAMPLE
First uses the S command to make the initial substitution on line 2. Then
uses SN to make the substitution on line 5.
BASIC, a Beginner's All-purpose Symbolic Instruction Code,
is a languge that requires only an understanding of English.
BASIC was developed at Dartmouth College for use by
students who were unfamiliar with computers and needed a
languge related to everyday speech.
S/languge/language/
SN
BASIC, a Beginner's All-purpose Symbolic Instruction Code,
is a language that requires only an understanding of English.
BASIC was developed at Dartmouth College for use by
students who were unfamiliar with computers and needed a
language related to everyday speech.

related
commands

EDT—294

— Keypad—SUBS
- Line—SUBSTITUTE NEXT

EDT Commands
SSEL (Search and Select) Command

SSEL (Search and Select)
Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

/W-y SSEL/W-/■'string "

DESCRIPTION

The SSEL (search and select) command allows you to find a string and
designate it as a select range in one operation. The string must be enclosed in
quotation marks, single (') or double ("). Do not use spaces to separate the
command from the string. However, you can include leading spaces in the
search string.
When you use SSEL, the contents of the search buffer are overwritten by the
string. To search and select that string again (or whatever string is currently
in the search buffer), simply type two quotation marks with no intervening
characters, as follows:
SSEL"»

You can use a select range with line mode commands by giving the line mode
range specifier SELECT. However, line mode requires that a select range
contain only whole lines. Thus, you can only use the SSEL command for this
purpose if the string is an entire line of text. You might find it easier to create
longer select ranges with the nokeypad SEL command.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

First creates a select range from the search string [SPJEQUIPMENT
CORPORATION. Then deletes the select range. Finally creates a new
select range from the next occurrence of the same search string.
DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
Digital Equipment Corporation is located in Maynard, MA.
SSEL" EQUIPMENT CORPORATION"
DSR
DIGITAL
Digital Equipment Corporation is located in Maynard, MA.
SSEL""
DIGITAL
Digital Equipment Corporation is located in Maynard, MA.

related
commands

None.

EDT—295

EDT Commands
string specifier

string specifier—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

"string"
'string'
/string-1/string-2/

DESCRIPTION

The string specifier is generally used either to locate characters in a buffer
or to replace the located characters. When a string specifier is used to locate
a piece of text, it is referred to as the search string. All three editing modes
use search strings. Generally a search string must be enclosed in quotation
marks, single (#) or double ("), to distinguish it from other characters in the
command line.
When strings are used in EDT substitute commands, they are generally
referred to as string-1 or string-2. String-1 is always a search string. EDT
must locate that string and then replace it with string-2, the substitute
string. Strings in substitute commands must be surrounded by delimiters
to separate them from the other characters in the command line. A variety of
nonalphanumeric characters can be used as delimiters as long as the delimiter
does not appear in either string-1 or string-2. (In line mode you cannot use
the percent sign (%) or the underscore (__) as string delimiters.) All delimiters
used in a single substitute command line must be identical.
Whenever you issue a search string, EDT overwrites the contents of the
search buffer. Similarly, when you issue a substitute string, EDT overwrites
the contents of the substitute buffer.
The string entity in nokeypad mode refers to all the characters in the text
between the initial cursor position and the start of the search string. However,
only the search string itself is stored in the search buffer.
The search and substitute buffers cannot be edited or entered. Their names
never appear in the SHOW BUFFER list. You can use the nokeypad CLSS
(clear search string) command to delete the contents of the search buffer.
EDT has a number of ways to perform searches. See the discussion of the
SET SEARCH command for information about the EDT search parameters.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Substitutes the string BASIC for the string COBOL.
S/COBOL/BASIC/

example 2:

Deletes all characters starting at the current cursor position and continuing
until the next period is reached.
D" . "

EDT—296

EDT Commands
string specifier

example 3:

Finds the string Friday, May 13th and makes it a select range.
SSEL'Triday, May 13th"

EDT—297

EDT Commands
TAB Command

TAB Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[count] TAB

DESCRIPTION

The TAB command moves text to the right, regardless of EDT's direction.
The number of column positions that the text moves depends on the cursor
position, the SET TAB value, if one is in effect, and the indentation level
count, if one is in effect. (SET NOTAB is the default.)
EDT has preset tab stops every eight characters, regardless of how your
terminal is set. If no SET TAB command has been given, the TAB command
moves the cursor character, as well as all the characters on the current line to
the right of the cursor, to the nearest preset tab position.
If a SET TAB command has been given, the TAB command moves the entire
line to the column designated by the SET TAB value only if the cursor is
located in column 1. If the cursor is located anywhere else on the line, the
TAB command moves the text to the nearest preset EDT tab stop.
If a tab indentation level count is in effect and the cursor is located in column
1 of the line, the TAB command moves the text to the indentation level
position. The indentation level count is determined by three functions: 1) TC
(tab compute) which can be used to compute the indentation level count, 2)
TD (tab decrement) which decrements the count, and 3) TI (tab increment)
which increments the count. Use the SHOW TAB command to find out the
current SET TAB value and the indentation level count.
The TADJ command indents whole lines of text by the SET TAB value.

EXAMPLE
Using EDT's default tab settings (SET NOTAB), indents the lines of text, each
one eight columns farther than the one above.
This
This
This
This

is
is
is
is

the
the
the
the

first line of text.
second line of text.
third line of text.
fourth line of text.

(Start with the cursor at the beginning of the second line.)
TAB

(Move the cursor to the beginning of the third line.)
2TAB

(Move the cursor to the beginning of the fourth line.)
3TAB
This is the first line of text.
This is the second line of text.
This is the third line of text.
This is the fourth line of text.

EDT—298

EDT Commands
TAB Command

related
commands

- Keypad—TAB, CTRL/I

EDT—299

EDT Commands
TADJ (Tab Adjust) Command

TADJ (Tab Adjust) Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[+l-][level-count] TADJ[+l-][entity-count]entity

DESCRIPTION

The TADJ (tab adjust) command uses the value established by the line mode
SET TAB command to indent lines of text. If no SET TAB value exists for the
editing session, TADJ does nothing.
The level count specifier determines how many tab stops the text will be
indented. The TADJ command moves text to the right. If you precede the
level count specifier with a minus sign, you can move text, which has already
been indented, back toward the left margin.
The entity count determines how many lines, paragraphs, or pages will
be affected by the TADJ command. A minus sign before the entity or entity
count determines whether EDT will work forward or backward in determining
which entities to indent. Note that 5TADJL is not identical to TADJ5L. You
can use both a level count and an entity count with TADJ, for example,
2TADJ4L.
To find the current SET TAB value, use the line mode SHOW TAB command.
EDT's default is SET NOTAB. Notice that the level count specifier has no
effect on the tab level displayed by the SHOW TAB command.

EXAMPLE
Using a SET TAB value of 3, indents line 2 one tab stop and line 3 two tab
stops.
This is the first line of text.
This is the second line of text.
This is the third line of text.
EXT SET TAB 3
NL TADJL
NL 2TADJL
This is the first line of text.
This is the second line of text.
This is the third line of text.

related
commands

EDT—300

— Keypad—CTRL/T
— Line—TAB ADJUST

EDT Commands
TC (Tab Compute) Command

TC (Tab Compute) Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

DESCRIPTION

The TC (tab compute) command sets the indentation level count for the TAB
command. The indentation level is the number of columns starting at the left
of the screen that you want to leave blank before beginning a line of text.
The indentation level in EDT must be a multiple of the SET TAB value. The
indentation level count is the quotient of the indentation level divided by the
SET TAB value. Use the line mode SET TAB command to establish the SET
TAB value.
To use the TC command, first move the cursor as many positions to the right
as you want to indent a block of text when you give the TAB command.
Remember that this cursor position must be a multiple of the SET TAB value.
If it is not, EDT prints an error message when you issue the TC command.
Once the cursor is in place, issue the TC command. You have now set the
indentation level. If you divide the indentation level by the SET TAB value,
you have the indentation level count. EDT retains the indentation level
count for the remainder of the editing session or until you reset the count
with a subsequent TC command, TD (tab decrement) command, or TI (tab
increment) command. The TC command has no effect on EDT if SET NOTAB
(the default) is in effect.
When you give the TC command, nothing happens to the text you are editing.
This command simply tells EDT how to process the next TAB command(s).
In order to indent any lines of text, you must issue the TAB command.
To find out the current SET TAB value and indentation level count, use the
line mode SHOW TAB command.

EXAMPLE
Using a SET TAB value of 3, establishes a tab level count of 5 in order to
indent the first line of text 15 columns.
This is the first line of text.
This is the second line of text.
EXT SET TAB 3

(Move the cursor over 15 places so that it is on the s in first.)
TC
EXT SHOW TAB
tab size 3; tab level 5

(Now move the cursor back to the beginning of the first line.)
TAB
This is the first line of text.
This is the second line of text.

EDT—301

EDT Commands
TC (Tab Compute) Command

related
commands

EDT—302

- Keypad-CTRL/A

EDT Commands
TD (Tab Decrement) Command

TD (Tab Decrement) Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[count] TD

DESCRIPTION

The TD (tab decrement) command decreases the current indentation level
count. The indentation level count is generally set by the TC (tab compute)
command. It can be altered by a subsequent TC command, TD command, or
TI (tab increment) command. The TD command only resets the indentation
level count. You must use the TAB command to move the text. TD has no
effect on EDT if SET NOTAB (the default) is in effect. Use the line mode SET
TAB command to establish a SET TAB value.
The count specifier determines the amount that the indentation level count
decreases. If no specifier is given, the indentation level count decreases by
one.
To find out the current SET TAB value and indentation level count, use the
line mode SHOW TAB command.

EXAMPLE
Using a SET TAB value of 4, sets the tab level count to 4. Then formats the
text, using TAB to indent the lines, and TD to change the indentation level.
This
This
This
This

is
is
is
is

the
the
the
the

first line of text.
second line of text.
third line of text.
fourth line of text.

EXT SET TAB 4

(Move the cursor 16 places to the right.)
TC
EXT SHOW TAB
tab size 4; tab level 4

(Move the cursor to the beginning of the first line.)
TAB

(Move the cursor to the beginning of the second line.)
TD
TAB

(Move the cursor to the beginning of the third line.)
TD
TAB

(Move the cursor to the beginning of the fourth line.)
TD
TAB

EDT—303

EDT Commands
TD (Tab Decrement) Command

This is the first line of text.
This is the second line of text.
This is the third line of text.
This is the fourth line of text.
EXT SHOW TAB
tab size 4; tab level 1

related
commands

EDT—304

— Keypad—CTRL/D

EDT Commands
TGSEL (Toggle Select) Command

TGSEL (Toggle Select)
Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

TGSEL

DESCRIPTION

The TGSEL (toggle select) command combines the functions of the SEL and
DESEL commands into one. When there is an active select range, the TGSEL
command cancels it, performing the same function as the DESEL command.
When there is no active select range, TGSEL initiates the process of creating
a select range, just as the SEL command does. The character that the cursor
is on when you issue the TGSEL command constitutes one end of the select
range. Move the cursor to the other end to define the limits of the select
range.
You can use a select range with line mode commands by giving the line mode
range specifier SELECT. However, line mode requires that the select range
contain only whole lines.

EXAMPLE
First creates a select range of lines 2 through 4 and then cancels it.
Market Requirements
Preliminary Business Plan
Engineering Plan
Training Plan
TGSEL
3L
Market Requirements
Preliminary Business Plan
Engineering Plan
Training Plan

TGSEL
Market Requirements
Preliminary Business Plan
Engineering Plan
Training Plan

related
commands

- Keypad—SELECT/RESET

EDT—305

EDT Commands
Tl (Tab Increment) Command

Tl (Tab Increment) Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[count] Tl

DESCRIPTION

The Tl (tab increment) command increases the current indentation level
count. The indentation level count is generally set by the TC (tab compute)
command. It can be altered by a subsequent TC command, Tl command, or
TD (tab decrement) command. The Tl command only resets the indentation
level count. You must use the TAB command to move the text. Tl has no
effect on EDT if SET NOTAB (the default) is in effect. Use the line mode SET
TAB command to establish the SET TAB value.
The count specifier determines the amount that the indentation level count
increases. If no specifier is given, the indentation level count increases by
one.
To find out the current SET TAB value and indentation level count, use the
line mode SHOW TAB command.

EXAMPLE
Using a SET TAB value of 5, sets the tab level count to 2. Then formats the
text using TAB to indent the lines, and Tl to change the indentation level.
This
This
This
This

is
is
is
is

the
the
the
the

first line of text.
second line of text.
third line of text.
fourth line of text.

EXT SET TAB 5

(Move the cursor 10 places to the right.)
TC
EXT SHOW TAB
tab size 5; tab level 2

(Move the cursor to the beginning of the first line.)
TAB

(Move the cursor to the beginning of the second line.)
TI
TAB

(Move the cursor to the beginning of the third line.)
TI
TAB

(Move the cursor to the beginning of the fourth line.)
TI
TAB

EDT—306

EDT Commands
Tl (Tab Increment) Command

This is the first line of text.
This is the second line of text.
This is the third line of text.
This is the fourth line of text.
EXT SHOW TAB
tab size 5; tab level 5

related
commands

— Keypad—CTRL/E

EDT—307

EDT Commands
TOP Command

TOP Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

TOP

DESCRIPTION

The TOP command moves the line on which the cursor is located to the top
of the display screen. If there are not enough lines between the current cursor
position and the end of the buffer to fill the screen, TOP does nothing. When
you use the TOP command, the cursor remains in the same position on the
current line that it was in before TOP was issued.
Normally you must have 21 lines below the current line in order for TOP to
have any effect on your screen display. However, if you have used the line
mode SET LINES command to limit the number of lines per screen, TOP
needs fewer lines between the cursor line and the end of the buffer in order
to have an effect on the screen display.
Once a line has been placed at the top of the screen by the TOP command,
EDT tries to keep it there as long as possible.

EXAMPLE
Moves the line that the cursor is on to the top of the screen. SET LINES 5
limits the number of lines EDT displays.
EXT SET LINES 5
This
This
This
This
This

is
is
is
is
is

the
the
the
the
the

first line of text.
second line of text.
third line of text.
fourth line of text.
fifth line of text.

is
is
is
is
is

the
the
the
the
the

fourth line of text.
fifth line of text.
sixth line of text.
seventh line of text
eighth line of text.

TOP
This
This
This
This
This

related
commands

EDT—308

— Keypad—PAGE

EDT Commands
UNDC (Undelete Character) Command

UNDC (Undelete Character)
Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[count] UNDC

DESCRIPTION

The UNDC (undelete character) command inserts the current contents of the
delete character buffer into your text to the left of the cursor. The cursor
character, as well as the text to the right of the cursor, moves to the right.
The cursor is positioned on the inserted character if you used DC to delete
the character. The cursor is positioned to the right of the inserted character if
you used -DC (or D-C) to delete the character.
When you include a count specifier, EDT inserts the contents of the delete
character buffer as many times as the count value.
Both the DC command and the DELETE key place the character they delete
in the delete character buffer. Each time you use the DC command or the
DELETE key, the contents of the delete character buffer are overwritten. The
buffer contains only the most recently deleted character. When you use a
count specifier with the DC command or with the DELETE key, only the last
character deleted is in the delete character buffer. If no character has been
deleted thus far during the current EDT session, UNDC inserts nothing. Note
that if you use the DELETE key to delete characters in a command line, these
characters are not stored in the delete character buffer and will not affect the
character inserted by UNDC.
EDT represents a line terminator as the character <CR> (CTRL/M, decimal
13) in all three of its delete entity buffers. Suppose you have a <CR>
character in your text and you delete it. When you undelete this character,
EDT changes the <CR> character into a line terminator and then inserts the
line terminator in your text.

EXAMPLE
First loads the asterisk character (*) into the delete character buffer. Then
inserts five asterisks in the text.
This is the end.

*
D-C
5UNDC
This is the end.

*****

related
commands

— Keypad—UND C

EDT—309

EDT Commands
UNDL (Undelete Line) Command

UNDL (Undelete Line)
Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

[count] UNDL

DESCRIPTION

The UNDL command inserts the current contents of the delete line buffer to
the left of the cursor. The cursor character, as well as the text to the right
of the cursor, moves to a new line below the current line, if there is a line
terminator at the end of the buffer contents. Otherwise, the text just moves
to the right. The cursor is now on the first character of the inserted test if you
deleted the text in the forward direction (for example, DL, DNL, or DEL). If
you deleted the text toward the beginning of the buffer (for example, DBL,
-DEL, or -DL), the cursor is located to the right of the inserted text.
When the count specifier is used, the contents of the delete ne buffer are
inserted as many times as the count value.
The delete line buffer is loaded by using the D (delete) command with a line
entity: L, BL, EL, or NL. Each time a DL type command is used, the contents
of the delete line buffer are overwritten. The delete line buffer can contain
only one line or line portion at a time. If you use a count specifier with the D
command, for example D2L or 3DL, only the last line or line portion deleted
is in the delete line buffer. If no line has been deleted thus far in your EDT
session, UNDL inserts nothing.
EDT represents a line terminator as the character <CR> (CTRL/M, decimal
13) in all three of its delete entity buffers. Suppose you have a <CR>
character in the text you are deleting. When you undelete this text, EDT
changes the <CR> character into a line terminator and inserts the line
terminator in the current buffer.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Using DL and UNDL, reorganizes the list so that the cities are in alphabetical
order by state.
Montgomery, Alabama
Juneau, Alaska
Little Rock, Arkansas
Phoenix, Arizona
DL

(Move the cursor to the L in Little Rock.)
UNDL
Montgomery, Alabama
Juneau, Alaska
Phoenix, Arizona
Little Rock, Arkansas

EDT—310

EDT Commands
UNDL (Undelete Line) Command

example 2:

Using DL and UNDL, inserts the second line of text after you.
When you give it more thought, please contact me.
have had a chance to
DL

(Move the cursor to the g in give.)
UNDL
When you have had a chance to
give it more thought, please contact me.

example 3:

Using DL and UNDL, duplicates the separator line in the current location.
This is the end.
**********
DL
2UNDL
This is the end.
**********
**********

related
commands

— Keypad—UNDL

EDT—311

EDT Commands
UNDW (Undelete Word) Command

UNDW (Undelete Word)
Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

/coi/nfy UNDW

DESCRIPTION

The UNDW (undelete word) command inserts the current contents of the
delete word buffer to the left of the cursor. The cursor character, as well
as the text to the right of the cursor, moves to the right. The cursor is now
located on the first character of the inserted word or word portion if the
deletion was made in the forward direction (for example, with DW or DEW).
If the deletion was made toward the beginning of the buffer (for example,
DBW or -DW), the cursor is located to the right of the inserted text.
When you include the count specifier, the contents of the delete word buffer
are inserted as many times as the count value.
The delete word buffer is loaded by using the D (delete) command with a
word entity: W, BW, or EW. Each time you use one of these commands, the
contents of the delete word buffer are overwritten. The current contents of
the buffer are the most recently deleted word or word portion. When you
use a count specifier with a DW type command, only the last word or word
portion is in the delete word buffer. If no word has been deleted thus far in
your EDT session, UNDW inserts nothing.
EDT represents a line terminator as the character <CR> (CTRL/M, decimal
13) in all three of its delete entity buffers. Suppose you have a <CR>
character in the text you are deleting. When you undelete this text, EDT
changes the <CR> character into a line terminator and inserts the line
terminator in the current buffer.

EXAMPLES
example 1:

Using DW and UNDW, inserts the word PRINT at the beginning of lines 1,
2, and 3.
LETTER1.MEM
LETTER2.MEM
LETTER3.MEM
PRINT LETTER4.MEM
DW

(Move the cursor to the L in LETTER1.MEM.)
UNDW

(Move the cursor to the L in LETTER2.MEM.)
UNDW

(Move the cursor to the L in LETTER3.MEM.)
UNDW

EDT—312

EDT Commands
UNDW (Undelete Word) Command

(Move the cursor to the L in LETTER4.MEM.)
UNDW
PRINT
PRINT
PRINT
PRINT

example 2:

LETTER1.MEM
LETTER2.MEM
LETTER3.MEM
LETTER4.MEM

Using DW and UNDW, creates a separator line below the current line.
***** This is the end.
DW

(Move the cursor to the beginning of the next line, which is blank.)
5UNDW
This is the end.
***** ***** ***** ***** *****

related
commands

- Keypad—UNDW

EDT—313

EDT Commands
Up Arrow

Up Arrow-

Nokeypad

—

KEY
SEQUENCE
DESCRIPTION

The Up Arrow key moves the cursor up one line toward the top of the buffer
regardless of EDT's direction. -V. is the nokeypad definition for Up Arrow.
When you use the Up Arrow, EDT attempts to maintain the same vertical
column as it moves the cursor from one line to the next. If there are not
enough characters to fill out a line of text, the cursor moves to the end of
the short line. If you continue to use Up Arrow, the cursor will return to the
same vertical column for all lines that have enough characters. However,
once you press some other key, EDT cancels the column position for Up
Arrow and resets it the next time you use the function.
Note that Up Arrow is not a true nokeypad command.

EXAMPLE
Moves the cursor from the end of the last line to the end of the first line.
La Paz, Bolivia
Lima. Peru
Montevideo, Uruguay
Parimaribo, Surinam
Quito, Ecuador
Santiago, Chile

1a
Quito, Ecuador
Santiago, Chile

a+a
Montevideo, Uruguay
Parimaribo, Surinam
Quito, Ecuador

a+a
La Paz, Bolivia
Lima, Peru
Montevideo, Uruguay

related
commands

EDT—314

—

Keypad—Up Arrow

EDT Commands
XLATE Command

XLATE Command—Nokeypad
SYNTAX

XLATEsfr/ng

DESCRIPTION

The XLATE command can be used when EDT has been called by a running
program on a VAX/VMS system.
The string specifier enables you to pass information back to the calling
program. CTRL/Z signals the end of the string. The nature of the string is
determined by the type of program being run and the kind of information
you need to pass to the program. For example, the information could be a
DCL command or a variable that the program needs to continue running.
Since XLATE is available only as a nokeypad command, you might want to
define a key to have the XLATE function. You can either include the exact
information you want to pass to the program as the string specifier, or you
can include a prompt so that you can enter the information when you press
the function key. For example:
DEFINE KEY GOLD X AS »XLATEdirectory~Z."
DEFINE KEY GOLD X AS "XLATE?'Enter data:

'~Z."

For more information on using the XLATE command with callable EDT, see
the EDT routines section in VAX/VMS Utility Routines Reference Manual.

related
commands

None.

EDT—315

DEC Multinational Character Set

The DEC Multinational Character Set is an 8-bit character set with 256
characters. Each character is assigned a decimal equivalent number. These
numbers range from 0 to 255. The first 128 characters in the set correspond
to the ASCII character set.
Graphics shown in parentheses are ASCII control characters. These are
produced on most terminals by pressing the key indicated while holding
down the CONTROL key. Characters with numbers greater than 127 can
only be entered on VT100 and VT52 type terminals from a screen mode. For
terminals with LK201 keyboards, you can use the compose sequences to have
the graphic symbol for characters 128 through 255 appear on the screen. For
other VT100-type and VT52 terminals, you must use the keypad SPECINS
function or the nokeypad ASC command to enter these characters in your
text; EDT then displays the EDT symbol that corresponds to the character,
not the character graphic.

Graphic
(@)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(G)
(H)
(I)
(J)
(K)
(L)
(M)

(N)
(0)

EDT
Symbol
A<a
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
<LF>
< VT>
<FF>
<CR>
AN

(P)

(Q)

(R)
(S)
(T)

AR
AS
Arp

Decimal
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Abbrev.

Description

NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC 2
DC3
DC4

null character
start of heading
start of text
end of text
end of transmission
enquiry
acknowledge
bell
backspace
horizontal tabulation
line feed
vertical tabulation
form feed
carriage return
shift out
shift in
data link escape
device control 1
device control 2
device control 3
device control 4
ZK-1737/1-84

A—1

DEC Multinational Character Set

Graphic
(U)
(V)
(W)
(X)
(Y)
(Z)
(1)
(\)
(1)
(A)
(_)

EDT
Symbol
AU
AV
AW
AX
AY
AZ
<ESC>
A\
Al
A A

;
m

#
$
7c
&
’

(
)
*

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

0
1

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
j

=
>

Co
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

Decimal
Value
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72

Abbrev.

Description

NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
SP

negative acknowledge
synchronous idle
end of transmission block
cancel
end of medium
substitute
escape
file separator
group separator
record separator
unit separator
space
exclamation point
quotation marks (double quote)
number sign
dollar sign
percent sign
ampersand
apostrophe (single quote)
opening parenthesis
closing parenthesis
asterisk
plus
comma
hyphen or minus
period or decimal point
slash
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
colon
semicolon
less than
equals
greater than
question mark
commercial at
uppercase A
uppercase B
uppercase C
uppercase D
uppercase E
uppercase F
uppercase G
uppercase H

II
#
$
7c
&

(
)
*
+

,
/

0
1

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

<
=
>
?

Co
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H

ZK-1737/2-84

A—2

DEC Multinational Character Set

Graphic

EDT
Symbol

Decimal
Value

I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P

I
J
K
L
M
N
0
P

Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z

73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126

[

Q
R
S
T
U
V
w
X
Y
Z
c

]

a
b
c
d
e
f

g
h
i

j
k
1
m
n
0

P
q
r
s
t
u

y
z

{
1

}
~

Abbrev.

Description

I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P

uppercase I
uppercase J
uppercase K
uppercase L
uppercase M
uppercase N
uppercase O
uppercase P
uppercase Q
uppercase R
uppercase S
uppercase T
uppercase U
uppercase V
uppercase W
uppercase X
uppercase Y
uppercase Z
opening bracket
back slash
closing bracket
circumflex
underline (underscore)
grave accent
lowercase a
lowercase b
lowercase c
lowercase d
lowercase e
lowercase f
lowercase g
lowercase h
lowercase i
lowercase j
lowercase k
lowercase 1
lowercase m
lowercase n
lowercase o
lowercase p
lowercase q
lowercase r
lowercase s
lowercase t
lowercase u
lowercase v
lowercase w
lowercase x
lowercase y
lowercase z
opening brace
vertical line
closing brace
tilde

Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\

]
A
V

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
1
m
n
0
P
q
r
s
t
u
V

w
X

y
z
{
1
}
~

ZK-1737/3-84

A—3

DEC Multinational Character Set

Graphic
DEL

i
C
£
¥
§

X
©
a

±
2

EDT
Symbol

Decimal
Value

127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178

Abbrev.

Description

DEL
...
...
...
...

delete, rubout
I reserved 1
I reserved1
Ireservedl
I reserved1
index
next line
start of selected area
end of selected area
horizontal tab set
horizontal tab set with justification
vertical tab set
partial line down
partial line up
reverse index
single shift 2
single shift 3
device control string
private use 1
private use 2
set transmit state
cancel character
message waiting
start of protected area
end of protected area
Ireservedl
Ireservedl
Ireservedl
control sequence introducer
string terminator
operating system command
privacy message
application program command
Ireservedl
inverted exclamation mark
cent sign
pound sign
Ireservedl
yen sign
Ireservedl
section sign
general currency sign
copyright sign
feminine ordinal indicator
angle quotation mark left
1 reserved 1
I reserved 1
I reserved 1
| reserved 1
degree sign
plus/minus sign
superscript 2

IND
NEL
SSA
ESA
HTS
HTJ
VTS
PLD
PLU
RI
SS2
SS3
DCS
PU1
PU2
STS
CCH
MW
SPA
EPA
...
...
...
CSI
ST
OSC
PM
APC
...
i

<2
£
...
¥
...

ZK-1737/4-84

A—4

DEC Multinational Character Set

Graphic
3

%
•
l

EDT
Symbol

Decimal
Value

<3 A >
<XB4>
</U>
<P!>
<.A >
<XB8>
<1A >

179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230

<o_ >
<> > >

Va
V‘2

< 14>
< 12>
<XBE>
<??>
<A >
<A >
< A~>
< A“>
<A" >
<A*>
< AE >

A
A
A
A

A
A
JE
Q
E
E
E
E

<c,>

i
I
i
I

6
6
6
6

<0>
<0>
<cr>
<o~>
<0" >

<OE>

<o/>

<U>

<ir>

u
u

<U">
<U" >
< Y" >
<XDE>
<ss>
<a' >
<a>
<a >
<a~>
<a11 >
<a*>
<ae>

Y
B
a
a
a
a
a
a
ae

Abbrev.

Description

superscript 3
I reserved]
micro sign
paragraph sign, pilcrow
middle dot
I reserved]
superscript 1
masculine ordinal indicator
angle quotation mark right
fraction one quarter
fraction one half
I reserved1
inverted question mark
uppercase A with grave accent
uppercase A with acute accent
uppercase A with circumflex
uppercase A with tilde
uppercase A with umlaut,(diaeresis)
uppercase A with ring
uppercase AE diphthong
uppercase C with cedilla
uppercase E with grave accent
uppercase E with acute accent
uppercase E with circumflex
uppercase E with umlaut, (diaeresis)
uppercase I with grave accent
uppercase I with acute accent
uppercase I with circumflex
uppercase I with umlaut, (diaeresis)
I reserved]
uppercase N with tilde
uppercase O with grave accent
uppercase O with acute accent
uppercase O with circumflex
uppercase O with tilde
uppercase O with umlaut, (diaeresis)
uppercase OE ligature
uppercase O with slash
uppercase U with grave accent
uppercase U with acute accent
uppercase U with circumflex
uppercase U with umlaut, (diaeresis)
uppercase Y with umlaut, (diaeresis)
I reserved]
German lowercase sharp s
lowercase a with grave accent
lowercase a with acute accent
lowercase a with circumflex
lowercase a with tilde
lowercase a with umlaut, (diaeresis)
lowercase a with ring
lowercase ae diphthong

...
M-

•
...

l
0

J/4
V2
...
i

A
A
A
A
A
A

JE
Q
E
E
E
E

I
t

i
I
—
N

6
6
6

o
0
CE

0
U
U

u
u
Y
...

B
a
a
a
a
a
a
ae

ZK-1737/5-84

A—5

DEC Multinational Character Set

Graphic
9
e
e
e
e
l
i
i
i

EDT
Symbol

Decimal
Value

<C,>

231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255

<n">

6
6
6
6
o
oe
0
u

< o' >
<o >
<o~>
<o~>
<oM >
<oe>
<o/>
< u' >
<u >
<u~>
<u" >
<y" >

u
ii

Abbrev.

Description

Q
e
e
e
e
i
l
i
i
—

lowercase c with cedilla
lowercase e with grave accent
lowercase e with acute accent
lowercase e with circumflex
lowercase e with umlaut, (diaeresis)
lowercase i with grave accent
lowercase i with acute accent
lowercase i with circumflex
lowercase i with umlaut, (diaeresis)
[ reserved 1
lowercase n with tilde
lowercase o with grave accent
lowercase o with acute accent
lowercase o with circumflex
lowercase o with tilde
lowercase o with umlaut, (diaeresis)
lowercase oe ligature
lowercase o with slash
lowercase u with grave accent
lowercase u with acute accent
lowercase u with circumflex
lowercase u with umlaut, (diaeresis)
lowercase y with umlaut, (diaeresis)
[ reserved1
[reservedl

6
6
6
6
6
oe
0
u
u
u
ii

...
...

ZK-1737/6-84

A—6

Index

A
ADV (advance) (N) • EDT-244
ADVANCE (K) • EDT-15
APPEND (K) • EDT-17
APPEND (N) • EDT-245
ASC (ASCII) (N) • EDT-246

B
BACK (N) • EDT-247

Buffer specifier (L) (cont'd.)
with WRITE (L) • EDT-243
Buffer specifier (N)*EDT-249
with APPEND (N) • EDT-245
with CUT (N) • EDT-259
with PASTE (N) • EDT-281
Buffer-1 specifier (L)
with COPY (L)* EDT-120
with MOVE (L) • EDT-144
Buffer-2 specifier (L)
with COPY (L) • EDT-120
with MOVE (L)* EDT-144

BACKSPACE (K) • EDT-19
BACKUP (K) • EDT-20
BELL (N) • EDT-248
BOTTOM (K) • EDT-21
Bottom specifier (L)
with SET CURSOR (L) • EDT-166
/BRIEF qualifier (L)
with SUBSTITUTE (L)*EDT-234
BUFFER
buffer signal (L)* EDT-115
Buffer signal
BUFFER (L) • EDT-115
equal sign (=) (L)* EDT-115
equal sign (=) (N)*EDT-249
Buffer specifier (L)* EDT-115
with < null >(L)» EDT-148
with CHANGE (L)* EDT-117
with CLEAR (L) • EDT-119
with DELETE (L)* EDT-130
with FILL (L)* EDT-136
with FIND (L)* EDT-138
with INCLUDE (L) • EDT-141
with INSERT (L)* EDT-142
with PRINT (L) • EDT-151
with REPLACE (L) • EDT-157
with RESEQUENCE (L) • EDT-159
with SUBSTITUTE (L)*EDT-234
with TAB ADJUST (L) • EDT-239
with TYPE (L) • EDT-241

CHANGE (L)* EDT-117
CHAR (K) • EDT-22
Character
decimal value* A-1
Character set—DEC Multinational* A-1
Character specifier (N)
with circumflex (_~) (N)*EDT-253
Character symbol* A-1
CHGC (change case) (N)*EDT-250
CHGL (change case lower) (N)*EDT-251
CHGU (change case upper) (N)*EDT-252
CHNGCASE (K) • EDT-23
Circumflex (_*) (N) • EDT-253
CLEAR (L)* EDT-119
CLSS (clear search string) (N)*EDT-254
COMMAND (K) • EDT-25
COPY (L)* EDT-120
Count specifier (N)*EDT-258
with “move" (N)*EDT-279
with APPEND (N) • EDT-245
with CHGC (change case) (N)*EDT-250
with CHGL (change case lower) (N)* EDT-251
with CHGU (change case upper) (N)*EDT-252
with circumflex (_*) (N)* EDT-253
with CUT (N) • EDT-259
with D (delete) (N) • EDT-260
with FILL (N) • EDT-272
with PASTE (N)* EDT-281

Index—1

Index

Count specifier (N) (cont'd.)

DEC Multinational Character Set*A-1

with R (replace) (N)*EDT-285

Decimal value of character* A-1

with S (substitute) (N)*EDT-288

DEFINE KEY (L)* EDT-125

with SHL (shift left) (N) • EDT-292
with SHR (shift right) (N) • EDT-293
with SN (substitute next) (N)*EDT-294
with TAB (N) • EDT-298
with TADJ (tab adjust) (N) • EDT-300
with TD (tab decrement) (N)*EDT-303
with Tl (tab increment) (N)*EDT-306
with UNDC (undelete character) (N)*EDT-309
with UNDL (undelete line) (N)*EDT-310
with UNDW (undelete word) (N)*EDT-312

DEFINE MACRO (L)* EDT-128
DEFK (define key) (N)*EDT-263
DEL C (K) • EDT-50
DEL EOL (K) • EDT-52
DEL L (K) • EDT-56
DEL W (K) • EDT-58
DELETE (K) • EDT-54

CTRL/A (K) • EDT-27
CTRL/C (K) • EDT-29
CTRL/C (L)* EDT-122
CTRL/C (N) • EDT-256
CTRL/D (K) • EDT-31
CTRL/E (K) • EDT-33

DELETE (L)* EDT-130
DESEL (deactivate select) (N)*EDT-264
DLWC (default lowercase) (N) • EDT-265
DMOV (default move) (N)*EDT-266
Do (K) (LK201 Keyboard)
See also ENTER (K) • EDT-60
Down Arrow (K)*EDT-62
Down Arrow (N)*EDT-267
DUPC (default uppercase) (N)*EDT-268

CTRL/F (K) • EDT-66
CTRL/H (K) • EDT-19
CTRL/I (K) • EDT-104
CTRL/J (K) • EDT-78

CTRL/K (K) • EDT-35
CTRL/L (K) • EDT-38
CTRL/M (K) • EDT-40
CTRL/R (K) • EDT-42
CTRL/R (L) • EDT-123

ENTER (K) • EDT-63
Entity specifier (N)*EDT-269
with “move" (N)*EDT-279
with APPEND (N)*EDT-245

CTRL/T (K) • EDT-43

with CHGC (change case) (N)*EDT-250

CTRL/U (K) • EDT-45
CTRL/W (K) • EDT-46
CTRL/Z

with CHGL (change case lower) (N)*EDT-251
with CHGU (change case upper) (N)*EDT-252

with I (insert) (N)*EDT-275
with INSERT (L)* EDT-142
with R (replace) (N)*EDT-285
with REPLACE (L)* EDT-157
CTRL/Z (K) • EDT-47
CTRL/Z (L) • EDT-124
CTRL/Z (N) • EDT-257
CUT (K) • EDT-48
CUT (N) • EDT-259

D
D (delete) (N) • EDT-260
DATE (N) • EDT-262

Index—2

with CUT (N)* EDT-259
with D (delete) (N)*EDT-260
with FILL (N) • EDT-272
with R (replace) (N)*EDT-285
with TADJ (tab adjust) (N) • EDT-300
EOL (K) • EDT-65
Equal sign (=)
buffer signal (L)*EDT-115
buffer signal (N)*EDT-249
EX (exit to line mode) (N)*EDT-270
EXIT (L) • EDT-133
EXT (extend) (N)* EDT-271

Index

HELP (N) • EDT-274

F
F12 (K)
See also BACKSPACE (K)
FI2 (K) [LK201 equivalent for BACKSPACE (K)]•
EDT-19
FI3 (K) (LK201 keyboard)
See also LINEFEED (K)®EDT-78
File specification specifier (L)
with EXIT (L)#EDT-133
with HELP (L)#EDT-170
with INCLUDE (L)«EDT-141
with PRINT (L) • EDT-151
with SET COMMAND (L) • EDT-164
with WRITE (L) • EDT-243
FILL (K) • EDT-66
FILL (L) • EDT-136
FILL (N) • EDT-272
FIND (K) • EDT-68
Find (K) (LK201 keyboard)
See also FIND (K) • EDT-68
FIND (L)* EDT-138
FNDNXT (K) • EDT-70

G
GOLD (K)»EDT-72
GOLD/A (K) • EDT-27
GOLD/D (K) • EDT-31
GOLD/E (K) • EDT-33
GOLD/R (K) • EDT-42
GOLD/T (K) • EDT-43
GOLD/U (K) • EDT-45
GOLD/W (K) • EDT-46
GOLD/Z (K) • EDT-47

H
HELP (K) • EDT-75
Help (K) (LK201 keyboard)
See also HELP (K)* EDT-75
HELP (L) • EDT-140

i
I (insert) (N)»EDT-275
INCLUDE (L) • EDT-141
Increment specifier (L)
with /SEQUENCE qualifier (L)»EDT-161
with EXIT/SEQUENCE (L)»EDT-133
with RESEQUENCE/SEQUENCE (L)»EDT-159
with WRITE/SEQUENCE (L)» EDT-243
Initial specifier (L)
with /SEQUENCE qualifier (L)«EDT-161
with EXIT/SEQUENCE (L)* EDT-133
with RESEQUENCE/SEQUENCE (L)»EDT-159
with WRITE/SEQUENCE (L) • EDT-243
INSERT (L)* EDT-142
Insert Here (K) (LK201 keyboard)
See also PASTE (K)«EDT-84

K
Key name specifier (L)
with DEFINE KEY (L) • EDT-125
KS (ked substitute) (N)»EDT-277

L
Left Arrow (K) • EDT-76, EDT-278
Left Arrow (N) • EDT-278
LINE (K) • EDT-77
Line mode
command
with EXT (extend) (N)» EDT-271
LINEFEED (K)«EDT-78

M
Macro name specifier (L)
with DEFINE MACRO (L)* EDT-128

Index—3

Index

MOVE (L) • EDT-144

Qualifier
n specifier (L)
with /DUPLICATE qualifier (L)»EDT-132
"n" specifier (L)
with SET WRAP (L)«EDT-197
with TAB ADJUST (L)*EDT-239
NEXT (L) See SUBSTITUTE NEXT (L)
Next Screen (LK201 keyboard)
See +Sect (K)»EDT-94
Nokeypad command specifier (L)
with CHANGE (L)«EDT-117

/BRIEF (L)
with SUBSTITUTE (L)»EDT-234
with TYPE (L) • EDT-241
/DUPLICATE (L) • EDT-132
with COPY (L) • EDT-120
/NOTYPE (L) • EDT-147
with SUBSTITUTE (L)»EDT-234
/QUERY (L) • EDT-152
with COPY (L)* EDT-120
with DELETE (L)»EDT-130
with MOVE (L) • EDT-144

/NOTYPE qualifier (L)
with SUBSTITUTE (L)«EDT-234
Number specifier (L)

with SUBSTITUTE (L)»EDT-234
/SAVE (L) • EDT-160

with SET LINES (L)«EDT-172

with EXIT (L) • EDT-133
with QUIT (L)* EDT-154

with SET TAB (L)* EDT-188
Number specifier (N)
with ASC (N) • EDT-246

/SEQUENCE (L)*EDT-161
with EXIT (L) • EDT-133
with RESEQUENCE (L)«EDT-159
with WRITE (L) • EDT-243
/STAY (L) • EDT-232
with TYPE (L) • EDT-241
/QUERY qualifier (L)»EDT-152

OPEN LINE (K) • EDT-80
“move" (N) • EDT-279

p
PAGE (K) • EDT-82
PASTE (K) • EDT-84
PASTE (N) • EDT-281
Percent sign (%)
with range specifier (L)«EDT-148
Prev Screen (LK201 keyboard)
See -Sect (K)»EDT-94
PRINT (L)*EDT-151
Prompt type specifier (L)
with SET PROMPT (L)* EDT-178
with SHOW PROMPT (L)»EDT-215

Index—4

with SUBSTITUTE (L)»EDT-234
QUIT (L) • EDT-154
QUIT (N) • EDT-284

R
R (replace) (N)»EDT-285
Range specifier (L)«EDT-155
with < null >(L)» EDT-148
with CHANGE (L)»EDT-117
with DELETE (L)»EDT-130
with FILL (L) • EDT-136
with FIND (L) • EDT-138
with INCLUDE (L)*EDT-141
with INSERT (L)«EDT-142
with PRINT (L)*EDT-151
with REPLACE (L)* EDT-157
with RESEQUENCE (L)»EDT-159

Index

Range specifier (L) (cont'd.)
with SUBSTITUTE (LCEDT-234

SET FNF (LC EDT-169
SET HELP (L)» EDT-170

with TAB ADJUST (LCEDT-239
with TYPE (L) • EDT-241
with WRITE (L) • EDT-243
Range-1 specifier (L)
with COPY (L) • EDT-120
with MOVE (L) • EDT-144

SET KEYPAD (LCEDT-171
SET LINES (L) • EDT-172
SET MODE (L) • EDT-174

Range-2 specifier (L)

SET MODE CHANGE (LCEDT-174
SET MODE LINE (LCEDT-174
SET NOAUTOREPEAT (LC EDT-162
SET NOFNF (LC EDT-169

with COPY (L) • EDT-120

SET NOKEYPAD (LCEDT-171

with MOVE (L) • EDT-144
REF (refresh) (NCEDT-286

SET NONUMBERS (LC EDT-175
SET NOQUIET (L)* EDT-180

Remove (LK201 Keyboard)

SET NOREPEAT (LCEDT-181

See also CUT (K) • EDT-48
REPLACE (K) • EDT-87

SET NOSUMMARY (LC EDT-187
SET NOTAB (LC EDT-188

REPLACE (L) • EDT-157

SET NOTRUNCATE (L) • EDT-193
SET NOVERIFY (LC EDT-194

RESEQUENCE (LC EDT-159
RESET (K) • EDT-89
RETURN (K) • EDT-40, EDT-91
Right Arrow (KCEDT-93
Right Arrow (NCEDT-287

s
S (substitute) (NCEDT-288
SECT (K) • EDT-94
-Sect (K) (LK201 keyboard)
See also SECT (KC EDT-94
+Sect (K) (LK201 keyboard)
See also SECT (KC EDT-94
SEL (select) (NCEDT-290
SELECT (K) • EDT-96

SET NOWRAP (LC EDT-197
SET NUMBERS (LC EDT-175
SET PARAGRAPH (L)* EDT-176
SET PARAGRAPH NOWPS (LC EDT-176
SET PARAGRAPH WPS (LC EDT-176
SET PROMPT (L) • EDT-178
SET QUIET (LC EDT-180
SET REPEAT (LCEDT-181
SET SCREEN (LC EDT-182
SET SEARCH (LC EDT-184
SET SEARCH BEGIN (LC EDT-184
SET SEARCH BOUNDED (LC EDT-184
SET SEARCH CASE INSENSITIVE (LC EDT-184
SET SEARCH DIACRITICAL INSENSITIVE (L) •
EDT-184
SET SEARCH END (LC EDT-184
SET SEARCH EXACT (LC EDT-184

Select (LK201 keyboard)

SET SEARCH GENERAL (LC EDT-184

See also SELECT (K)* EDT-96
SET AUTOREPEAT (LC EDT-162
SET CASE (L) • EDT-163
SET CASE LOWER (LC EDT-163
SET CASE NONE (L) • EDT-163
SET CASE UPPER (LC EDT-163
SET COMMAND (L)* EDT-164
SET CURSOR (L) • EDT-166
SET ENTITY (LC EDT-167
SET ENTITY PAGE (L) • EDT-167
SET ENTITY PARAGRAPH (LC EDT-167
SET ENTITY SENTENCE (LC EDT-167
SET ENTITY WORD (LC EDT-167

SET SEARCH UNBOUNDED (L) • EDT-184
SET SEARCH WPS (LC EDT-184
SET SUMMARY (LC EDT-187
SET TAB (L) • EDT-188
SET TERMINAL EDIT (LC EDT-190
SET TERMINAL EIGHTBIT (LC EDT-190
SET TERMINAL HCPY (LC EDT-190
SET TERMINAL NOEDIT (LC EDT-190
SET TERMINAL NOEIGHTBIT (LC EDT-190
SET TERMINAL NOSCROLL (LC EDT-190
SET TERMINAL SCROLL (L)* EDT-190
SET TERMINAL VT100 (L)* EDT-190
SET TERMINAL VT52 (L)* EDT-190
SET TEXT END (LC EDT-192
Index—5

Index

SET TEXT PAGE (L)* EDT-192
SET TRUNCATE (L)* EDT-193
SET VERIFY (L)* EDT-194
SET WORD DELIMITER (L)* EDT-195
SET WORD NODELIMITER (L)* EDT-195
SET WRAP (L)* EDT-197
SHL (shift left) (N)*EDT-292
SHOW AUTOREPEAT (L)* EDT-199

Sign (+I-) specifier (N) (cont'd.)
with CHGU (change case upper) (N)*EDT-252
with CUT (N) • EDT-259
with D (delete) (N)*EDT-260
with FILL (N) • EDT-272
with R (replace) (N)*EDT-285
with S (substitute) (N)*EDT-288
with SN (substitute next) (N)*EDT-294

SHOW BUFFER (L)*EDT-200
SHOW CASE*EDT-201
SHOW COMMAND (L) • EDT-202

with TADJ (tab adjust) (N)*EDT-300
Sign specifier (N)
with SSEL (search and select) (N)*EDT-295

SHOW CURSOR (L) • EDT-203
SHOW ENTITY (L)*EDT-204

SN (substitute next) (N)*EDT-294

SHOW ENTITY PAGE (L)*EDT-204
SHOW ENTITY PARAGRAPH (L)*EDT-204
SHOW ENTITY SENTENCE (L)*EDT-204
SHOW ENTITY WORD (L)*EDT-204
SHOW FILES (L) • EDT-205
SHOW FNF (L) • EDT-206
SHOW HELP (L) • EDT-207
SHOW KEY (L) • EDT-208
SHOW KEYPAD • EDT-210
SHOW LINES (L) • EDT-211
SHOW MODE (L) • EDT-212
SHOW NUMBERS (L) • EDT-213
SHOW PARAGRAPH (L)* EDT-214
SHOW PROMPT (L)* EDT-215
SHOW QUIET (L)* EDT-216
SHOW REPEAT (L) • EDT-217
SHOW SCREEN (L)* EDT-218
SHOW SEARCH (L)* EDT-219
SHOW SUMMARY (L)*EDT-221
SHOW TAB (L) • EDT-222
SHOW TERMINAL (L)*EDT-224
SHOW TEXT (L) • EDT-225
SHOW TEXT END (L) • EDT-225
SHOW TEXT PAGE (L) • EDT-225
SHOW TRUNCATE (L)*EDT-226
SHOW VERIFY (L) • EDT-227
SHOW VERSION (L) • EDT-228
SHOW WORD (L) • EDT-230
SHOW WRAP (L) • EDT-231
SHR (shift right) (N)*EDT-293
Sign (M-) specifier (N)
with “move" (N)*EDT-279
with APPEND (N) • EDT-245
with CHGC (change case) (N) • EDT-250
with CHGL (change case lower) (N) • EDT-251

Index—6

[SORT="%“] % (percent sign)
with range specifier (L)* EDT-148
[SORT=“=“] = (equal sign)
buffer signal (L)*EDT-115
[SORT=“ <ZK\ '] <3 (DELETE) (LK201 keyboard)*
EDT-54
[SORT="BRIEF“] /BRIEF qualifier (L)*EDT-114
with TYPE (L) • EDT-241
[SORT="DUPLICATE“] /DUPLICATE qualifier (L)*
EDT-132
[SORT=“line-to-be-inserted“] • EDT -157
[SORT="line-to-be-inserted“] _ • EDT -142
[SORT="NOTYPE“] /NOTYPE qualifier (L) • EDT147
[SORT=“QUERY“] /QUERY qualifier (L)
with DELETE (L)* EDT-130
[SORT="SAVE“] /SAVE qualifier (L)* EDT-160
[SORT="STAY"] /STAY qualifier (L)*EDT-232
with TYPE (L)* EDT-241
[sort=(-d-) ]
(sign) specifier (N)
with (move) (N)*EDT-279
[sort='DUPLICATE'] /DUPLICATE qualifier (L)
with COPY (L)* EDT-120
[sort='nuir] <null> (L)*EDT-148
[sort='QUERY'] /QUERY qualifier (L)
with COPY (L)* EDT-120
with MOVE (L)* EDT-144
[sort='SAVE'] /SAVE qualifier (L)
with EXIT (L)* EDT-133
with QUIT (L)* EDT-154
[sort='SEQUENCE'] /SEQUENCE qualifier (L)*
EDT-161
with EXIT (L)* EDT-133
with RESEQUENCE (L)* EDT-159
with WRITE (L) • EDT-243
[sort="-d-“ ] -M- (sign) specifier (N)
with APPEND (N) • EDT-245

Index

[sort=“+l-" ] 4- (sign) specifier (N) (cont'd.)
with CHGC (change case) (N)*EDT-250
with CHGL (change case lower) (N)*EDT-251
with CHGU (change case upper) (N)«EDT-252
with CUT (N) • EDT-259
with D (delete) (N) • EDT-260
with FILL (N) • EDT-272
with R (replace) (N)» EDT-285
with S (substitute) (N)#EDT-288
with SN (substitute next) (N)»EDT-294
with TADJ (tab adjust) (N)* EDT-300
[sort="=" ] = (equal sign)
buffer signal (N)*EDT-249
[sort="~“ ]
(circumflex) (N)« EDT-253
Specifier
bottom (L)
with SET CURSOR (L)» EDT-166
buffer (L) • EDT-115
with <null> (L) • EDT-148
with CHANGE (L)* EDT-1 17
with CLEAR (L)# EDT-119
with DELETE (L) • EDT-130
with FILL (L) • EDT-136
with FIND (L) • EDT-138
with INCLUDE (L) • EDT-141
with INSERT (L) • EDT-142
with PRINT (L)* EDT-151
with REPLACE (L)* EDT-157
with RESEQUENCE (L) • EDT-159
with SUBSTITUTE (L)*EDT-234
with TAB ADJUST (L) • EDT-239
with TYPE (L) • EDT-241
with WRITE (L) • EDT-243
buffer (N) • EDT-249
with APPEND (N)»EDT-245
with CUT (N) • EDT-259
with PASTE (N) • EDT-281
buffer-1 (L)
with COPY (L)* EDT-120
with MOVE (L) • EDT-144
buffer-2 (L)
with COPY (L) • EDT-120
with MOVE (L) • EDT-144
character (N)
with circumflex (_") (N) • EDT-253
count (N) • EDT-258
with “move" (N)*EDT-279
with APPEND (N)*EDT-245

Specifier
count (N) (cont'd.)
with CHGC (change case) (N)»EDT-250
with CHGL (change case lower) (N)*EDT251
with CHGU (change case upper) (N)#EDT252
with circumflex (_") (N)« EDT-253
with CUT (N) • EDT-259
with D (delete) (N) • EDT-260
with FILL (N) • EDT-272
with PASTE (N)* EDT-281
with R (replace) (N) • EDT-285
with S (substitute) (N)#EDT-288
with SHL (shift left) (N) • EDT-292
with SHR (shift right) (N) • EDT-293
with SN (substitute next) (N)*EDT-294
with TAB (N) • EDT-298
with TADJ (tab adjust) (N) • EDT-300
with TD (tab decrement) (N)»EDT-303
with Tl (tab increment) (N)»EDT-306
with UNDC (undelete character) (N)*EDT309
with UNDL (undelete line) (N)«EDT-310
with UNDW (undelete word) (N)«EDT-312
entity (N) • EDT-269
with "move" (N)*EDT-279
with APPEND (N)«EDT-245
with CHGC (change case) (N)«EDT-250
with CHGL (change case lower) (N)«EDT251
with CHGU (change case upper) (N)»EDT252
with CUT (N)* EDT-259
with D (delete) (N) • EDT-260
with FILL (N) • EDT-272
with R (replace) (N) • EDT-285
with TADJ (tab adjust) (N) • EDT-300
file specification (L)
with EXIT (L)* EDT-133
with HELP (L)* EDT-170
with INCLUDE (L) • EDT-141
with PRINT (L)* EDT-151
with SET COMMAND (L) • EDT-164
with WRITE (L) • EDT-243
increment (L)
with /SEQUENCE qualifier (L) • EDT-161
with EXIT/SEQUENCE (L) • EDT-133

Index—7

Index

Specifier
increment (L) (cont'd.)
with RESEQUENCE/SEQUENCE (L) • EDT159
with WRITE/SEQUENCE (L)*EDT-243
initial (L)
with /SEQUENCE qualifier (L)»EDT-161
with EXIT/SEQUENCE (L)«EDT-133
with RESEQUENCE/SEQUENCE (L) • EDT159
with WRITE/SEQUENCE (L)«EDT-243
key name (L)
with DEFINE KEY (L)* EDT-125
macro name (L)
with DEFINE MACRO (L)«EDT-128
n (L)
with /DUPLICATE qualifier (L)«EDT-132
with SET WRAP (L)* EDT-197
with TAB ADJUST (L) • EDT-239

Specifier
range-2 (L) (cont'd.)
with MOVE (Lf EDT-144
sign (-d-) (N)
with “move" (N)«EDT-279
with APPEND (N) • EDT-245
with CHGC (change case) (N)*EDT-250
with CHGL (change case lower) (N)»EDT251
with CHGU (change case upper) (N)«EDT252
with CUT (N) • EDT-259
with D (delete) (N) • EDT-260
with FILL (N) • EDT-272
with R (replace) (N)»EDT-285
with S (substitute) (N)*EDT-288
with SN (substitute next) (N)«EDT-294
with TADJ (tab adjust) (N) • EDT-300
sign (N)

nokeypad command (L)
with CHANGE (L)*EDT-117

with SSEL (search and select) (N)»EDT-295
string

number (L)
with SET LINES (L)* EDT-172

with XLATE (N)»EDT-315
string (K)«EDT-100
string (L) • EDT-233

with SET TAB (L)»EDT-188
number (N)
with ASC (N) • EDT-246
prompt type (L)
with SET PROMPT (L)»EDT-178
with SHOW PROMPT (LCEDT-215
range (L)* EDT-155
with < null > (L) • EDT-148
with CHANGE (L)»EDT-117
with DELETE (L)»EDT-130

with DEFINE KEY (L)»EDT-125
with SET ENTITY (Lf EDT-167
with SET PROMPT (L)»EDT-178
with SET TEXT (L)* EDT-192
string (N)»EDT-296
with SSEL (search and select) (N)«EDT-295
string-1 (L)
with SUBSTITUTE (L) • EDT-234

with FILL (L) • EDT-136

with SUBSTITUTE NEXT (L)*EDT-237
string-1 (N)

with FIND (L) • EDT-138
with INCLUDE (L)»EDT-141
with INSERT (L)»EDT-142
with PRINT (L) • EDT-151
with REPLACE (L)«EDT-157
with RESEQUENCE (L)»EDT-159
with SUBSTITUTE (L) • EDT-234
with TAB ADJUST (L)» EDT-239
with TYPE (L) • EDT-241
with WRITE (L) • EDT-243

with S (substitute) (N)»EDT-288
string-2 (L)
with SUBSTITUTE (L)* EDT-234
with SUBSTITUTE NEXT (L)«EDT-237
string-2 (N)
with S (substitute) (N)«EDT-288
subtopic (L)
with HELP (L) • EDT-140
top (L)
with SET CURSOR (L)»EDT-166

range-1 (L)
with COPY (L) • EDT-120
with MOVE (L)* EDT-144
range-2 (L)
with COPY (L) • EDT-120

Index—8

topic (L)
with HELP (L)* EDT-140
width (L)
with SET SCREEN (L)«EDT-182
SPECINS (K) • EDT-98

Index

SSEL (search and select) (N)*EDT-295

String specifier
with XLATE (N)*EDT-315
String specifier (K)* EDT-100
String specifier (L)*EDT-233
with DEFINE KEY (L)* EDT-125

UND C (K) • EDT-107

with SET ENTITY (L)* EDT-167

UND L (K) • EDT-108

with SET PROMPT (L)* EDT-178
with SET TEXT (L)* EDT-192

UND W (K) • EDT-110
UNDO (undelete character) (N)*EDT-309
UNDL (undelete line) (N)*EDT-310
UNDW (undelete word) (N)*EDT-312
Up Arrow (K) • EDT-112
Up Arrow (N)*EDT-314

String specifier (N) • EDT-296
with SSEL (search and select) (N) • EDT-295
String-1 specifier (L)
with SUBSTITUTE (L)*EDT-234
with SUBSTITUTE NEXT (L)*EDT-237
String-1 specifier (N)
with S (substitute) (N) • EDT-288
String-2 specifier (L)
with SUBSTITUTE (L) • EDT-234
with SUBSTITUTE NEXT (L)*EDT-237
String-2 specifier (N)
with S (substitute) (N) • EDT-288
SUBS (K) • EDT-101
SUBSTITUTE (L)« EDT-234
SUBSTITUTE NEXT (L)*EDT-237
Subtopic specifier (L)
with HELP (L) • EDT-140
Symbols for characters* A-1

w
Width specifier (L)
with SET SCREEN (L)* EDT-182
with*EDT-142, EDT-157
WORD (K)* EDT-113
WRITE (L) • EDT-243

x
XLATE (N) • EDT-315

TAB (K)* EDT-104
TAB (N) • EDT-298
TAB ADJUST (L)*EDT-239
TADJ (tab adjust) (N) • EDT-300
TC (tab compute) (N)*EDT-301
TD (tab decrement) (N) • EDT-303
TGSEL (toggle select) (N) • EDT-305
Tl (tab increment) (N) • EDT-306
TOP (K)* EDT-106
TOP (N) • EDT-308
Top specifier (L)
with SET CURSOR (L)* EDT-166
Topic specifier (L)
with HELP (L)* EDT-140
TYPE (L) • EDT-241

Index—9

VAX EDT
Reference Manual
AA-Z300A-TE

READER'S
rnMMFNT^

Note: This form is for document comments only. DIGITAL will use comments
submitted on this form at the company's discretion. If you require a written reply
and are eligible to receive one under Software Performance Report (SPR) service,
submit your comments on an SPR form.

Did you find this manual understandable, usable, and well organized? Please make suggestions for
improvement.

Did you find errors in this manual? If so, specify the error and the page number.

Please indicate the type of user/reader that you most nearly represent:
□
□
□
□
□
□

Assembly language programmer
Higher-level language programmer
Occasional programmer (experienced)
User with little programming experience
Student programmer
Other (please specify) _

Name _Date_
Organization _
Street City _State_Zip Code_
or Country

Do Not Tear - Fold Here and Tape

No Postage
Necessary
if Mailed in the
United States

GDSBOSD
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT N0.33 MAYNARD MASS.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

SSG PUBLICATIONS ZK1-3/J35
DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
110 SPIT BROOK ROAD
NASHUA, NEW HAMPSHIRE 03062-2698

Do Not Tear - Fold Here

Cut Along Dotted Line

— —